366
Doc Ref: LMAN021_R2V2 Soft Components Functions Basic Program Instructions Applied Instructions High Speed Counter (HSC) Pulse Output Communication Function PID Control Function C Language Function Block Sequential Function Block Special Function Instructions Program Application Samples PLC Software MANUAL

PLC Software MANUAL - Xinje-support-centre-listo. · PDF filePLC Software Manual Page 3 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2 3-14 [NOP], [END] 76 3-15 [GROUP], [GROUPE] 77 3-16 Programming Notes 78

Embed Size (px)

Citation preview

Page 1: PLC Software MANUAL - Xinje-support-centre-listo. · PDF filePLC Software Manual Page 3 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2 3-14 [NOP], [END] 76 3-15 [GROUP], [GROUPE] 77 3-16 Programming Notes 78

Doc Ref: LMAN021_R2V2

Soft Components FunctionsBasic Program InstructionsApplied InstructionsHigh Speed Counter (HSC)Pulse OutputCommunication FunctionPID Control FunctionC Language Function BlockSequential Function BlockSpecial Function InstructionsProgram Application Samples

PLC Software MANUAL

Page 2: PLC Software MANUAL - Xinje-support-centre-listo. · PDF filePLC Software Manual Page 3 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2 3-14 [NOP], [END] 76 3-15 [GROUP], [GROUPE] 77 3-16 Programming Notes 78

PLC Software Manual Page 2 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2

XC Series PLC Software Manual

Index Page

Chapter 1 Program Summary

1-1 Program Controllers Features 9

1-2 Programming Language 11

1-2-1 Types of Language Available 11

1-3 Program Formats 12

Chapter 2 Soft Components Functions 2-1 Summary of Soft Components 15

2-2 Structure of Soft Components 19

2-2-1 Memory Structure 19

2-2-2 BitSoft Components Structure 22

2-3 Soft Components List 23

2-3-1 Soft Components List 23

2-3-2 Power-off Retentive Zone 29

2-4 Input / Output Relays ( X, Y ) 31

2-5 Auxiliary Relay ( M ) 34

2-6 Status Relay ( S ) 36

2-7 Timer ( T ) 37

2-8 Counter ( C ) 40

2-9 Data Register ( D ) 44

2-10 Constant ( K, H ) 47

2-11 Program Principle 49

Chapter 3 Basic Program Instructions

3-1 Basic Instruction List 56

3-2 [LD], [LDI], [OUT] 60

3-3 [AND], [ANI] 62

3-4 [OR], [ORI] 63

3-5 [LDP], [LDF], [ANDP], [ANDF], [ORP], [ORF] 64

3-6 [LDD], [LDDI], [ANDD], [ANDDI], [ORD], [ORDI], [OUTD] 66

3-7 [ORB] 68

3-8 [ANB] 69

3-9 [MCS], [MCR] 70

3-10 [ALT] 71

3-11 [PLS], [PLF] 72

3-12 [SET], [RST] 73

3-13 [OUT], [RST] (Aim at counter device) 75

Page 3: PLC Software MANUAL - Xinje-support-centre-listo. · PDF filePLC Software Manual Page 3 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2 3-14 [NOP], [END] 76 3-15 [GROUP], [GROUPE] 77 3-16 Programming Notes 78

PLC Software Manual Page 3 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2

3-14 [NOP], [END] 76

3-15 [GROUP], [GROUPE] 77

3-16 Programming Notes 78

Chapter 4 Applied Instructions

4-1 Applied Instructions List 80

4-2 Reading Method of Applied Instructions 87

4-3 Program Flow Instructions 90

4-3-1 Condition Jump [ CJ ] 90

4-3-2 Call Subroutine [ CALL ] 92

& Subroutine Return [ SRET ]

4-3-3 Flow [ SET ], [ ST ]……. 93

4-3-4 [ FOR ] & [ NEXT ] 95

4-3-5 [ FEND ] & [ END ] 97

4-4 Data Compare Function 98

4-4-1 LD Compare [ LD ] 99

4-4-2 AND Compare [ AND ] 100

4-4-3 Parallel Compare [ OR ] 102

4-5 Data Move 104

4-5-1 Data Compare [ CMP ] 105

4-5-2 Data Compare Zone [ ZCP ] 106

4-5-3 MOV [ MOV ] 107

4-5-4 Data Block Move [ BMOV ] 109

4-5-5 Data Block Move [ PMOV ] 111

4-5-6 Fill Move [ FMOV ] 112

4-5-7 FlashROM Write [ FWRT ] 114

4-5-8 Zone Set [ MSET ] 116

4-5-9 Zone Re-set [ ZRST ] 117

4-5-10 Swap High & Low Byte [ SWAP ] 118

4-5-11 Exchange [ XCH ] 119

4-6 Data Operation Instructions 120

4-6-1 Addition [ ADD ] 121

4-6-2 Subtraction [ SUB ] 123

4-6-3 Multiplication [ MUL ] 124

4-6-4 Division [ DIV ] 127

4-6-5 Increment [ INC ] & Decrement [ DEC ] 129

4-6-6 Mean [ MEAN ] 131

4-6-7 Logic AND [ WAND ], Logic OR [ WOR ] 132

& Logic Exclusive [ WXOR ]

4-6-8 Converse [CML ] 134

4-6-9 Negative [ NEG ] 136

Page 4: PLC Software MANUAL - Xinje-support-centre-listo. · PDF filePLC Software Manual Page 3 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2 3-14 [NOP], [END] 76 3-15 [GROUP], [GROUPE] 77 3-16 Programming Notes 78

PLC Software Manual Page 4 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2

4-7 Shift Instructions 137

4-7-1 Arithmetic Shift Left [ SHL ] 138

& Arithmetic Shift Right [ SHR ]

4-7-2 Logic Shift Left [ LSL ] 140

& Logic Shift Right [ LSR ]

4-7-3 Rotation Shift Left [ ROL ] 142

& Rotation Shift Right [ ROR ]

4-7-4 Bit Shift Left [ SFTL ] 144

4-7-5 Bit Shift Right [ SFTR ] 146

4-7-6 Word Shift Left [ WSFL ] 148

4-7-4 Word Shift Right [ WSFR ] 150

4-8 Data Convert 152

4-8-1 Single Word Integer converts to 153

Double Word Integer [ WTD ]

4-8-2 16 Bits Integer converts to 154

Float Point [ FLT ]

4-8-3 Float Point converts to Integer [ INT ] 155

4-8-4 BCD Converts to Binary [ BIN ] 156

4-8-5 Binary Converts to BCD [ BCD ] 157

4-8-6 Hex. Converts to ASCII [ ASCI ] 158

4-8-7 ASCII Converts to Hex. [ HEX ] 160

4-8-8 Coding [ DECO ] 162

4-8-9 High Bit Encoding [ ENCO ] 164

4-8-10 Low Bit Encoding [ ENCOL ] 166

4-9 Floating Operation 168

4-9-1 Float Compare [ ECMP ] 169

4-9-2 Float Zone Compare [ EZCP ] 171

4-9-3 Float Add [ EADD ] 173

4-9-4 Float Sub [ ESUB ] 175

4-9-5 Float Mul [ EMUL ] 176

4-9-6 Float Div [ EDIV ] 177

4-9-7 Float Square Root [ ESQR] 178

4-9-8 Sine [ SIN ] 179

4-9-9 Cosine [ COS ] 180

4-9-10 TAN [ TAN] 181

4-9-11 ASIN [ ASIN ] 182

4-9-12 ACOS [ ACOS ] 183

4-9-13 ATAN [ ATAN ] 184

4-10 RTC Instructions 185

4-10-1 Read the Clock Data [ TRD ] 186

4-10-2 Write Clock Data [ TWR ] 187

Page 5: PLC Software MANUAL - Xinje-support-centre-listo. · PDF filePLC Software Manual Page 3 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2 3-14 [NOP], [END] 76 3-15 [GROUP], [GROUPE] 77 3-16 Programming Notes 78

PLC Software Manual Page 5 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2

Chapter 5 High Speed Counter ( HSC ) 5-1 Functions Summary 190

5-2 HSC Mode 192

5-3 HSC Range 193

5-4 HSC Input Wiring 193

5-5 HSC Ports Assignment 194

5-6 Read / Write HSC Values 198

5-6-1 Read HSC Value [ HSCR ] 198

5-6-2 Write HSC Value [ HSCW] 200

5-7 HSC Reset Mode 201

5-8 AB Phase Counter Multiplication Setting 201

5-9 HSC Examples 202

5-10 HSC Interruption 204

5-10-1 Instruction Description 204

5-10-2 Intruction Tags to HSC 205

5-10-3 Loop Mode of HSC Interruption 207

5-10-4 Examples of HSC Intgerruption 208

Chapter 6 Pulse Output 6-1 Functions Summary 213

6-2 Pulse Output Types and Instructions 214

6-2-1 Unidirectional Ration Pulse Output 214

without ACC/DEC Time exchanger [ PLSY ]

6-2-2 Variable Pulse Output [PLSF] 217

6-2-3 Multi-segment pulse control 219

at relative position [PLSR]

6-2-4 Pulse Segment Switch [PLSNEXT] / [PLSNT] 223

6-2-5 Pulse Stop [STOP] 225

6-2-6 Refresh the pulse number at the port [PLSMV] 226

6-2-7 Back to the Origin [ZRN] 227

6-2-8 Relative Position 230

Uni-segment Pulse Control [DRVI]

6-2-9 Absolute Position 232

Uni-segment Pulse Control [DRVA]

6-2-10 Absolute Position 234

Multi-segment Pulse Control [PLSA]

6-3 Output Wiring 238

6-4 Items to Note 239

6-5 Sample Programs 240

6-6 Coils and Registers in relation to Pulse Output 241

Page 6: PLC Software MANUAL - Xinje-support-centre-listo. · PDF filePLC Software Manual Page 3 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2 3-14 [NOP], [END] 76 3-15 [GROUP], [GROUPE] 77 3-16 Programming Notes 78

PLC Software Manual Page 6 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2

Chapter 7 Communication Function

7-1 Summary 246

7-1-1 COM Port 246

7-1-2 Communication Paramters 248

7-2 Modbus Communication 251

7-2-1 Function 251

7-2-2 Address 251

7-2-3 Communication Instructions 252

7-3 Free Format Communication 260

7-3-1 Communication Mode 260

7-3-2 Instruction Form 261

7-4 CAN-Bus Communication Format 263

7-4-1 Brief Introduction of CAN-Bus 263

7-4-2 External Wiring 264

7-4-3 CAN-Bus Network Form 264

7-4-4 CAN-Bus Instructions 265

7-4-5 Communication Form of Internal Protocol 269

7-4-6 CAN Free Format Communication 272

Chapter 8 PID Control Function 8-1 Summary 279

8-2 Instruction Formats 280

8-3 Parameter Settings 282

8-3-1 Register and their Functions 283

8-3-2 Parameters Description 284

8-4 Auto-tunetune Mode 286

8-5 Advanced Mode 288

8-6 Application Outlines 288

8-7 Example Programs 289

Chapter 9 C Language Function Block 9-1 Summary 291

9-2 Instrument Form 292

9-3 Operation Steps 293

9-4 Import and Export Functions 296

9-5 Function Block Editing 297

9-6 Example Program 299

9-7 Application Points 300

9-8 Function List 301

Page 7: PLC Software MANUAL - Xinje-support-centre-listo. · PDF filePLC Software Manual Page 3 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2 3-14 [NOP], [END] 76 3-15 [GROUP], [GROUPE] 77 3-16 Programming Notes 78

PLC Software Manual Page 7 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2

Chapter 10 Sequential Function BLOCK 10-1 Basic Concept of Block 305

10-1-1 BLOCK Summary 305

10-1-2 Reason to Introduce BLOCK 306

10-2 Call the Block 307

10-2-1 Add a BLOCK 307

10-2-2 Move the BLOCK 311

10-2-3 Delete the BLOCK 312

10-2-4 Modify the BLOCK 313

10-3 Edit the Internal Instructions of the Block 314

10-3-1 Common Item 314

10-3-2 Pulse Configure 316

10-3-3 Modbus Instruction 317

10-3-4 Wait Instruction 318

10-3-5 Frequency Inverter Configure 319

10-3-6 Free Format Communication 324

10-4 Execute Form of Block 325

10-5 Edit Requirements with Block Internal Instructions 328

10-6 Block Relative Instructions 330

10-6-1 Instruction Explanation 330

10-6-2 Timing Sequence of Instructions 332

10-7 Block Execute Flag / Bit / Register 336

10-8 Program Example 337

Chapter 11 Special Function Instructions 11-1 PWM Pulse Width Modulation 340

11-2 Frequency Detect 342

11-3 Precise Time 344

11-4 Interruption 347

11-4-1 External Interruption 347

11-4-2 Time Interruption 351

Chapter 12 Program Application Samples 12-1 Pulse Output Application 354

12-2 Modbus Communication Application 356

12-3 Free Format Communication Application 360

Page 8: PLC Software MANUAL - Xinje-support-centre-listo. · PDF filePLC Software Manual Page 3 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2 3-14 [NOP], [END] 76 3-15 [GROUP], [GROUPE] 77 3-16 Programming Notes 78

PLC Software Manual Page 8 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2

1 Program Summary

XC Series PLCs differ from the controllers in that the signal and execution of the program

occur in the controller. In this chapter, we begin with the program forms, introduce the

main features, the supported two program languages etc.

1-1.Program Controller Features

1-2.Programming Language

1-3.Program Formats

Page 9: PLC Software MANUAL - Xinje-support-centre-listo. · PDF filePLC Software Manual Page 3 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2 3-14 [NOP], [END] 76 3-15 [GROUP], [GROUPE] 77 3-16 Programming Notes 78

PLC Software Manual Page 9 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2

1-1 Program Controller Features

XC series PLCs support two kinds of programming language; Instruction List and Ladder, the

two languages can convert to each other.

The program is encrypted to prevent unlawful copying or modification. When uploading the

encrypted program, you will be asked to input a password. This maintains the user’s

Copyright.

When the user program becomes too long, adding comments to the program and its soft

components may be necessary.

Adding offset appendix (like X3[D100], M10[D100], D0[D100]) behind coils, data registers can

realize indirect addressing. For example, when D100=9, X3[D100]=X14; M10[D100]=M19,

D0[D100]=D9

With enough basic instructions XC Series PLCs can fulfill basic sequential control; data

moving and comparing; arithmetic operation; logic control; data loop and shift etc.

XC Series PLCs also support special comparisons; high speed pulse; frequency testing;

precise time; PID control: position control etc. for interruption, high speed counter (HSC).

Program Language

Program Security

Program Comments

Offset Function

Rich Basic Functions

Page 10: PLC Software MANUAL - Xinje-support-centre-listo. · PDF filePLC Software Manual Page 3 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2 3-14 [NOP], [END] 76 3-15 [GROUP], [GROUPE] 77 3-16 Programming Notes 78

PLC Software Manual Page 10 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2

XC Series PLCs support C language function block. Users can call the edited function block

freely. This function reduces the program size greatly.

XC Series PLCs support “Stop when Power ON PLC” function. With this function, if there is a

serious problem whilst the PLC is running, this function will allow the system to stop all output

immediately.

XC series PLCs support many communication formats, for example, Modbus communication,

CAN-Bus communication and Free Format communication. Via a special network module

PLCs can also be connected to Ethernet or GPRS net.

C Language Function Block

Stop when Power ON Function

Communication Function

Page 11: PLC Software MANUAL - Xinje-support-centre-listo. · PDF filePLC Software Manual Page 3 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2 3-14 [NOP], [END] 76 3-15 [GROUP], [GROUPE] 77 3-16 Programming Notes 78

PLC Software Manual Page 11 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2

1-2 Programming Language

1-2-1 Types of Language Available

XC Series PLCs support two types of program language:

Instruction list inputs in the form of “LD”, “AND”, “OUT” etc. This is the basic input form of the

programs, but it’s hard to read and understand;

E.g.: Step Instruction Soft Components

With sequential control signal and soft components, it is possible to draw the sequential control

graph on the program interface, this method is called “Ladder”. This method uses coil signs etc.

to represent sequential circuits, so it’s easier to understand the program. Meantime, it allows

monitoring of the PLC showing the circuit’s status.

E.g.:

X0 X2

Y5

Y5

1-2-2 Alternation

The above two methods can convert to ech other freely:

0 LD X000

1 OR Y005

2 ANI X002

3 OUT Y005

Instruction Ladder

Ladder List

Instruction List

Page 12: PLC Software MANUAL - Xinje-support-centre-listo. · PDF filePLC Software Manual Page 3 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2 3-14 [NOP], [END] 76 3-15 [GROUP], [GROUPE] 77 3-16 Programming Notes 78

PLC Software Manual Page 12 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2

1-3 Programming Formats

The above two program methods allow input in the corresponding interface separately,

however, in the ladder window, there is an instruction hint function, this improves the program

efficiency greatly.

Direct Input

Page 13: PLC Software MANUAL - Xinje-support-centre-listo. · PDF filePLC Software Manual Page 3 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2 3-14 [NOP], [END] 76 3-15 [GROUP], [GROUPE] 77 3-16 Programming Notes 78

PLC Software Manual Page 13 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2

Some of the functions, like PID anf high speed counters, have a faceplate wizard which help

guide the user when inputing the configuration and settings.

Panel Configuration

Page 14: PLC Software MANUAL - Xinje-support-centre-listo. · PDF filePLC Software Manual Page 3 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2 3-14 [NOP], [END] 76 3-15 [GROUP], [GROUPE] 77 3-16 Programming Notes 78

PLC Software Manual Page 14 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2

2 Soft Component’s Functions and Actions

In chapter 1, we briefly covered the program languages of XC Series PLCs. However, the

most important element to a program is the operands. These elements relate to the relays

and registers inside the controller. In this chapter, we will describe the functions and

methods of using these.

2-1.Summary of the Soft Components

2-2.Structure of the Soft Components

2-3.List of the Soft Components

2-4.Input/output Relays (X, Y)

2-5.Auxiliary Relays (M)

2-6.Status Relays (S)

2-7.Timers (T)

2-8.Counters (C)

2-9.Data Registers (D)

2-10.Constant (K, H)

2-11.Pointer (P, I)

2-12.Program Principle

Page 15: PLC Software MANUAL - Xinje-support-centre-listo. · PDF filePLC Software Manual Page 3 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2 3-14 [NOP], [END] 76 3-15 [GROUP], [GROUPE] 77 3-16 Programming Notes 78

PLC Software Manual Page 15 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2

2-1 Summary of the Soft Components

There are many relays, timers and counters inside PLCs. They all have countless

NO (Normally ON) and NC (Normally Closed) contactors. Connecting these contactors with

the coils will make a sequential control circuit. Below, we will introduce these soft components

briefly;

Usage of the input relays

The input relays are used to accept the external ON/OFF signal, we use X to state.

Address Specify Principle

In each basic unit, specify the ID of input relay, output relay in the form of

X000~X007,X010~X017…,Y000~Y007,Y010~Y017… (octal form).

The expansion module’s ID obeys the principle of channel 1 starts from X100/Y100,

channel 2 starts from X200/Y200… 7 expansions can be connected in total.

Points to pay attention to when using:

For the input relay’s input filter, we use digital filter. Users can change the filter

parameters via relate settings.

PLCs are equipped with with more relays than are required for the input/output

points, these can be utilized as auxiliary relays, program as normal contactors/coils.

Usage of the output relays

Output relays are the interface of drive external loads, represent with sign Y;

Address Assignment Principle

In each basic unit,assign the ID of output relays in the form of Y000~Y007,

Y010~Y017… this octal format.

The ID of expansion obeys the principle of: channel 1 starts from Y100, channel 2

starts from Y200… 7 expansions could be connected totally.

Input Relay ( X )

Output Relay ( Y )

Page 16: PLC Software MANUAL - Xinje-support-centre-listo. · PDF filePLC Software Manual Page 3 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2 3-14 [NOP], [END] 76 3-15 [GROUP], [GROUPE] 77 3-16 Programming Notes 78

PLC Software Manual Page 16 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2

Usage of Auxiliary Relays

Auxiliary relays are equipped inside PLC, represent with the sign of M;

Address assignment principle

In basic units, assign the auxiliary address in decimal form.

Points to note:

This type of relay differs from the input/output relay, it can’t be used to take an

external load, it can only use in program.

A retentive relay can keep its ON/OFF status in case of PLC power OFF.

Usage of status relays

Used as relays in Ladder, represent with “S”

Address assignment principle

In basic units, assign the ID in decimal form.

Points to note:

If not used as operation number, they can be used as auxiliary relays, program as

normal contactors/coils. They can also be used as signal alarms, for external diagnosis.

Usage of the timers

Timers are used to calculate the time pulse like 1ms, 10ms, 100ms etc. when the set value is

reached, the output contactor acts, represent with “T”

Address assignment principle

In basic units, assign the timer’s ID in decimal form, but divide ID into several parts according

to the clock pulse, accumulate or not. Please refer to chapter 2-2 for details.

Time pulse

There are three specifications for the timer’s clock pulse: 1ms, 10ms, 100ms. If 10ms timer is

selected, then timing is carried out in 10ms pulses.

Accumulation/not accumulation

The times are divided into two modes: accumulation time means even the timer coil’s driver is

OFF, the timer will still keep the current value; while the not accumulation time means when

the count value reaches the set value, the output contact acts, the count value clears to 0.

Auxiliary Relays ( M )

Status Relays ( S )

Timer ( T )

Page 17: PLC Software MANUAL - Xinje-support-centre-listo. · PDF filePLC Software Manual Page 3 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2 3-14 [NOP], [END] 76 3-15 [GROUP], [GROUPE] 77 3-16 Programming Notes 78

PLC Software Manual Page 17 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2

To facilitate different application and purposes, we can divide the counters to different types as

detailed below:

For internal count (for general use/Power OFF retentive usage)

16 bits counter: for increment count, the count range is 1~32,767

32 bits counter: for increment count, the count range is 1~2,147,483,647

These counters can be used by PLC’s internal signal. The response speed is one

scan cycle or longer.

For High Speed Count (Power OFF retentive)

32 bits counter: for increment/decrement count, the count range is -2,147,483,648~

+2,147,483,647

(single phase increment count, single phase increment/decrement count, AB phase cont)

The counters are tied to specific digital input channels.

The high speed counter can count 80KHz frequency, it synchronizes with the PLC’s

scan cycle.

Use of Data Registers

Data Registers are used to store data, represented by “D”

Addressing Form

The data registers in XC Series PLCs are all 16 bits (the highest bit is the sign bit), by

combining two data registers together 32 bit operationcan be achieved (the highest bit is

the sign bit) data process.

Points to note:

As with other soft components, data registers also have common usage type and Power

OFF retentive type.

Counter ( C )

Data Register ( D )

Page 18: PLC Software MANUAL - Xinje-support-centre-listo. · PDF filePLC Software Manual Page 3 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2 3-14 [NOP], [END] 76 3-15 [GROUP], [GROUPE] 77 3-16 Programming Notes 78

PLC Software Manual Page 18 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2

Usage of FlashROM registers

FlashROM registers are used to store data soft components, represent with “FD”

Addressing Form

In basic units, FlashROM registers are addressed in decimal form.

Points to note:

Even if the battery power is OFF, this area can retain data. So this area is used to store

important parameters. FlashROM can write about 1,000,000 times, and it takes time at

every write. Too many write instructions can cause permanent damage of the FD

address.

In every type of data in PLC, B represents Binary, K represents Decimal, H represents

Hexadecimal. They are used to set timers and counters values, or operands of application

instructions.

FlashROM Register ( FD )

Constant ( B ) ( K ) ( H )

Page 19: PLC Software MANUAL - Xinje-support-centre-listo. · PDF filePLC Software Manual Page 3 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2 3-14 [NOP], [END] 76 3-15 [GROUP], [GROUPE] 77 3-16 Programming Notes 78

PLC Software Manual Page 19 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2

2-2 Structure of Soft Components

2-2-1 Memory Structure

There are many registers in XC Series PLCs. In addition to the common data registers D and

FlashROM registers, we can also make registers by combining bit soft components.

For common use, 16 bits

For common use, 32 bits (via combine two sequential 16 bits registers)

For power off retentive usage, the retentive zone can be modified

For special usage, occupied by the system, these are special function registers used by

the system

For offset usage (indirect specifies)

MOV D10[D0] D100M8000

M2

Y0[D0]

MOV K5 D0

M8002MOV K0 D0

Form: Dn[Dm]、Xn[Dm] 、Yn[Dm] 、Mn[Dm] etc.

In the above sample, if D0=0, then D100=D10, Y0 is ON.

If M2 turns from OFF to be ON, D0=5, then D100=D15, Y5 is ON.

Therein, D10[D0]=D[10+D0],Y0[D0]=Y[0+D0]。

The word offset combined by bit soft components: DXn[Dm] represents DX[n+Dm]。

The soft components with offset, the offset can be represented by soft component D.

Data Register ( D )

Page 20: PLC Software MANUAL - Xinje-support-centre-listo. · PDF filePLC Software Manual Page 3 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2 3-14 [NOP], [END] 76 3-15 [GROUP], [GROUPE] 77 3-16 Programming Notes 78

PLC Software Manual Page 20 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2

For common usage, 16 bits, represent the current value of timer/counter;

For common usage, 32 bits, (via combine two sequential 16 bits registers)

To represent them, just use the letter+ID method, such as T10, C11.

E.g.

MOV D0T11M0

T11Y1

X0T11 K99

For power off retentive usage, 16 bits

For power off retentive usage, 16 bits, (via combine two sequential 16 bits registers)

For special usage, occupied by the system, these are special function registers used by

the system

For common usage, 16 bits,

For common usage, 32 bits, (via combine two sequential 16 bits registers)

Timer ( T )

FlashROM Register ( FD )

Expansion’s Internal Register

Page 21: PLC Software MANUAL - Xinje-support-centre-listo. · PDF filePLC Software Manual Page 3 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2 3-14 [NOP], [END] 76 3-15 [GROUP], [GROUPE] 77 3-16 Programming Notes 78

PLC Software Manual Page 21 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2

For common usage, 16 bits, (via combine two sequential 16 bits registers).

The soft components which can be combined to be words are: X, Y, M, S, T, C.

Format: add “D” in front of soft components, like DM10, represents a 16 bits data from

M10~M25.

Get 16 points from DXn, but not beyond the soft components range.

E.g.:

MOV K21 DY0M0

MOV K3 D0M1

MOV DX2[D0] D10M8000

When M0 changes from OFF to be ON, the value in the word which is combined by

Y0~Y17 equals 21, i.e. Y0, Y2, Y4 becomes to be ON

Bit Soft Components Combined Register

Page 22: PLC Software MANUAL - Xinje-support-centre-listo. · PDF filePLC Software Manual Page 3 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2 3-14 [NOP], [END] 76 3-15 [GROUP], [GROUPE] 77 3-16 Programming Notes 78

PLC Software Manual Page 22 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2

2-2-2 BitSoft Components’ Structure

Bit soft components structure is simple, the common ones are X, Y, M, S, T, C however, a bit of

a register can also represent:

Input Relay X, octal type

Output Relay Y, octal type

Auxiliary Relay M, S, decimal type

Auxiliary Relay T, C, decimal type, as the representative method is as with registers, we

need to clarify if it’s a word register or bit register according within the register.

Made up by register’s bit, support register D

Represent method: Dn.m (0≤m≤15): the Nr.m bit of Dn register

The represent method of word with offset: Dn[Dm].x

Bit of Word can’t compose to be word again;

E.g.:

D0.4Y0

D5[D1].4Y1

D0.4 means when the Nr.4 bit of D0 is 1, set Y0 ON .

D5[D1].4 means bit addressing with offset, if D1=5, then D5[D1]

Relay

Register’s Bit

Page 23: PLC Software MANUAL - Xinje-support-centre-listo. · PDF filePLC Software Manual Page 3 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2 3-14 [NOP], [END] 76 3-15 [GROUP], [GROUPE] 77 3-16 Programming Notes 78

PLC Software Manual Page 23 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2

2-3 Soft Components List

2-3-1 Soft Components List

Mnemonic Name Range points

10I/O 16 I/O 24 I/O 32 I/O 10 I/O 16 I/O 24 I/O 32 I/O

I/O points1 Input Points X0~X4 X0~X7 X0~X13 X0~X17 5 8 12 16

Output Points Y0~Y4 Y0~Y7 Y0~Y13 Y0~Y17 5 8 12 16

X2 Internal Relay X0~X77 64

Y3 Internal Relay Y0~Y77 64

M Internal Relay

M0~M199【M200~M319】4 320

For Special Usage 5M8000~M8079

128

For Special Usage 5M8120~M8139

For Special Usage 5M8170~M8172

For Special Usage 5M8238~M8242

For Special Usage 5M8350~M8370

S Flow S0~S31 32

T Timer

T0~T23: 100ms not accumulation

80

T100~T115: 100ms accumulation

T200~T223: 10ms not accumulation

T300~T307: 10ms accumulation

T400~T403: 1ms not accumulation

T500~T503: 1ms accumulation

C Counter

C0~C23: 16 bits forward counter

48

C300~C315: 32 bits forward/backward counter

C600~C603: single-phase HSC

C620~C621

C630~C631

D Data Register

D0~D99【D100~D149】4 150

For Special Usage 5D8000~D8029

138

For Special Usage 5D8060~D8079

For Special Usage 5D8120~D8179

For Special Usage 5D8240~D8249

For Special Usage 5D8306~D8313

For Special Usage 5D8460~D8469

XC1 Series

Page 24: PLC Software MANUAL - Xinje-support-centre-listo. · PDF filePLC Software Manual Page 3 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2 3-14 [NOP], [END] 76 3-15 [GROUP], [GROUPE] 77 3-16 Programming Notes 78

PLC Software Manual Page 24 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2

FD FlashROM

Register6

FD0~FD411 412

For Special Usage 5FD8000~FD8011

98

For Special Usage 5FD8202~FD8229

For Special Usage 5FD8306~FD8315

For Special Usage 5FD8323~FD8335

For Special Usage 5FD8350~FD8384

Mnemonic Name

Range Points

14 I/O 16 I/O 24/32 I/O 48/60 I/O 14

I/O

16

I/O 24/32 I/O

48/60

I/O

I/O Points1

Input Points X0~X7 X0~X7 X0~X15

X0~X21

X0~X33

X0~X43 8 8 14/18 28/36

Output

Points Y0~Y5 Y0~Y7

Y0~Y11

Y0~Y15

Y0~Y23

Y0~Y27 6 8 10/14 20/24

X2 Internal

Relay X0~X1037 544

Y3 Internal

Relay Y0~Y1037 544

M Internal

Relay

M0~M2999

【M3000~M7999】4 8000

For Special Usage5M8000~M8767 768

S Flow

S0~S511

【S512~S1023】4 1024

T Timer

T0~T99: 100ms not accumulation

640

T100~T199: 100ms accumulation

T200~T299: 10ms not accumulation

T300~T399: 10ms accumulation

T400~T499: 1ms not accumulation

T500~T599: 1ms accumulation

T600~T639: 1ms precise time

C Counter

C0~C299: 16 bits forward counter

640

C300~C599: 32 bits forward/backward counter

C600~C619: single-phase HSC

C620~C629: double-phase HSC

C630~C639: AB phase HSC

XC2 Series

Page 25: PLC Software MANUAL - Xinje-support-centre-listo. · PDF filePLC Software Manual Page 3 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2 3-14 [NOP], [END] 76 3-15 [GROUP], [GROUPE] 77 3-16 Programming Notes 78

PLC Software Manual Page 25 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2

D Data

Register

D0~D999

【D4000~D4999】4 2000

For Special Usage5D8000~D8511 612

For Special Usage5D8630~D8729

FD FLASH

Register

FD0~FD127 128

For Special Usage5FD8000~FD8383 384

Mnemonic Name

Range Points

14 I/O 24/32 I/O 48/60 I/O 14 I/O 24/32

I/O

48/60

I/O

I/O Points1

Input Points X0~X7 X0~X15

X0~X21

X0~X33

X0~X43 8 14/18 28/36

Output Points Y0~Y5 Y0~Y11

Y0~Y15

Y0~Y23

Y0~Y27 6 10/14 20/24

X2 Internal Relay X0~X1037 544

Y3 Internal Relay Y0~Y1037 544

M Internal Relay

M0~M2999

【M3000~M7999】4 8000

For Special Usage5M8000~M8767 768

S Flow

S0~S511

【S512~S1023】4 1024

T TIMER

T0~T99: 100ms not accumulation

640

T100~T199: 100ms accumulation

T200~T299: 10ms not accumulation

T300~T399: 10ms accumulation

T400~T499: 1ms not accumulation

T500~T599: 1ms accumulation

T600~T639: 1ms precise time

XC3 Series

Page 26: PLC Software MANUAL - Xinje-support-centre-listo. · PDF filePLC Software Manual Page 3 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2 3-14 [NOP], [END] 76 3-15 [GROUP], [GROUPE] 77 3-16 Programming Notes 78

PLC Software Manual Page 26 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2

C COUNTER

C0~C299: 16 bits forward counter

640

C300~C599: 32 bits forward/backward counter

C600~C619: single-phase HSC

C620~C629: double-phase HSC

C630~C639: AB phase HSC

D DATA

REGISTER

D0~D3999

【D4000~D7999】4 8000

For Special Usage5D8000~D9023 1024

FD FlashROM

REGISTER6

FD0~FD1535 1536

For Special Usage5FD8000~FD8511 512

ED7

EXPANSION’S

INTERNAL

REGISTER

ED0~ED16383 16384

Mnemonic Name I/O RANGE POINTS

24/32 I/O 48/60 I/O 24/32 I/O 48/60 I/O

I/O Points1

Input Points X0~X15

X0~X21

X0~X33

X0~X43 14/18 28/36

Output Points Y0~Y11

Y0~Y15

Y0~Y23

Y0~Y27 10/14 20/24

X2 Internal Relay X0~X1037 544

Y3 Internal Relay Y0~Y1037 544

M Internal Relay

M0~M3999

【M4000~M7999】4 8000

For Special Usage5M8000~M8767 768

S Flow

S0~S511

【S512~S1023】4 1024

T TIMER

T0~T99: 100ms not accumulation

640

T100~T199: 100ms accumulation

T200~T299: 10ms not accumulation

T300~T399: 10ms accumulation

T400~T499: 1ms not accumulation

T500~T599: 1ms accumulation

T600~T639: 1ms precise time

XC5 Series

Page 27: PLC Software MANUAL - Xinje-support-centre-listo. · PDF filePLC Software Manual Page 3 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2 3-14 [NOP], [END] 76 3-15 [GROUP], [GROUPE] 77 3-16 Programming Notes 78

PLC Software Manual Page 27 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2

C COUNTER

C0~C299: 16 bits forward counter

640

C300~C599: 32 bits forward/backward counter

C600~C619: single-phase HSC

C620~C629: double-phase HSC

C630~C639: AB phase HSC

D DATA

REGISTER

D0~D3999

【D4000~D7999】4 8000

For Special Usage5D8000~D9023 1024

FD FlashROM

REGISTER6

FD0~FD5119 5120

For Special Usage5FD8000~FD9023 1024

ED7

EXPANSION’S

INTERNAL

REGISTER

ED0~ED36863 36864

Mnemonic Name I/O Range Points

24/32 I/O 48 I/O 24/32 I/O 48 I/O

I/O Points1

Input Points X0~X15

X0~X21 X0~X33 14/18 28

Output Points Y0~Y11

Y0~Y15 Y0~Y23 10/14 20

X2 Internal Relay X0~X1037 544

Y3 Internal Relay Y0~Y1037 544

M Internal Relay

M0~M2999

【M3000~M7999】4 8000

For Special Usage5M8000~M8767 768

S Flow

S0~S511

【S512~S1023】4 1024

T TIMER

T0~T99: 100ms not accumulation

640

T100~T199: 100ms accumulation

T200~T299: 10ms not accumulation

T300~T399: 10ms accumulation

T400~T499: 1ms not accumulation

T500~T599: 1ms accumulation

T600~T639: 1ms precise time

XCM Series

Page 28: PLC Software MANUAL - Xinje-support-centre-listo. · PDF filePLC Software Manual Page 3 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2 3-14 [NOP], [END] 76 3-15 [GROUP], [GROUPE] 77 3-16 Programming Notes 78

PLC Software Manual Page 28 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2

C COUNTER

C0~C299: 16 bits forward counter

640

C300~C599: 32 bits forward/backward counter

C600~C619: single-phase HSC

C620~C629: double-phase HSC

C630~C639: AB phase HSC

D DATA

REGISTER

D0~D2999

【D4000~D4999】4 4000

For Special Usage5D8000~D9023 1024

FD FlashROM

REGISTER6

FD0~FD63 64

For Special Usage5FD8000~FD8349 460

For Special Usage5FD8890~FD8999

ED7

EXPANSION’S

INTERNAL

REGISTER

ED0~ED36863 36864

※1: I/O points, means the terminal number that users can use to wire the input s/outputs;

※2: X, means the internal input relay, the X beyond Input points can be used as middle relay;

※3: Y, means the internal output relay, the Y beyond Output points can be used as middle relay;

※4: The memory zone in【 】 is power off retentive zone, soft components D、M、S、T、C can change

the retentive area via setting. Please refer to 2-3-2 for details;

※5: for special use, means the special registers occupied by the system, can’t be used for other purpose.

Please refer to Appendix 1.

※6: FlashROM registers needn’t set the power off retentive zone, when power is off (no battery), the

data will not be lost;

※7: Expansion’s internal register ED, requires PLC hardware V3.0 or above;

※8: Input coils、output relays are in octal form, the other registers are in decimal form;

※9: I/Os that are not connected to external devices can be used as fast internal relays;

※10: for the soft components of expansion devices, please refer to related manuals;

Page 29: PLC Software MANUAL - Xinje-support-centre-listo. · PDF filePLC Software Manual Page 3 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2 3-14 [NOP], [END] 76 3-15 [GROUP], [GROUPE] 77 3-16 Programming Notes 78

PLC Software Manual Page 29 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2

2-3-2 Power-off Retentive Zone

The power off retentive area of XC Series PLCs are set as below, this area can be re-set by

user:

Soft

components

SET

AREA FUNCTION

System’s

default

value

Retentive

Zone

XC1

Series

D FD8202 Start tag of D power off retentive zone 100 D100~D149

M FD8203 Start tag of M power off retentive zone 200 M200~M319

T FD8204 Start tag of T power off retentive zone 640 Not set

C FD8205 Start tag of C power off retentive zone 320 C320~C631

S FD8206 Start tag of S power off retentive zone 512 S0~S31

XC2

Series

D FD8202 Start tag of D power off retentive zone 4000 D4000~D4999

M FD8203 Start tag of M power off retentive zone 3000 M3000~M7999

T FD8204 Start tag of T power off retentive zone 640 Not set

C FD8205 Start tag of C power off retentive zone 320 C320~C639

S FD8206 Start tag of S power off retentive zone 512 S512~S1023

XC3

Series

D FD8202 Start tag of D power off retentive zone 4000 D4000~D7999

M FD8203 Start tag of M power off retentive zone 3000 M3000~M7999

T FD8204 Start tag of T power off retentive zone 640 Not set

C FD8205 Start tag of C power off retentive zone 320 C320~C639

S FD8206 Start tag of S power off retentive zone 512 S512~S1023

ED FD8207 Start tag of ED power off retentive zone 0 ED0~ED16383

XC5

Series

D FD8202 Start tag of D power off retentive zone 4000 D4000~D7999

M FD8203 Start tag of M power off retentive zone 4000 M4000~M7999

T FD8204 Start tag of T power off retentive zone 640 Not set

C FD8205 Start tag of C power off retentive zone 320 C320~C639

S FD8206 Start tag of S power off retentive zone 512 S512~S1023

ED FD8207 Start tag of ED power off retentive zone 0 ED0~ED36863

XCM

Series

D FD8202 Start tag of D power off retentive zone 4000 D4000~D4999

M FD8203 Start tag of M power off retentive zone 3000 M3000~M7999

T FD8204 Start tag of T power off retentive zone 640 Not set

C FD8205 Start tag of C power off retentive zone 320 C320~C639

S FD8206 Start tag of S power off retentive zone 512 S512~S1023

ED FD8207 Start tag of ED power off retentive zone 0 ED0~ED36863

Page 30: PLC Software MANUAL - Xinje-support-centre-listo. · PDF filePLC Software Manual Page 3 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2 3-14 [NOP], [END] 76 3-15 [GROUP], [GROUPE] 77 3-16 Programming Notes 78

PLC Software Manual Page 30 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2

For timer T, we can set not only retentive zone, but also set certain timer’s retentive zone

Soft

Components

Set area Function Retentive Zone

T

FD8323 Set the start tag of 100ms not accumulation timer’s retentive

zone

The set value ~T99

FD8324 Set the start tag of 100ms accumulation timer’s retentive

zone

The set value~T199

FD8325 Set the start tag of 10ms not accumulation timer’s retentive

zone

The set value~T299

FD8326 Set the start tag of 10ms accumulation timer’s retentive zone The set value~T399

FD8327 Set the start tag of 1ms not accumulation timer’s retentive

zone

The set value~T499

FD8328 Set the start tag of 1ms accumulation timer’s retentive zone The set value~T599

FD8329 Set the start tag of 1ms precise timer’s retentive zone The set value~T639

For counter C, we can set not only retentive zone, but also set certain counter’s retentive zone

Soft

Components

Set area Function Retentive Zone

C

FD8330 Set the start tag of 16 bits positive counter’s retentive zone The set value~C299

FD8331 Set the start tag of 32 bits positive/negative counter’s

retentive zone

The set value~C599

FD8332 Set the start tag of single phase HSC’s retentive zone The set value~C619

FD8333 Set the start tag of dual direction HSC’s retentive zone The set value~C629

FD8334 Set the start tag of AB phase HSC’s retentive zone The set value~C639

※1:if the whole power off retentive zone is smaller than the segment’s retentive area, then the

segment’s area is invalid. If the total counter’s set range is T200~T640, FD8324 value is 150, then the

100ms accumulate timer’s retentive area T150~T199 is invalid.

Page 31: PLC Software MANUAL - Xinje-support-centre-listo. · PDF filePLC Software Manual Page 3 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2 3-14 [NOP], [END] 76 3-15 [GROUP], [GROUPE] 77 3-16 Programming Notes 78

PLC Software Manual Page 31 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2

2-4 Input / Output Relays ( X, Y )

XC Series PLC’s inputs/outputs are all in octal form, each series numbers are listed below:

Series Name Range Points

10I/O 16 I/O 24 I/O 32 I/O 10 I/O 16 I/O 24 I/O 32 I/O

XC1 X X0~X4 X0~X7 X0~X13 X0~X17 5 8 12 16

Y Y0~Y4 Y0~Y7 Y0~Y13 Y0~Y17 5 8 12 16

Series Name

Range Points

14 I/O 16 I/O 24/32 I/O 48/60 I/O 14 I/O16 I/O 24/32 I/O 48/60

I/O

XC2

X X0~X7 X0~X7 X0~X15

X0~X21

X0~X33

X0~X43 8 8 14/18 28/36

Y Y0~Y5 Y0~Y7 Y0~Y11

Y0~Y15

Y0~Y23

Y0~Y27 6 8 10/14 20/24

Series Name

Range Points

14 I/O 24/32 I/O 48/60 I/O 14 I/O 24/32 I/O 48/60

I/O

XC3

X X0~X7 X0~X15

X0~X21

X0~X33

X0~X43 8 14/18 28/36

Y Y0~Y5 Y0~Y11

Y0~Y15

Y0~Y23

Y0~Y27 6 10/14 20/24

Series Name Range Points

24/32 I/O 48/60 I/O 24/32 I/O 48/60 I/O

XC5

X X0~X15

X0~X21

X0~X33

X0~X43 14/18 28/36

Y Y0~Y11

Y0~Y15

Y0~Y23

Y0~Y27 10/14 20/24

Series Name Range Points

24 I/O 32 I/O 48 I/O 24 I/O 32 I/O 48 I/O

XCM X X0~X15 X0~X21 X0~X33 14 18 28

Y Y0~Y11 Y0~Y15 Y0~Y23 10 14 20

Number List

Page 32: PLC Software MANUAL - Xinje-support-centre-listo. · PDF filePLC Software Manual Page 3 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2 3-14 [NOP], [END] 76 3-15 [GROUP], [GROUPE] 77 3-16 Programming Notes 78

PLC Software Manual Page 32 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2

PLC’s input terminals are used to accept the external signal input, while the input relays

are a type of optical relays to connect PLC inside and input terminals;

The input relays have countless normally ON/OFF contactors, they can be used freely;

The input relays which are not connected with external devices can be used as fast

internal relays;

PLC’s output terminals can be used to send signals to external loads. Inside PLC, output

relay’s external output contactors (including relay contactors, transistor’s contactors)

connect with output terminals.

The output relays have countless normally ON/OFF contactors, they can be used freely;

The output relays which are not connected with external devices can be used as fast

internal relays;

XC Series PLC

CPU unit

External S

ignal Input

Input Terminal X

Output Term

inal Y

External S

ignal Output

Function

Input Relay X

Output Relay Y

Page 33: PLC Software MANUAL - Xinje-support-centre-listo. · PDF filePLC Software Manual Page 3 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2 3-14 [NOP], [END] 76 3-15 [GROUP], [GROUPE] 77 3-16 Programming Notes 78

PLC Software Manual Page 33 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2

Input Disposal

Before PLC executing the program, read every input terminal’s ON/OFF status of

PLC to the image area.

In the process of executing the program, if the input is changed, the content in the

input image area will not change. However, in the next scan cycle, the status of the

input will change.

Output Disposal

Once finished executing all the instructions, transfer the ON/OFF status of output Y

image area is set. This will be the actual output of the PLC.

The contacts used for the PLC’s external output will act according to the device’s

response delay time.

XC Series PLC

CPU unit

Program

Dispose Area

External S

ignal Input

Input Terminal X

Input Image A

rea

Output Im

age Area

Output Term

inal Y

External S

ignal Output

Execution Order

Page 34: PLC Software MANUAL - Xinje-support-centre-listo. · PDF filePLC Software Manual Page 3 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2 3-14 [NOP], [END] 76 3-15 [GROUP], [GROUPE] 77 3-16 Programming Notes 78

PLC Software Manual Page 34 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2

2-5 Auxiliary Relay ( M )

The auxiliary relays M in XC Series PLCs are all in decimal form, please refer the details from

tables below:

SERIES NAME

RANGE

FOR COMMON USEFOR POWER-OFF

RETENTIVE USE FOR SPECIAL USE

XC1 M M000~M199 M200~M319

M8000~M8079

M8120~M8139

M8170~M8172

M8238~M8242

M8350~M8370

SERIES NAME

RANGE

FOR COMMON USEFOR POWER-OFF

RETENTIVE USE FOR SPECIAL USE

XC2 M M000~M2999 M3000~M7999 M8000~M8767

SERIES NAME

RANGE

FOR COMMON USEFOR POWER-OFF

RETENTIVE USE FOR SPECIAL USE

XC3 M M000~M2999 M3000~M7999 M8000~M8767

SERIES NAME

RANGE

FOR COMMON USEFOR POWER-OFF

RETENTIVE USE FOR SPECIAL USE

XC5 M M000~M3999 M4000~M7999 M8000~M8767

SERIES NAME

RANGE

FOR COMMON USEFOR POWER-OFF

RETENTIVE USE FOR SPECIAL USE

XCM M M000~M2999 M3000~M7999 M8000~M8767

Number List

Page 35: PLC Software MANUAL - Xinje-support-centre-listo. · PDF filePLC Software Manual Page 3 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2 3-14 [NOP], [END] 76 3-15 [GROUP], [GROUPE] 77 3-16 Programming Notes 78

PLC Software Manual Page 35 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2

In PLC, auxiliary relays M are used frequently. This type of relay’s coil is same with the output

relay. They are driven by soft components in PLCs;

auxiliary relays M have countless normally ON/OFF contactors. They can be used freely, but

this type of contactors can’t drive external loads.

For common use

This type of auxiliary relays can be used only as normal auxiliary relays. i.e. if power

supply suddenly stops during running, the relays will disconnect.

Common usage relays can’t be used for power off retentive, but the zone can be

modified;

For Power Off Retentive Use

The auxiliary relays for power off retentive usage, if power is lost to the PLC, the

ON/OFF satus is retained;

Power off retentive zone can be modified by the user;

Power off retentive relays are usually used to retain memory of the status before

power is lost, when power is restored to the PLC, the current status will resume;

For Special Usage

Special relays refer some relays which are defined with special meanings or

functions, start from M8000.

There are two types of usages for special relays, one type is used to drive the coil,

the other type is used to the specified execution;

E.g.: M8002 is the initial pulse, activates only at the moment of start

M8033 is “all output disabled”

Special auxiliary relays can’t be used as a normal relay M;

Function

Page 36: PLC Software MANUAL - Xinje-support-centre-listo. · PDF filePLC Software Manual Page 3 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2 3-14 [NOP], [END] 76 3-15 [GROUP], [GROUPE] 77 3-16 Programming Notes 78

PLC Software Manual Page 36 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2

2-6 Status Relay ( S )

XC Series PLCs’ status relays S are addressed in decimal form; each

subfamily’s ID are listed below:

SERIES NAME RANGE

FOR COMMON USE FOR POWER-OFF RETENTIVE USE

XC1 S S000~S031 -

SERIES NAME RANGE

FOR COMMON USE FOR POWER-OFF RETENTIVE USE

XC2 S S000~S511 S512~S1023

SERIES NAME RANGE

FOR COMMON USE FOR POWER-OFF RETENTIVE USE

XC3 S S000~S511 S512~S1023

SERIES NAME RANGE

FOR COMMON USE FOR POWER-OFF RETENTIVE USE

XC5 S S000~S511 S512~S1023

SERIES NAME RANGE

FOR COMMON USE FOR POWER-OFF RETENTIVE USE

XCM S S000~S511 S512~S1023

For common use

If the PLC loses power, this type of relay will revert to OFF status;

For Power Off Retentive Use

The auxiliary relays for power off retentive usage, if power is lost to the PLC, the

ON/OFF satus is retained;

Power off retentive zone can be modified by the user;

The status relays also have countless “normally ON/OFF” contactors. So users can use

them freely in the program;

Status relays are very import in ladder programming; usually use them with

instruction “STL”. In the form on flow, this can make the program’s structure

much clearer and easy to modify;

Address List

Function

Page 37: PLC Software MANUAL - Xinje-support-centre-listo. · PDF filePLC Software Manual Page 3 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2 3-14 [NOP], [END] 76 3-15 [GROUP], [GROUPE] 77 3-16 Programming Notes 78

PLC Software Manual Page 37 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2

2-7 Timer ( T )

SERIES NAME RANGE

FOR COMMON USE POINTS

XC1 T

T0~T23: 100ms not accumulation

80

T100~T115: 100ms accumulation

T200~T223: 10ms not accumulation

T300~T307: 10ms accumulation

T400~T403: 1ms not accumulation

T500~T503: 1ms accumulation

XC2

XC3

XC5

XCM

T

T0~T99: 100ms not accumulation

640

T100~T199: 100ms accumulation

T200~T299: 10ms not accumulation

T300~T399: 10ms accumulation

T400~T499: 1ms not accumulation

T500~T599: 1ms accumulation

T600~T639: 1ms with precise time

XC Series PLCs’ timers T are addressed in decimal form; each

subfamily’s ID are listed below: Address List

Page 38: PLC Software MANUAL - Xinje-support-centre-listo. · PDF filePLC Software Manual Page 3 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2 3-14 [NOP], [END] 76 3-15 [GROUP], [GROUPE] 77 3-16 Programming Notes 78

PLC Software Manual Page 38 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2

We use OUT or TMR instruction to time for the normal timers. We use constant (K) to set the

value, or use data register (D) to indirect point the set value;

Accu

mu

lation

Type

If X001 is ON, then T300 accumulate 10ms

clock pulse based on the current value;

when the accumulation value reaches the

set value K2000, the timer’s output contact

activates. I.e. the output contact activates

2s later.

Even if X0 breaks, the timer will continue to

accumulate on re-starting. The

accumulation time is 20ms;

If X002 is ON, the timer will be reset, the

output contacts reset;

No

rmal Typ

e

If X0 is ON, then T200 accumulate 10ms

clock pulse based on the current value;

when the accumulation value reaches the

set value K200, the timer’s output contact

activates. I.e. the output contact activates

2s later. If X0 breaks, the timer resets, the

output contact resets;

The timers accumulate the 1ms, 10ms, 10ms clock pulse, the output

contactor activates when the accumulation reaches the set value;

Both OUT and TMR can realize the time

function. But if use OUT, the start time is 0;

if use TMR, the start time is 1 scan cycle

Function

Page 39: PLC Software MANUAL - Xinje-support-centre-listo. · PDF filePLC Software Manual Page 3 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2 3-14 [NOP], [END] 76 3-15 [GROUP], [GROUPE] 77 3-16 Programming Notes 78

PLC Software Manual Page 39 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2

T10 K100X0

MOV K200 D5

T10 D5

X0

X1

Y0

T2

X0

Y0 X0

X0

Y0 T2K200

T2

T1

T2

Y0

X0

T1

T2

X0

Y0

T1 T2 T1K10

K20

T10 is the timer with 100ms as the unit.

Specify 100 as the constant, then

0.1s*100=10s timer works;

Write the indirect data register

the contents of the data

memory indirect pre-written

program or through the switch

input values.

In keeping with the register

specified as a power outage,

please pay attention to the

battery voltage, if less than the

value set will result in an

unstable situation.

《Constant (K)》

《Register (D)》

X000 is ON, the output Y000;

When the X000 by the ON → OFF, it will delay T2 (20 seconds) time, the output

Y000 was disconnected. (Flicker)

Timer T0~T599 is 16 bits linear increment mode (0~K32,767), when the timer’s value

reaches the max value K32767, it stops timing. The timer’s status keeps still;

(Output Delay off timer)

Specify the set value

Timer Value

Action

Example

Counter

Page 40: PLC Software MANUAL - Xinje-support-centre-listo. · PDF filePLC Software Manual Page 3 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2 3-14 [NOP], [END] 76 3-15 [GROUP], [GROUPE] 77 3-16 Programming Notes 78

PLC Software Manual Page 40 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2

2-8 Counter ( C )

SERIES NAME RANGE

FOR COMMON USE POINTS

XC1 C

C0~C23: 16 bits forward counter

48

C300~C315: 32 bits forward/backward counter

C600~C603: single-phase HSC

C620~C621

C630~C631

XC2

XC3

XC5

XCM

C

C0~C299: 16 bits forward counter

640

C300~C599: 32 bits forward/backward counter

C600~C619: single-phase HSC

C620~C629: double-phase HSC

C630~C639: AB phase HSC

The number of counters on the following principles:

※1:On high-speed counter usage, see Chapter 5.

TYPE DESCRIPTION

16 bits forward counter C0~C299

32 bits forward/backward

counter

C300~C599 (C300,C302...C598)(each occupies 2 counters number)

the number should be even

HSC (High Speed Counter) C600~C634(C600,C602...C634)( (each occupies 2 counters number)

the number should be even

Number List XC Series PLCs - all decimal counter C to be addressed, for series of

numbers see the table below:

Page 41: PLC Software MANUAL - Xinje-support-centre-listo. · PDF filePLC Software Manual Page 3 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2 3-14 [NOP], [END] 76 3-15 [GROUP], [GROUPE] 77 3-16 Programming Notes 78

PLC Software Manual Page 41 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2

Items 16 bits counter 32 bits counter

Count direction Positive Positive/negative

The set value 1~32,767 -2,147,483,648~+2,147,483,647

The assigned set value Constant K or data register Same as the left, but data register must be in a

couple

Changing of the current value Change after positive count Change after positive count (Loop counter)

Output contact Hold the action after positive

count

Hold the action after positive count, reset if

negative count

Reset activates When executing RST command, counter’s current value is 0, output contacts

recover

The current value register 16 bits 32 bits

RST C0X0

C0 K10

Y0

X1

C0

16 bits binary increment counters, the valid value is K1~K32,767 (decimal type

constant). The set value K0 and K1 has the same meaning. i.e. the output

contact works on the first count starts If you cut off the power programmable

controller, the general count of the

counter is cleared, and the latched

counter can be used to store the count

value before the power outage, so the

last time the counter value according to

the cumulative count.

X001 count input C0 of each drive coil once the counter current value plus 1,

the coil in the implementation of the tenth command, the output contact action.

Enter the X001 again after the counter movement, counter current value will

continue to add 1.

If the reset input X000 is ON, the RST instruction is executed, the counter's

current value is 0, reset input contact.

Counter set value, in addition to the constant K set, but also by the data

register number specified. For example, specify the D10, if the contents of D10

to 123, then set the K123 with the same time.

In a MOV instruction to set the value of such data is written above the current

value register, then the next input, the output coil connected to the current

value into a register set value.

Sixteen

cou

nter fo

r gen

eral use \ L

atched

16-bit counter and 32-bit counter is characterized as follows:

The assignment of common use counters and power off retentive

counters can me changed via FD parameters from peripheral devices;

Function

Page 42: PLC Software MANUAL - Xinje-support-centre-listo. · PDF filePLC Software Manual Page 3 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2 3-14 [NOP], [END] 76 3-15 [GROUP], [GROUPE] 77 3-16 Programming Notes 78

PLC Software Manual Page 42 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2

RST C300X3

C300 K10

Y1

X4

C300

M8238X2

32-bit binary up / down counter set value range for the +2,147,483,648 ~

-2,147,483,647 (decimal constant). The use of special auxiliary relay M8238

specified by the count of all 32-bit up / down counter (C300 ~ C498) direction. Th

irty-two

cou

nter fo

r gen

eral use \ L

atched

If the X2 driver M8238, was counting

down; was not driven by the count.

According to constant K D of the

content or data register, setting the

value is positive. The even number

data register as a pair, as 32-bit data

processing. Thus, when the

designated D0, D1 and D0 two 32-bit

settings as a treatment. C300 X004

driver using the input coil count when

the up / down counting.

If the reset input X3 is ON, the RST instruction is executed, the current value of the

counter becomes 0, the output contact is reset.

Use for Latched counter, the counter's current value, the output contacts reset

state action and latched.

32-bit counter can also be used as a 32-bit data register.

Page 43: PLC Software MANUAL - Xinje-support-centre-listo. · PDF filePLC Software Manual Page 3 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2 3-14 [NOP], [END] 76 3-15 [GROUP], [GROUPE] 77 3-16 Programming Notes 78

PLC Software Manual Page 43 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2

C0X001

K100

C300X001

K43,100

Counter C0 ~ C299 counting mode is 16-bit linear increment mode (0 ~ K32, 767), when

the counter reaches the maximum count K32, 767 will stop the clock, the counter remains

unchanged.

Counter C300 ~ C599 counting mode is 32-bit linear add / drop mode (-2,147,483,648

+2,147,483,647), when the counter reaches its maximum count value increment K2,

147,483,647 will become K-2, 147,483,648, when the counter counts down to minimum K-2,

147,483,648 will become K2, 147,483,647, the state of the counter with the count should

change.

16-bit counter

"Constant specified (K)" "Indirect designated (D)

32-bit counter

MOV K100 D5

C0 D5

X000

X001

DMOV K43100 D0

C300 D0(D1)

X000

X001

Count of the specified 16-bit and 32 bits is divided into two cases

discussed.

Settings

"Constant specified (K)" "Indirect designated (D)

Count

Page 44: PLC Software MANUAL - Xinje-support-centre-listo. · PDF filePLC Software Manual Page 3 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2 3-14 [NOP], [END] 76 3-15 [GROUP], [GROUPE] 77 3-16 Programming Notes 78

PLC Software Manual Page 44 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2

2-9 Data Register ( D )

SERIES NAME

RANGE

FOR COMMON USEFOR POWER OFF

RETENTIVE USE FOR SPECIAL USE

XC1 D D0~D99 D100~D149

D8000~D8029

138

D8060~D8079

D8120~D8179

D8240~D8249

D8306~D8313

D8460~D8469

XC2 D D0~D999 D4000~D4999 D8000~D8511

612 D8630~D8729

XC3

XC5 D D0~D3999 D4000~D7999 D8000~D9023 1024

XCM D D0~D2999 D3000~D4999 D8000~D9023 1024

Sixteen

16-bit data register’s value is within the range of -32,768 to +32,767

Read and write data register values commonly used application instructions.

In addition, through other devices, such as man-machine interface to the

PLC to write or read values.

XC Series PLCs - all data register D to be addressed in decimal, for

series of numbers see the table below:

Data register is used to store data devices, including 16-bit (MSB is sign

bit), 32 (a combination of two data registers, the MSB is sign bit) of two

types.

Number List

Structure

Page 45: PLC Software MANUAL - Xinje-support-centre-listo. · PDF filePLC Software Manual Page 3 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2 3-14 [NOP], [END] 76 3-15 [GROUP], [GROUPE] 77 3-16 Programming Notes 78

PLC Software Manual Page 45 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2

General Use

When the data register to write successfully, just not re-write, then the data in the

register will remain unchanged.

When the PLC goes from RUN to STOP or STOP to RUN, all data will be cleared.

Latched

Latched area of data registers in the PLC from RUN to STOP or power failure, the

data remains unchanged.

Latched area range, can be set by the user.

Special Use

Special register is used to write with the specific purpose of data, or specific content

is written by the system data.

Some special registers in the data, the PLC is powered on, is initialized.

As the offset (indirect specify)

D data register can be used as an offset the device, making the device easier to use

and easy to control.

Format: Dn [Dm], Xn [Dm], Yn [Dm], Mn [Dm] and so on.

Bit device composed of the word offset: DXn [Dm] said DX [n + Dm].

Device with offset, the offset is only available device D said.

Th

irty-two

The data from the two adjacent 32-bit data registers (high word in the post, the low

word first, as D1D0 composition, D0 for the next bit, D1 is upper). Processing range

is -2,147,483,648 to 2,147,483,647 values.

In the specified 32-bit register, if specified low as D0, the default of its high for the

subsequent D1. Low can be odd or even any of the device to specify, but for the

convenience, we recommend the use of even lower device number.

Function

Page 46: PLC Software MANUAL - Xinje-support-centre-listo. · PDF filePLC Software Manual Page 3 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2 3-14 [NOP], [END] 76 3-15 [GROUP], [GROUPE] 77 3-16 Programming Notes 78

PLC Software Manual Page 46 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2

MOV D10[D0] D100M8000

M2

Y0[D0]

MOV K5 D0

M8002MOV K0 D0

The above example, when D0 = 0, the point D100 = D10, Y0 is ON;

When the M2 the OFF → ON,, D0 = 5, then D100 = D15, Y5 is ON.

Which D10 [D0] = D [10 + D0], Y0 [D0] = Y [0 + D0].

Data Storage

MOV K100 D0M0

M1DMOV K41100 D10

Data Transfer

MOV D0 D10M0

Read Timer or Counter

MOV C10 D0M0

As a Timer or Counter Set Value

C300 D1

X0

X1

T10 D0

M0 is switched on, the D0 of the data transfer to the D10.

M0 is switched on, the counter current value of C10 in the

D0 in reading.

X0 is switched on, T10 start time, regular time determined

by the value in D0.

X1 is switched on every time, C300 starts counting, the

count is determined by the D1.

Data register D can handle a variety of data, the data register can be achieved

through a variety of control.

Example

Action

M0 is turned on, write to the D0 16-bit, decimal number 100.

M1 is turned on, to D11D10 write 32-bit decimal number 41100.

As the value of 41100 is 32 bits (over 32,767), and therefore

store data, although designated as D10, but D11 is also

automatically occupied.

Page 47: PLC Software MANUAL - Xinje-support-centre-listo. · PDF filePLC Software Manual Page 3 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2 3-14 [NOP], [END] 76 3-15 [GROUP], [GROUPE] 77 3-16 Programming Notes 78

PLC Software Manual Page 47 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2

2-10 Constant ( K, H )

10 decimal (DEC: DECIMAL NUMBER)

timer and counter set value (K constant)

Auxiliary relay (M), timer (T), counter (C), state (S) such number (device number)

Application of the instruction operands specifying the values and command action

(K constant)

16 Hexadecimal (HEX: HEXADECIMAL NUMBER)

and 10 hexadecimal numbers, as used to specify the application of the instruction

operands and instruction moves the value (H constant)

2 binary number (BIN: BINARY NUMBER)

As mentioned earlier, to decimal or hexadecimal number for the timer, counter values

or data register specified in its internal programmable control, these figures are the

number of binary processing. Moreover, in the external device monitoring, these

devices will be automatically converted to decimal (which can also switch to

hexadecimal).

8 binary numbers (OCT: OCTAL NUMBER)XC

Series programmable controller input relay, output relay device number to octal

values to assign, therefore, can be [0-7,10-17,. . . 70-77,100-107] into the position.

BCD code (BCD: BINARY CODE DECIMAL)BCD

4-bit binary decimal number you from 0 to 9 numerical method. The processing of

each bit is easy, therefore, can be used for BCD output switch or the shape of seven

segment digital display controls and so on.

Other values (floating point)

XC programmable controller can be precision floating point functions.

Binary floating-point floating-point operations, while monitoring the implementation of

decimal floating-point values.

XC Series programmable controllers can be utilized for different uses and

purposes, they use of five types of number system, each role and functions

are as follows:

Data

Processing

Page 48: PLC Software MANUAL - Xinje-support-centre-listo. · PDF filePLC Software Manual Page 3 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2 3-14 [NOP], [END] 76 3-15 [GROUP], [GROUPE] 77 3-16 Programming Notes 78

PLC Software Manual Page 48 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2

Constant K

K is the symbol that a decimal integer, such as K10, expressed in decimal 10. It is

used for the specified timer, counter settings, and application instructions and

number of operations.

Constant H

H is the hex number of symbols, such as H10, is the hex number 10. Mainly used to

specify the application instruction operand values.

Value of the PLC program processing, you must use a constant

K, H. Generally used to refer to decimal K, H refer to the

hexadecimal number, but the PLC input and output relays with

octal numbers.

Representation

Page 49: PLC Software MANUAL - Xinje-support-centre-listo. · PDF filePLC Software Manual Page 3 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2 3-14 [NOP], [END] 76 3-15 [GROUP], [GROUPE] 77 3-16 Programming Notes 78

PLC Software Manual Page 49 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2

2-11 Program Principle

Tag P、I

Tag P、I are used in branch division and interruption.

Tag for branch (P) is used in condition jump or subroutine’s jump target;

Tag for interruption (I) is used to specify the e input interruption, time interruption;

The tags P, I are both in decimal form, each coding principle is listed below:

SERIES NAME RANGE

XC1、XC2、XC3、XC5、XCM P P0~P9999

SERIES NAME

RANGE

FOR EXTERNAL INTERRUPTION

For time interruption Input

terminals

Rising edge

interruption

Falling

edge

interruption

XC2 I

X2 I0000 I0001 There are 10 channels time interruption, the

represent method is: I40**~I49**. (“**”

represents interruption time, the unit is mm)

X5 I0100 I0101

X10 I0200 I0201

SERIES NAME I/O

RANGE

FOR EXTERNAL INTERRUPTION

For time interruption Input

terminals

Rising edge

interruption

Falling edge

interruption

XC3 I

14 X7 I0000 I0001

There are 10 channels time interruption,

the represent method is: I40**~I49**. (“**”

represents interruption time, the unit is mm)

24

32

X2 I0000 I0001

X5 I0100 I0101

X10 I0200 I0201

19

48

60

X10 I0000 I0001

X7 I0100 I0101

X6 I0200 I0201

Page 50: PLC Software MANUAL - Xinje-support-centre-listo. · PDF filePLC Software Manual Page 3 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2 3-14 [NOP], [END] 76 3-15 [GROUP], [GROUPE] 77 3-16 Programming Notes 78

PLC Software Manual Page 50 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2

SERIES NAME I/O

RANGE

FOR EXTERNAL

INTERRUPTION

For time interruption Input

terminals

Rising

edge

interruption

Falling

edge

interruption

XC5 I

24

32

X2 I0000 I0001

There are 10 channels time interruption, the

represent method is: I40**~I49**. (“**”

represents interruption time, the unit is mm)

X5 I0100 I0101

X10 I0200 I0201

X11 I0300 I0301

X12 I0400 I0401

48

60

X2 I0000 I0001

X5 I0100 I0101

X10 I0200 I0201

SERIES NAME I/O

RANGE

FOR EXTERNAL

INTERRUPTION

For time interruption Input

terminals

Rising

edge

interruption

Falling

edge

interruption

XCM I 24

32

X2 I0000 I0001

There are 10 channels time interruption, the

represent method is: I40**~I49**. (“**”

represents interruption time, the unit is mm)

X5 I0100 I0101

X10 I0200 I0201

X11 I0300 I0301

X12 I0400 I0401

Page 51: PLC Software MANUAL - Xinje-support-centre-listo. · PDF filePLC Software Manual Page 3 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2 3-14 [NOP], [END] 76 3-15 [GROUP], [GROUPE] 77 3-16 Programming Notes 78

PLC Software Manual Page 51 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2

Tag P is usually used in flow, it is used with CJ (condition jump), CALL (subroutine call)

etc.

Condition Jump CJ

X0CJ

X1

X2

P1

T0RST

Y0

P1

Call the subroutine (CALL)

CALLX0

FEND

SRET

P10

P10

Tag P

If coil X0 gets ON, jump to the step behind

tag P1;

If the coil X0 is not ON, do not execute

jump action, but run with the original

program;

If X0 becomes ON, jump to the

subroutine from the main program;

If the coil is not ON, run with the

original program;

After executing the subroutine,

return to the main program;

Main program

S

ubroutine

Page 52: PLC Software MANUAL - Xinje-support-centre-listo. · PDF filePLC Software Manual Page 3 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2 3-14 [NOP], [END] 76 3-15 [GROUP], [GROUPE] 77 3-16 Programming Notes 78

PLC Software Manual Page 52 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2

Tag I is usually used in interruption, including external interruption, time interruption etc.

use with IRET (interruption return), EI (enable interruption), DI (disable interruption);

External interruption

Accepts input signal from the special input terminals, not effected by the scan

cycle. Activates the input signal, executes the interruption subroutine.

With external interruption, PLC can dispose the signal shorter than scan cycle;

so it can be used as essential priority disposal in sequence control, or used in

short time pulse control.

Time interruption

Execute the interruption subroutine at each specified interruption loop time.

Use this interruption in the control which requires it to be different with PLC’s

operation cycle.

Action order of input/output relays and response delay

Input disposal

Before PLC executing the program, read all the input terminal’s ON/OFF status of

PLC to the image area. In the process of executing the program, even the input

changed, the content in the input image area will not change. However, in the input

disposal of next scan cycle, read out the change.

Output disposal

Once finished executing all the instructions, transfer the ON/OFF status of output Y

image area to the output lock memory area. This will be the actual output of the PLC.

The contacts used for the PLC’s exterior output will act according to the device’s

response delay time.

When using this input/output format in a batch, the drive time and operation cycle of input

filter and output device will also appear as per the response delay.

Tag I

Page 53: PLC Software MANUAL - Xinje-support-centre-listo. · PDF filePLC Software Manual Page 3 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2 3-14 [NOP], [END] 76 3-15 [GROUP], [GROUPE] 77 3-16 Programming Notes 78

PLC Software Manual Page 53 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2

Not accept narrow input pulse signal

PLC’s input ON/OFF time should be longer than its loop time. E.g. if input filter’s response

delay 10ms, loop time is 10ms,then ON/OFF time needs 20 ms separately. So, up to 1,000/(20+20)=25Hz input pulse can’t be disposed. But, this condition could be improved when

use PLC’s special function and applied instructions.

Dual output(Dual coils)action

Y3

Y4

Y3

X1

Y3

X2

As shown in the left map, please consider

the things of using the same coil Y003 at

many positions:

E.g. X001=ON,X002=OFF

At first, X001 is ON, its image area is ON,

output Y004 is also ON.

But, as input X002 is OFF, the image

area of Y003 is OFF.

So, the actual output is: Y003=OFF,

Y004= ON.

When executing dual output (use dual coil),

the back side act in prior.

Page 54: PLC Software MANUAL - Xinje-support-centre-listo. · PDF filePLC Software Manual Page 3 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2 3-14 [NOP], [END] 76 3-15 [GROUP], [GROUPE] 77 3-16 Programming Notes 78

PLC Software Manual Page 54 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2

3 Basic Program Instructions

In this chapter, we give the basic instructions and their functions.

3-1.Basic Instructions List

3-2.[LD], [LDI], [OUT]

3-3.[AND], [ANI]

3-4.[OR], [ORI]

3-5.[LDP], [LDF], [ANDP], [ANDF], [ORP], [ORF]

3-6.[LDD], [LDDI]

3-7.[ORB]

3-8.[ANB]

3-9.[MCS], [MCR]

3-10.[ALT]

3-11.[PLS], [PLF]

3-12.[SET], [RST]

Page 55: PLC Software MANUAL - Xinje-support-centre-listo. · PDF filePLC Software Manual Page 3 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2 3-14 [NOP], [END] 76 3-15 [GROUP], [GROUPE] 77 3-16 Programming Notes 78

PLC Software Manual Page 55 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2

3-13.[OUT], [RST] (Aim at counter device)

3-14.[NOP], [END]

3-15.[GROUP], [GROUPE]

3-16.Programming Notes

Page 56: PLC Software MANUAL - Xinje-support-centre-listo. · PDF filePLC Software Manual Page 3 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2 3-14 [NOP], [END] 76 3-15 [GROUP], [GROUPE] 77 3-16 Programming Notes 78

PLC Software Manual Page 56 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2

3-1 Basic Instructions List

All XC1, XC2, XC3, XC5, XCM series support the instructions below:

Mnemonic Function Format and Device Chapter

LD

(LoaD)

Initial logical operation

contact type NO (normally

open)

BSTOP S1 S2

X、Y、M、S、T、C、Dn.m、FDn.m

3-2

LDD

(LoaD

Directly)

Read the status from the

contact directly

X0

D

X

3-6

LDI

(LoaD

Inverse)

Initial logical operation

contact type NC (normally

closed)

BGOON S1 S2

X、Y、M、S、T、C、Dn.m、FDn.m

3-2

LDDI Read the normally closed

contact directly

X0

D

X

3-6

LDP

(LoaD Pulse)

Initial logical

operation-Rising edge pulse

X、Y、M、S、T、C、Dn.m、FDn.m

3-5

LDF

(LoaD Falling

Pulse)

Initial logical

operation-Falling /trailing

edge pulse

X、Y、M、S、T、C、Dn.m、FDn.m

3-5

AND

(AND)

Serial connection of NO

(normally open) contacts S 1 ·

X、Y、M、S、T、C、Dn.m、FDn.m

3-3

ANDD Read the status from the

contact directly

X0

D

X

3-6

Page 57: PLC Software MANUAL - Xinje-support-centre-listo. · PDF filePLC Software Manual Page 3 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2 3-14 [NOP], [END] 76 3-15 [GROUP], [GROUPE] 77 3-16 Programming Notes 78

PLC Software Manual Page 57 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2

ANI

(AND Inverse)

Serial connection of NC

(normally closed) contacts S ·

X、Y、M、S、T、C、Dn.m、FDn.m

3-3

ANDDI Read the normally closed

contact directly

X0

D

X

3-6

ANDP

(AND Pulse)

Serial connection of rising

edge pulse D ·

X、Y、M、S、T、C、Dn.m、FDn.m

3-5

ANDF

(AND Falling

pulse)

Serial connection of

falling/trailing edge pulse D ·

X、Y、M、S、T、C、Dn.m、FDn.m

3-5

OR

(OR)

Parallel connection of NO

(normally open) contacts D ·

X、Y、M、S、T、C、Dn.m、FDn.m

3-4

ORD Read the status from the

contact directly X0

D

X

3-6

ORI

(OR Inverse)

Parallel connection of NC

(normally closed) contacts D ·

X、Y、M、S、T、C、Dn.m、FDn.m

3-4

ORDI Read the normally closed

contact directly X0

D

X

3-6

ORP

(OR Pulse)

Parallel connection of rising

edge pulse

X、Y、M、S、T、C、Dn.m、FDn.m

3-5

Page 58: PLC Software MANUAL - Xinje-support-centre-listo. · PDF filePLC Software Manual Page 3 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2 3-14 [NOP], [END] 76 3-15 [GROUP], [GROUPE] 77 3-16 Programming Notes 78

PLC Software Manual Page 58 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2

ORF

(OR Falling

pulse)

Parallel connection of

falling/trailing edge pulse S ·

X、Y、M、S、T、C、Dn.m、FDn.m

3-5

ANB

(ANd Block)

Serial connection of multiply

parallel circuits D ·

None

3-8

ORB

(OR Block)

Parallel connection of

multiply parallel circuits D ·

None

3-7

OUT

(OUT)

Final logic operation type coil

drive D ·

Y、M、S、T、C、Dn.m

3-2

OUTD Output to the contact directly Y0D

Y

3-6

SET

(SET)

Set a bit device permanently

ON D ·

Y、M、S、T、C、Dn.m

3-12

RST

(ReSeT)

Reset a bit device

permanently OFF RST Y0

Y、M、S、T、C、Dn.m

3-12

PLS

(PuLSe)

Rising edge pulse

X、Y、M、S、T、C、Dn.m

3-11

PLF

(PuLse

Falling)

Falling/trailing edge pulse

X、Y、M、S、T、C、Dn.m

3-11

Page 59: PLC Software MANUAL - Xinje-support-centre-listo. · PDF filePLC Software Manual Page 3 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2 3-14 [NOP], [END] 76 3-15 [GROUP], [GROUPE] 77 3-16 Programming Notes 78

PLC Software Manual Page 59 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2

MCS

(New bus line

start)

Connect the public serial

contacts

Y0

None

3-9

MCR

(Bus line

return)

Clear the public serial

contacts

Y0

None

3-9

ALT

(Alternate

state)

The status of the assigned

device is inverted on every

operation of the instruction

M0ALT

X、Y、M、S、T、C、Dn.m

3-10

END

(END)

Force the current program

scan to end B M O V D 1 0 D 1 1 K 3

B M O V D 1 0 D 9 K 3X 1

X 2

None

3-14

GROUP Group

None

3-15

GROUPE Group End PMOV D5 D10 K3

X0nS· D·

None

3-15

TMR Time

2-7

Page 60: PLC Software MANUAL - Xinje-support-centre-listo. · PDF filePLC Software Manual Page 3 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2 3-14 [NOP], [END] 76 3-15 [GROUP], [GROUPE] 77 3-16 Programming Notes 78

PLC Software Manual Page 60 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2

3-2 [LD] , [LDI] , [OUT]

Mnemonic Function Format and Operands

LD

(LoaD)

Initial logic operation contact

type NO (Normally Open)

Operands: X、Y、M、S、T、C、Dn.m、FDn.m

LDI

(LoaD Inverse)

Initial logic operation contact

type NC (Normally Closed) DFMOV D0 D10 K3

X0nS· D·

Devices:X、Y、M、S、T、C、Dn.m、FDn.m

OUT

(OUT)

Final logic operation type

drive coil

Operands: X、Y、M、S、T、C、Dn.m

Connect the LD and LDI instructions directly to the left bus bar, or use them to define

a new block of program when using ANB instruction.

OUT instruction is the coil drive instruction for the output relays, auxiliary relays、status, timers, counters. But this instruction can’t be used for the input relays

Can not sequentially use parallel OUT command for many times.

For the timer’s time coil or counter’s count coil, after using OUT instruction, set

constant K is necessary.

Mnemonic and Function

Statements

Page 61: PLC Software MANUAL - Xinje-support-centre-listo. · PDF filePLC Software Manual Page 3 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2 3-14 [NOP], [END] 76 3-15 [GROUP], [GROUPE] 77 3-16 Programming Notes 78

PLC Software Manual Page 61 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2

For the constant K’s setting range, actual timer constant, program’s step relative to

OUT instruction (include the setting value), See table below:

Y100

M1203

T 0

X0

Y 1

X1

T0K19

Timer, Counter Setting Range of constant K The actual setting value

1ms Timer

1~32,767

0.001~32.767 sec

10ms Timer 0.01~327.67 sec

100ms Timer 0.1~3276.7 sec

16 bits counter 1~32,767

Same as the left

32 bits counter 1~2,147,483,647

Same as the left

LD X0

OUT Y100

LDI X1

OUT M1203

OUT T0 K19

LD T0

OUT Y1

Program

Page 62: PLC Software MANUAL - Xinje-support-centre-listo. · PDF filePLC Software Manual Page 3 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2 3-14 [NOP], [END] 76 3-15 [GROUP], [GROUPE] 77 3-16 Programming Notes 78

PLC Software Manual Page 62 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2

3-3 [AND] , [ANI]

MSET M10 M120

D1· D2·X0

Mnemonic Function Format and Operands

AND

(AND)

Serial connection of NO

(Normally Open)

contacts D0FWRT FD0

X2K3

S· D1· D2·

Operands: X、Y、M、S、T、C、Dn.m、FDn.m

ANI

(ANd

Inverse)

Serial connection of NC

(Normally Closed)

contacts

M0

Operands: X、Y、M、S、T、C、Dn.m、FDn.m

Use the AND and the ANI instruction for serial connection of contacts. As many

contacts as required can be connected in series. They can be used for many times.

The output processing to a coil, through writing the initial OUT instruction is called a

“follow-on” output (For an example see the program below: OUT M2 and OUT Y003).

Follow-on outputs are permitted repeatedly as long as the output order is correct.

There’s no limit for the serial connected contacts’ Nr. and follow-on outputs’ number.

LD X2

AND M1

OUT Y2

LD Y2

ANI X3

OUT M2

AND T1

OUT Y3

Mnemonic and Function

Statements

Program

Page 63: PLC Software MANUAL - Xinje-support-centre-listo. · PDF filePLC Software Manual Page 3 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2 3-14 [NOP], [END] 76 3-15 [GROUP], [GROUPE] 77 3-16 Programming Notes 78

PLC Software Manual Page 63 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2

3-4 [OR], [ORI]

D2·

Mnemonic Function Format and Operands

OR

(OR)

Parallel connection of

NO (Normally Open)

contacts

D 2 ·

Operands: X、Y、M、S、T、C、Dn.m、FDn.m

ORI

(OR Inverse)

Parallel connection of

NC (Normally Closed)

contacts

D 1 ·

Operands: X、Y、M、S、T、C、Dn.m、FDn.m

The parallel connection with OR, ORI

instructions should connect with LD, LDI

instructions in principle. But behind the

ANB instruction, it’s still ok to add a LD

or LDI instruction.

LD X5

OR X6

OR M11

OUT Y6

LDI Y6

AND M4

OR M12

ANI X7

OR M13

OUT M100

Use the OR and ORI instructions for parallel connection of contacts. To connect a block

that contains more than one contact connected in series to another circuit block in

parallel, use an ORB instruction, which will be described later;

OR and ORI start from the instruction’s step, parallel connect with the LD and LDI

instruction’s step said before. There is no limit for the parallel connect times.

Mnemonic and Function

Statements

Program

Relationship with ANB

Page 64: PLC Software MANUAL - Xinje-support-centre-listo. · PDF filePLC Software Manual Page 3 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2 3-14 [NOP], [END] 76 3-15 [GROUP], [GROUPE] 77 3-16 Programming Notes 78

PLC Software Manual Page 64 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2

3-5 [ LDP ], [ LDF ], [ ANDP ], [ ANDF ], [ ORP ], [ ORF ]

Mnemonic Function Format and Operands

LDP

(LoaD

Pulse)

Initial logical operation-Rising

edge pulse D 1 ·

Operands: X、Y、M、S、T、C、Dn.m、FDn.m

LDF

(LoaD

Falling

pulse)

Initial logical operation

Falling/trailing edge pulse D 2 ·

Operands: X、Y、M、S、T、C、Dn.m、FDn.m

ANDP

(AND Pulse)

Serial connection of Rising edge

pulse D 1 ·

Operands: X、Y、M、S、T、C、Dn.m、FDn.m

ANDF

(AND Falling

pulse)

Serial connection of

Falling/trailing edge pulse Z R S T M 5 0 0 M 5 5 9

D 0 D 1 0 0

D 1 · D 2 ·

D 1 · D 2 ·

X 0

Z R S T

Operands: X、Y、M、S、T、C、Dn.m、FDn.m

ORP

(OR Pulse)

Parallel connection of Rising

edge pulse D 2 ·

Operands: X、Y、M、S、T、C、Dn.m、FDn.m

ORF

(OR Falling

pulse)

Parallel connection of

Falling/trailing edge pulse D 1 ·

Operands: X、Y、M、S、T、C、Dn.m、FDn.m

Mnemonic and Function

Page 65: PLC Software MANUAL - Xinje-support-centre-listo. · PDF filePLC Software Manual Page 3 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2 3-14 [NOP], [END] 76 3-15 [GROUP], [GROUPE] 77 3-16 Programming Notes 78

PLC Software Manual Page 65 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2

LDP, ANDP, ORP are active for one program scan after the associated devices switch

from OFF to ON.

LDF, ANDF, ORF are active for one program scan after the associated devices switch

from ON to OFF.

D 2 · LDP X5

ORP X6

OUT M13

LD M8000

ANDP X7

OUT M15

Statements

Program

Page 66: PLC Software MANUAL - Xinje-support-centre-listo. · PDF filePLC Software Manual Page 3 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2 3-14 [NOP], [END] 76 3-15 [GROUP], [GROUPE] 77 3-16 Programming Notes 78

PLC Software Manual Page 66 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2

3-6 [ LDD ], [ LDDI ], [ ANDD ], [ ANDDI ], [ ORD ], [ ORDI ], [ OUTD]

Mnemonic Function Format and Operands

LDD Read the status from the

contact directly

X0

D

Devices: X

LDDI Read the normally closed

contact directly

X0

D

Devices: X

ANDD Read the status from the

contact directly

X0

D

Devices: X

ANDDI Read the normally closed

contact directly

X0

D

Devices: X

ORD Read the status from the

contact directly X0

D

Devices: X

ORDI Read the normally closed

contact directly X0

D

Devices: X

OUTD Output to the contact

directly

Y0D

Devices: Y

Mnemonic and Function

Page 67: PLC Software MANUAL - Xinje-support-centre-listo. · PDF filePLC Software Manual Page 3 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2 3-14 [NOP], [END] 76 3-15 [GROUP], [GROUPE] 77 3-16 Programming Notes 78

PLC Software Manual Page 67 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2

The function of LDD, ANDD, ORD instructions are similar with LD, AND, OR;

LDDI, ANDDI, ORDI instructions are similar with LDI, ANDI, ORI; but if the operand is X,

the LDD, ANDD, ORD commands read the signal from the terminals directly, this is the

only difference.

OUTD and OUT are output instructions. But if OUTD is used, output immediately if the

condition comes true, needn't wait the next scan cycle.

D 1 ·

LDD X0

LDDI X2

ORD X2

ANB

OUTD Y0

Statements

Program

Page 68: PLC Software MANUAL - Xinje-support-centre-listo. · PDF filePLC Software Manual Page 3 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2 3-14 [NOP], [END] 76 3-15 [GROUP], [GROUPE] 77 3-16 Programming Notes 78

PLC Software Manual Page 68 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2

3-7 [ ORB ]

Mnemonic Function Format and Devices

ORB

(OR Block)

Parallel connection of

multiply parallel

circuits

D 1 ·

Devices: none

The serial connection with two or more contacts is called "serial block". If parallel connect

the serial block, use LD, LDI at the branch start place, use ORB at the stop place;

As the ANB instruction,an ORB instruction is an independent instruction and is not

associated with any device number.

There are no limitations to the number of parallel circuits when using an ORB instruction in

the sequential processing configuration.

Recommended good

programming method:

LD X0

AND X1

LD X2

AND X3

ORB

LD X4

AND X5

ORB

OUT Y10

Non-preferred batch

programming method:

LD X0

AND X1

LD X2

AND X3

LD X4

AND X5

ORB

ORB

Mnemonic and Function

Statements

Program

Page 69: PLC Software MANUAL - Xinje-support-centre-listo. · PDF filePLC Software Manual Page 3 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2 3-14 [NOP], [END] 76 3-15 [GROUP], [GROUPE] 77 3-16 Programming Notes 78

PLC Software Manual Page 69 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2

3-8 [ ANB ]

Mnemonic Function Format and Devices

ANB

(And Block)

Serial

connection of

multiply parallel

circuits

D 2 ·

Devices: none

Start of a branch

End of a parallel circuit block

Serial connect with the preceding circuit

(1) To declare the starting point of the circuit block, use a LD or LDI

instruction. After completing the parallel circuit block, connect it to the

preceding block in series using the ANB instruction.

(2) It is possible to use as many ANB instructions as necessary to connect

a number of parallel circuit blocks to the preceding block in series.

LD X0

OR X1

LD X2

AND X3

LDI X4

AND X5

ORB

OR X6

ANB

OR X7

OUT Y20

Mnemonic and Function

Statements

Program

Page 70: PLC Software MANUAL - Xinje-support-centre-listo. · PDF filePLC Software Manual Page 3 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2 3-14 [NOP], [END] 76 3-15 [GROUP], [GROUPE] 77 3-16 Programming Notes 78

PLC Software Manual Page 70 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2

3-9 [ MCS ], [ MCR ]

Mnemonic Function Format and Devices

MCS

(Master

control)

Denotes the

start of a master

control block

D 1 ·

Devices:None

MCR

(Master

control

Reset)

Denotes the

end of a master

control block

Y0

Devices:None

X1 X2

M2

M3M1

Y0

Y1

Y2

After the execution of an MCS instruction, the bus line(LD, LDI)shifts to

a point after the MCS instruction. An MCR instruction returns this to the

original bus line.

MCS, MCR instructions should use in pair.

The bus line could be used nesting. Between the matched MCS, MCR

instructions use matched MCS, MCR instructions. The nest level

increase with the using of MCS instruction. The max nest level is 10.

When executing MCR instruction, go back to the upper bus line.

When use flow program, bus line management could only be used in the

same flow. When end some flow, it must go back to the main bus line.

LD X1

MCS

LD X2

OUT Y0

LD M1

MCS

LD M3

OUT Y1

LD M2

OUT Y2

MCR

MCR

Bus line starts

Bus line nest

Bus line back

Mnemonic and Function

Statements

Program

Page 71: PLC Software MANUAL - Xinje-support-centre-listo. · PDF filePLC Software Manual Page 3 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2 3-14 [NOP], [END] 76 3-15 [GROUP], [GROUPE] 77 3-16 Programming Notes 78

PLC Software Manual Page 71 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2

3-10 [ ALT ]

Mnemonic Function Format and Devices

ALT

(Alternate

status)

The status of the

assigned devices

inverted on every

operation of the

instruction

M0ALT

Devices: Y、M、S、T、C、Dn.m

CML S D

The status of the destination device is alternated on every operation of

the ALT instruction.

LDP M100

ALT M0

LD M0

OUT Y0

LDI M0

OUT Y1

Mnemonic and Function

Statements

Program

Page 72: PLC Software MANUAL - Xinje-support-centre-listo. · PDF filePLC Software Manual Page 3 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2 3-14 [NOP], [END] 76 3-15 [GROUP], [GROUPE] 77 3-16 Programming Notes 78

PLC Software Manual Page 72 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2

3-11 [ PLS ], [ PLF ]

Mnemonic Function Format and Devices

PLS

(Pulse)

Rising edge

pulse

Devices: Y、M、S、T、C、Dn.m

PLF

(Pulse

Falling)

Falling/trailing

edge pulse SHL D n

Devices: Y、M、S、T、C、Dn.m

SHRD n

1. When a PLS instruction is executed, object devices Y and M

operate for one operation cycle after the drive input signal has

turned ON.

2. When a PLF instruction is executed, object devices Y and M

operate for one operation cycle after the drive input signal has

turned OFF.

LD X0

PLS M0

LD M0

SET Y0

----------------------

LD X1

PLF M1

LD M1

RST Y0

Mnemonic and Function

Statements

Program

Page 73: PLC Software MANUAL - Xinje-support-centre-listo. · PDF filePLC Software Manual Page 3 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2 3-14 [NOP], [END] 76 3-15 [GROUP], [GROUPE] 77 3-16 Programming Notes 78

PLC Software Manual Page 73 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2

3-12 [ SET ], [ RST ]

Mnemonic Function Format and Devices

SET(Set) Set a bit device

permanently

ON

Devices: Y、M、S、T、C、Dn.m

RST(Reset) Reset a bit

device

permanently

OFF

Devices: Y、M、S、T、C、Dn.m

Turning ON X010 causes Y000 to turn ON. Y000 remains ON even after

X010 turns OFF. Turning ON X011 causes Y000 to turn OFF. Y000

remains OFF even after X011 turns OFF. It’s the same with M, S.

SET and RST instructions can be used for the same device as many times

as necessary. However, the last instruction activated determines the

current status.

It is also possible to use RST instruction to reset the current contents of

timer, counter and contacts.

When use SET, RST commands, avoid to use the same ID with OUT

command.

Mnemonic and Function

Statements

Page 74: PLC Software MANUAL - Xinje-support-centre-listo. · PDF filePLC Software Manual Page 3 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2 3-14 [NOP], [END] 76 3-15 [GROUP], [GROUPE] 77 3-16 Programming Notes 78

PLC Software Manual Page 74 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2

LD X10

SET Y0

LD X11

RST Y0

LD X12

SET M50

LD X13

RST M50

LD X14

SET S0

LD X15

RST S0

LD X10

OUT T250 K10

LD X17

RST T250

Program

Page 75: PLC Software MANUAL - Xinje-support-centre-listo. · PDF filePLC Software Manual Page 3 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2 3-14 [NOP], [END] 76 3-15 [GROUP], [GROUPE] 77 3-16 Programming Notes 78

PLC Software Manual Page 75 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2

3-13 [ OUT ], [ RST ] for the counters

Mnemonic Function Format and Devices

OUT Final logic

operation type

coil drive

Device:K、D

RST Reset a bit

device

permanently

OFF

SFTR S D n1 n2

Device:C

C0 carries on increase count for the

OFF→ON of X011. When the set

value K10 is reached, output contact

C0 activates. Afterwards, even X011

turns from OFF to ON, counter’s

current value will not change, output

contact keep on activating.

To clear this, let X010 be the activate

status and reset the output contact.

It’s necessary to assign constant K or

indirect data register’s ID behind

OUT instruction.

In the preceding example, when M0 is ON, carry on positive count with OFF→ON

of X0.

Counter’s current value increase, when it reaches the set value (K or D), the

output contact is reset.

When M1 is ON, counter’s C600 output contact is reset, counter’s current value

turns to be 0.

Counter used for power cut retentive.

Even when power is cut, hold the

current

value and output contact’s action status

and reset status.

Mnemonic and Function

Programming of

interior counter

Programming of

high speed

Page 76: PLC Software MANUAL - Xinje-support-centre-listo. · PDF filePLC Software Manual Page 3 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2 3-14 [NOP], [END] 76 3-15 [GROUP], [GROUPE] 77 3-16 Programming Notes 78

PLC Software Manual Page 76 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2

3-14 [ END ]

Mnemonic Function Format and Devices:None

END (END) Force the

current program

scan to end

Devices: None

When executing END instruction, refresh monitor timer. (Check if scan cycle is a long

timer.)

PLC repeatedly performs input disposal,

program executing and output disposal. If write

END instruction at the end of the program, then

the instructions behind END instruction won’t be

executed. If there’s no END instruction in the

program, the PLC executes the end step and

then repeat executing the program from step 0.

When debug, insert END in each program

segment to check out each program’s action.

Then, after confirm the correction of preceding

block’s action, delete END instruction.

Besides, the first execution of RUN begins with

END instruction.

Mnemonic and Function

Statements

Page 77: PLC Software MANUAL - Xinje-support-centre-listo. · PDF filePLC Software Manual Page 3 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2 3-14 [NOP], [END] 76 3-15 [GROUP], [GROUPE] 77 3-16 Programming Notes 78

PLC Software Manual Page 77 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2

3-15 [ GROUP ], [ GROUPE ]

Mnemonic Function Format and Device

GROUP GROUP

Devices: None

GROUPE GROUP END WTD S D

Devices: None

GROUP and GROUPE should used in pairs.

GROUP and GROUPE don't have practical meaning, they are used to optimize the

program structure. So, add or delete these instructions doesn't effect the program's

running.

The using method of GROUP and GROUPE is similar with flow instructions; enter

GROUP instruction at the beginning of group part; enter GROUPE instruction at the end

of group part.

Generally, GROUP and GROUPE

instruction can be programmed according

to the group's function. The programmed

instructions can be FOLDED or

UNFOLDED. To a redundant project, these

two instructions are quite useful.

Mnemonic and Function

Statements

Page 78: PLC Software MANUAL - Xinje-support-centre-listo. · PDF filePLC Software Manual Page 3 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2 3-14 [NOP], [END] 76 3-15 [GROUP], [GROUPE] 77 3-16 Programming Notes 78

PLC Software Manual Page 78 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2

3-16 Programming Notes

1: Program’s executing sequence

The program control flow is processed from【From top to bottom】and【From left to right】

Sequencial control instructions also encode following this flow.

2: Calling outputs multiple times

See the below example on how to stop this occuring

There are other methods. E.g. jump instructions or step ladder. However, when use step ladder,

if the main program’s output coil is programmed, then the disposal method is the same with

dual coil, please note this.

Page 79: PLC Software MANUAL - Xinje-support-centre-listo. · PDF filePLC Software Manual Page 3 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2 3-14 [NOP], [END] 76 3-15 [GROUP], [GROUPE] 77 3-16 Programming Notes 78

PLC Software Manual Page 79 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2

4 Applied Instructions

In this chapter, we describe the applied instruction’s function of XC Series PLC.

4-1.Table of Applied Instructions

4-2.Reading Method of Applied Instructions

4-3.Flow Instructions

4-4.Contactors Compare Instructions

4-5.Move Instructions

4-6.Arithmetic and Logic Operation Instructions

4-7.Loop and Shift Instructions

4-8.Data Convert

4-9.Floating Operation

4-10.Clock Operation

Page 80: PLC Software MANUAL - Xinje-support-centre-listo. · PDF filePLC Software Manual Page 3 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2 3-14 [NOP], [END] 76 3-15 [GROUP], [GROUPE] 77 3-16 Programming Notes 78

PLC Software Manual Page 80 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2

4-1 Applied Instruction List

Mnemonic Function Ladder chart Chapter

Program Flow

CJ Condition jump BSTOP S1 S2

4-3-1

CALL Call subroutine BGOON S1 S2

4-3-2

SRET Subroutine return

4-3-2

STL Flow start

4-3-3

STLE Flow end S 1 ·

4-3-3

SET Open the assigned flow, close

the current flow S ·

4-3-3

ST Open the assigned flow, not

close the current flow D ·

4-3-3

FOR Start a FOR-NEXT loop D ·

4-3-4

NEXT End of a FOR-NEXT loop D ·

4-3-4

FEND Main program END D ·

4-3-5

END Program END

4-3-5

Page 81: PLC Software MANUAL - Xinje-support-centre-listo. · PDF filePLC Software Manual Page 3 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2 3-14 [NOP], [END] 76 3-15 [GROUP], [GROUPE] 77 3-16 Programming Notes 78

PLC Software Manual Page 81 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2

Data Compare

LD= LD activates if (S1) = (S2)

S ·

4-4-1

LD> LD activates if (S1) > (S2)

D ·

4-4-1

LD< LD activates if (S1) =< (S2)

D ·

4-4-1

LD<> LD activates if(S1)≠(S2) D ·

4-4-1

LD<= LD activates if(S1)≤(S2) D ·

4-4-1

LD>= LD activates if(S1)≥(S2) LD>= S1 S2

4-4-1

AND= AND activates if(S1)=(S2) AND= S1 S2

4-4-2

AND> AND activates if(S1)>(S2) AND> S1 S2

4-4-2

AND< AND activates if(S1)<(S2) AND< S1 S2

4-4-2

AND<> AND activates if(S1)≠(S2) AND<> S1 S2

4-4-2

AND<= AND activates if(S1)≤(S2) AND<= S1 S2

4-4-2

AND>= AND activates if(S1)≥(S2) B M O V D 1 0 D 1 1 K 3

B M O V D 1 0 D 9 K 3X 1

X 2

4-4-2

OR= OR activates if(S1)=(S2) OR= S1 S2

4-4-3

OR> OR activates if(S1)>(S2) PMOV D5 D10 K3X0

nS· D·

4-4-3

OR< OR activates if(S1)<(S2) OR< S1 S2

4-4-3

OR<> OR activates if(S1)≠(S2) OR<> S1 S2

4-4-3

OR<= OR activates if(S1)≤(S2) DFMOV D0 D10 K3X0

nS· D·

4-4-3

OR>= OR activates if(S1)≥(S2) OR>= S1 S2

4-4-3

Page 82: PLC Software MANUAL - Xinje-support-centre-listo. · PDF filePLC Software Manual Page 3 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2 3-14 [NOP], [END] 76 3-15 [GROUP], [GROUPE] 77 3-16 Programming Notes 78

PLC Software Manual Page 82 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2

Data Move

CMP Compare the data CMP S1 S D

4-5-1

ZCP Compare the data in certain

area D 0F W R T F D 0

X 2K 3

S · D 1 · D 2 ·

4-5-2

MOV Move MOV S D

4-5-3

BMOV Block move M S E T M 1 0 M 1 2 0

D 1 · D 2 ·X 0

4-5-4

PMOV Transfer the Data block D 2 ·

4-5-5

FMOV Multi-points repeat move D 1 ·

4-5-6

FWRT Flash ROM written D 2 ·

4-5-7

MSET Zone set D 1 ·

4-5-8

ZRST Zone reset D 2 ·

4-5-9

SWAP Swap the high and low byte D 1 ·

4-5-10

XCH Exchange two values Z R S T M 5 0 0 M 5 5 9

D 0 D 1 0 0

D 1 · D 2 ·

D 1 · D 2 ·

X 0

Z R S T 4-5-11

Page 83: PLC Software MANUAL - Xinje-support-centre-listo. · PDF filePLC Software Manual Page 3 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2 3-14 [NOP], [END] 76 3-15 [GROUP], [GROUPE] 77 3-16 Programming Notes 78

PLC Software Manual Page 83 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2

Data Operation

ADD Addition D 2 ·

4-6-1

SUB Subtraction D 1 ·

4-6-2

MUL Multiplication D 2 ·

4-6-3

DIV Division D 1 ·

4-6-4

INC Increment D 1 ·

4-6-5

DEC Decrement D 2 ·

4-6-5

MEAN Mean D 1 ·

4-6-6

WAND Word And WAND S1 S2 D

4-6-7

WOR Word OR WOR S1 S2 D

4-6-7

WXOR Word exclusive OR WXOR S1 S2 D

4-6-7

CML Compliment CML S D

4-6-8

NEG Negative

4-6-9

Page 84: PLC Software MANUAL - Xinje-support-centre-listo. · PDF filePLC Software Manual Page 3 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2 3-14 [NOP], [END] 76 3-15 [GROUP], [GROUPE] 77 3-16 Programming Notes 78

PLC Software Manual Page 84 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2

Data Shift

SHL Arithmetic Shift Left SHL D n

4-7-1

SHR Arithmetic Shift Right SHR D n

4-7-1

LSL Logic shift left

4-7-2

LSR Logic shift right

4-7-2

ROL Rotation shift left

4-7-3

ROR Rotation shift right

4-7-3

SFTL Bit shift left SFTL S D n1 n2

4-7-4

SFTR Bit shift right SFTR S D n1 n2

4-7-5

WSFL Word shift left

4-7-6

WSFR Word shift right

4-7-7

Page 85: PLC Software MANUAL - Xinje-support-centre-listo. · PDF filePLC Software Manual Page 3 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2 3-14 [NOP], [END] 76 3-15 [GROUP], [GROUPE] 77 3-16 Programming Notes 78

PLC Software Manual Page 85 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2

Data Convert

WTD Single word integer converts to

double word integer WTD S D

4-8-1

FLT 16 bits integer converts to float

point 4-8-2

DFLT 32 bits integer converts to float

point 4-8-2

FLTD 64 bits integer converts to float

point 4-8-2

INT Float point converts to integer

4-8-3

BIN BCD converts to binary

4-8-4

BCD Binary converts to BCD

4-8-5

ASCI Hex. converts to ASCII ASCI S D n

4-8-6

HEX ASCII converts to Hex.

4-8-7

DECO Coding

4-8-8

ENCO High bit coding

4-8-9

ENCOL Low bit coding

4-8-10

Page 86: PLC Software MANUAL - Xinje-support-centre-listo. · PDF filePLC Software Manual Page 3 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2 3-14 [NOP], [END] 76 3-15 [GROUP], [GROUPE] 77 3-16 Programming Notes 78

PLC Software Manual Page 86 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2

Float Point Operation

ECMP Float compare ECMP S1 S2 D

4-9-1

EZCP Float Zone compare EZCP S1 S2 D1 D2

4-9-2

EADD Float Add

4-9-3

ESUB Float Subtract

4-9-4

EMUL Float Multiplication

4-9-5

EDIV Float division

4-9-6

ESQR Float Square Root

4-9-7

SIN Sine

4-9-8

COS Cosine

4-9-9

TAN Tangent

4-9-10

ASIN Floating Sine

4-9-11

ACOS Floating Cosine

4-9-12

ATAN Floating Tangent

4-9-13

Clock Operation

TRD Read RTC data

4-10-1

TWR Write RTC data

4-10-2

Page 87: PLC Software MANUAL - Xinje-support-centre-listo. · PDF filePLC Software Manual Page 3 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2 3-14 [NOP], [END] 76 3-15 [GROUP], [GROUPE] 77 3-16 Programming Notes 78

PLC Software Manual Page 87 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2

4-2 Reading Method of Applied Instructions

In this manual, the applied instructions are described in the following manner:

1: Summary

ADDITION [ADD]

16 bits ADD 32 bits DADD

Execution

condition

Normally ON/OFF, Rising/Falling

edge

Suitable

Models

XC1.XC2.XC3.XC5.XCM

Hardware

requirement

- Software

requirement

-

2: Operands

Operands Function Data Type

S1 Specify the augend data or register 16 bits/32 bits, BIN

S2 Specify the summand data or register 16 bits/32 bits, BIN

D Specify the register to store the sum 16 bits/32 bits, BIN

3: .Suitable Soft Components

<16 bits instruction>

ADD D10 D12 D14X0

S1· S2· D·

<32 bits instruction>

DADD D10 D12 D14X0

S1· S2· D·

Word operands System Constant Module

D FD ED TD CD DX DY DM DS K /H ID QD

S1 ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

S2 ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

D ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

Bit Operands System

X Y M S T C Dn.m

(D10)+(D12)→(D14)

(D11D10)+(D13D12)→(D15D14)

Description

Page 88: PLC Software MANUAL - Xinje-support-centre-listo. · PDF filePLC Software Manual Page 3 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2 3-14 [NOP], [END] 76 3-15 [GROUP], [GROUPE] 77 3-16 Programming Notes 78

PLC Software Manual Page 88 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2

1. The data contained within the two source devices are combined and the total is stored in

the specified destination device. Each data’s highest bit is the sign bit, 0 stands for

positive, 1 stand for negative. All calculations are algebraic processed. (5+(-8)= -3).

2. If the result of a calculations is “0”, the “0’ flag acts. If the result exceeds 323,767(16 bits

limit) or 2,147,483,648 ( 32 bits limit), the carry flag acts. ( refer to the next page). If the

result exceeds -323,768 (16 bits limit) or -2,147,483,648 (32 bits limit ) , the borrow flag

acts (Refer to the next page).

3. When carry on 32 bits operation, word device’s 16 bits are assigned, the device follow

closely the preceding device’s ID will be the high bits. To avoid ID repetition, we

recommend you assign device’s ID to be even ID.

4. The same device may be used a source and a destination. If this is the case then the

result changes after every scan cycle. Please note this point.

Flag Name Function

M8020 Zero

ON:the calculate result is zero

OFF:the calculate result is not zero

M8021 Borrow

ON:the calculate result is over 32767(16bits) or 2147483647(32bits)

OFF:the calculate result is not over 32767(16bits) or 2147483647(32bits)

M8022 Carry

ON:the calculate result is over 32767(16bits) or 2147483647(32bits)

OFF:the calculate result is not over 32767(16bits) or 2147483647(32bits)

Related Flag

Page 89: PLC Software MANUAL - Xinje-support-centre-listo. · PDF filePLC Software Manual Page 3 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2 3-14 [NOP], [END] 76 3-15 [GROUP], [GROUPE] 77 3-16 Programming Notes 78

PLC Software Manual Page 89 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2

Instruction D(NUM ) Object data

Instruction D(NUM) Object data Object data

1:Flag after executing the instruction. Instructions without the direct flag will not display.

2: Source operand, its content won’t change after executing the instruction.

3: Destinate operand, its content changes with the execution of the instruction.

4:Tell the instruction’s basic action, using way, applied example, extend function, note items etc.

The assignment of the data

The data register of XC series PLC is a single word (16 bit) data

register, single word data only engross one data register which is

assigned by single word object instruction. The disposal bound is:

Dec. –327,68~327,67, Hex. 0000~FFFF.

D(NUM) Single word object instruction

Double word(32 bit)engrosses two data register, it’s composed by two consecutive data

registers, the first one is assigned by double word object instruction. The dispose bound is:

D(NUM+1) D(NUM) Double word object instruction

The denote way of 32 bits instruction

If an instruction can not only be 16 bits but also be 32 bits, then the denote method for

32 bits instruction is to add a “D” before 16 bits instruction.

E.g:ADD D0 D2 D4 denotes two 16 bits data adds;

Related

Description

Page 90: PLC Software MANUAL - Xinje-support-centre-listo. · PDF filePLC Software Manual Page 3 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2 3-14 [NOP], [END] 76 3-15 [GROUP], [GROUPE] 77 3-16 Programming Notes 78

PLC Software Manual Page 90 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2

4-3 Program Flow Instructions

4-3-1 Condition Jump [ CJ ]

1: Summary

As used to run a part of program, CJ shorten the operation cycle and using the dual coil

Condition Jump [CJ]

16 bits CJ 32 bits -

Execution

condition

Normally ON/OFF coil Suitable

Models

XC1.XC2.XC3.XC5.XCM

Hardware

requirement

- Software

requirement

-

2.Operands

Operands Function Data Type

Pn Jump to the target (with pointer Nr.) P (P0~P9999) Pointer's Nr.

3.Suitable Soft Components

Mnemonic Instruction’s name Chapter

CJ Condition Jump 4-3-1

CALL Call subroutine 4-3-2

SRET Subroutine return 4-3-2

STL Flow start 4-3-3

STLE Flow end 4-3-3

SET Open the assigned flow, close the current flow (flow

jump) 4-3-3

ST Open the assigned flow, not close the current flow

(Open the new flow) 4-3-3

FOR Start of a FOR-NEXT loop 4-3-4

NEXT End of a FOR-NEXT loop 4-3-4

FEND First End 4-3-5

END Program End 4-3-5

Pointer

P I

Other

Page 91: PLC Software MANUAL - Xinje-support-centre-listo. · PDF filePLC Software Manual Page 3 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2 3-14 [NOP], [END] 76 3-15 [GROUP], [GROUPE] 77 3-16 Programming Notes 78

PLC Software Manual Page 91 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2

In the below graph, if X000 is “ON”, jump from the first step to the next

step behind P6 tag. If X000 “OFF”, do not execute the jump construction;

CJ

Y0

X0

X1

X3

X4

X0

RST

T246 K1000

MOV

CJ

X2

X5

X6

P6

T246

K3 D0

P7

T246RST

Y0

P6

P7

In the left graph, Y000 becomes to

be dual coil output, but when

X000=OFF, X001 activates; when

X000=ON, X005 activates

CJ can’t jump from one STL to

another STL;

After driving time T0~T640 and

HSC C600~C640, if execute CJ,

continue to work, the output

activates.

Description

Page 92: PLC Software MANUAL - Xinje-support-centre-listo. · PDF filePLC Software Manual Page 3 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2 3-14 [NOP], [END] 76 3-15 [GROUP], [GROUPE] 77 3-16 Programming Notes 78

PLC Software Manual Page 92 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2

4-3-2.Call subroutine [CALL] and Subroutine return [SRET]

1: Summary

Call the programs which need to be executed together, decrease the program's steps

Subroutine Call [CALL]

16 bits CALL 32 bits -

Execution

condition

Normally ON/OFF,

Rising/Falling edge

Suitable Models XC1.XC2.XC3.XC5.XCM

Hardware

requirement

- Software

requirement

-

Subroutine Return [SRET]

16 bits SRET 32 bits -

Execution

condition

- Suitable Models XC1.XC2.XC3.XC5.XCM

Hardware

requirement

- Software

requirement

-

2.Operands

Operands Function Data Type

Pn Jump to the target (with pointer Nr.) P

(P0~P9999)

Pointer's Nr.

3.Suitable Soft Components

CALLX0

FEND

SRET

END

P10

P10

Others Pointer

P I

Main P

rogramS

ubroutine

If X000= “ON”, execute

the call instruction and

jump to the step tagged by

P10. after executing the

subroutine, return the

original step via SRET

instruction.Program the

tag with FEND instruction

(will describe this

instruction later)

In the subroutine 9 times

call is allowed, so totally

there can be 10 nestings.

Description

Page 93: PLC Software MANUAL - Xinje-support-centre-listo. · PDF filePLC Software Manual Page 3 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2 3-14 [NOP], [END] 76 3-15 [GROUP], [GROUPE] 77 3-16 Programming Notes 78

PLC Software Manual Page 93 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2

4-3-3 Flow [SET], [ST], [STL], [STLE]

1: Summary

Instructions to specify the start, end, open, close of a flow;

Open the specified flow, close the local flow [SET]

16 bits SET 32 bits -

Execution

condition

Normally ON/OFF,

Rising/Falling edge

Suitable Models XC1.XC2.XC3.XC5.XCM

Hardware

requirement

- Software

requirement

-

Open the specified flow, not close the local flow [ST]

16 bits ST 32 bits -

Execution

condition

Normally ON/OFF,

Rising/Falling edge

Suitable Models XC1.XC2.XC3.XC5.XCM

Hardware

requirement

- Software

requirement

-

Flow starts [STL]

16 bits STL 32 bits -

Execution

condition

- Suitable Models XC1.XC2.XC3.XC5.XCM

Hardware

requirement

- Software

requirement

-

Flow ends [STLE]

16 bits STLE 32 bits -

Execution

condition

- Suitable Models XC1.XC2.XC3.XC5.XCM

Hardware

requirement

- Software

requirement

-

2: Operands

Operands Function Data Type

Sn Jump to the target flow S Flow ID

3: Suitable Soft Components

Operands System

X Y M S T C Dn.m

Sn ●

Bit

Page 94: PLC Software MANUAL - Xinje-support-centre-listo. · PDF filePLC Software Manual Page 3 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2 3-14 [NOP], [END] 76 3-15 [GROUP], [GROUPE] 77 3-16 Programming Notes 78

PLC Software Manual Page 94 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2

SET S0

STL S0

SET S1

ST S2

STL S1

STLE

STLE

STL S2

STLE

STL and STLE should be used in pairs. STL represents the start of a flow, STLE

represents the end of a flow.

After executing of SET Sxxx instruction, the flow specified by these instructions is ON.

After executing RST Sxxx instruction, the specified flow is OFF.

In flow S0, SET S1 close the current flow S0, open flow S1.

In flow S0, ST S2 open the flow S2, but don’t close flow S0.

When flow turns from ON to be OFF, reset OUT、PLS、PLF、not accumulate timer etc.

which belongs to the flow.

ST instruction is usually used when a program needs to run more flows at the same time.

After executing of SET Sxxx instruction, the pulse instructions will be closed (including

one-segment, multi-segment, relative or absolute, return to the origin)

Description

Page 95: PLC Software MANUAL - Xinje-support-centre-listo. · PDF filePLC Software Manual Page 3 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2 3-14 [NOP], [END] 76 3-15 [GROUP], [GROUPE] 77 3-16 Programming Notes 78

PLC Software Manual Page 95 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2

4-3-4 [FOR] and [NEXT]

1: Summary

Loop execute the program between FOR and NEXT with the specified times;

Loop starts [FOR]

16 bits FOR 32 bits -

Execution

condition

Rising/Falling edge Suitable Models XC1.XC2.XC3.XC5.XCM

Hardware

requirement

- Software

requirement

-

Loop ends [NEXT]

16 bits NEXTs 32 bits -

Execution

condition

Normally ON/OFF,

Rising/Falling edge

Suitable Models XC1.XC2.XC3.XC5.XCM

Hardware

requirement

- Software

requirement

-

2: Operands

Operands Function Data Type

S Program’s loop times between FOR~NEXT 16 bits, BIN

3: Suitable Soft Components

Operands System Constant Module

D FD ED TD CD DX DY DM DS K /H ID QD

S ● ●

Word

Page 96: PLC Software MANUAL - Xinje-support-centre-listo. · PDF filePLC Software Manual Page 3 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2 3-14 [NOP], [END] 76 3-15 [GROUP], [GROUPE] 77 3-16 Programming Notes 78

PLC Software Manual Page 96 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2

FOR.NEXT instructions must be programmed as a pair. Nesting is allowed, and the

nesting level is 8.

Between FOR/NEXT, LDP.LDF instructions are effective for one time. Every time when

M0 turns from OFF to ON, and M1 turns from OFF to ON, [A] loop is executed 6 times.

Every time if M0 turns from OFF to ON and M3 is ON, [B] loop is executed 5×7=35 times.

If there are many loop times, the scan cycle will be prolonged. Monitor timer error may

occur, please note this.

If NEXT is before FOR, or no NEXT, or NEXT is behind FENG,END, or FOR and NEXT

number is not equal, an error will occur.

Between FOR~NEXT, CJ nesting is not allowed, also in one STL, FOR~NEXT must be

programmed as a pair.

F O R K 6

IN C D 0

N E X T

F O R K 7

IN C D 1

N E X T

N E X T

F O R K 5M 0

M 3

M 1

[A ]

[B ]

[C ]

S ·

Description

Page 97: PLC Software MANUAL - Xinje-support-centre-listo. · PDF filePLC Software Manual Page 3 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2 3-14 [NOP], [END] 76 3-15 [GROUP], [GROUPE] 77 3-16 Programming Notes 78

PLC Software Manual Page 97 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2

4-3-5 [FEND] and [END] 1: Summary

FEND means the main program ends, while END means program ends;

main program ends [FEND]

Execution condition - Suitable Models XC1.XC2.XC3.XC5.XCM

Hardware

requirement

- Software

requirement

-

program ends [END]

Execution condition - Suitable Models XC1.XC2.XC3.XC5.XCM

Hardware

requirement

- Software

requirement

-

2: Operands

Operands Function Data Type

None - - 3: Suitable Soft Components

Even though [FEND] instruction represents the end of the main program, if

execute this instruction, the function is same with END. Execute the

output/input disposal, monitor the refresh of the timer, return to the 0th step.

If program the tag of CALL instruction behind FEND instruction, there must be SRET

instruction. If the interrupt pointer program behind FEND instruction, there must be

IRET instruction.

After executing CALL instruction and before executing SRET instruction, if execute

FEND instruction; or execute FEND instruction after executing FOR instruction and

before executing NEXT, then an error will occur.

In the condition of using many FEND instruction, please compile routine or

subroutine between the last FEND instruction and END instruction.

None

Description

Page 98: PLC Software MANUAL - Xinje-support-centre-listo. · PDF filePLC Software Manual Page 3 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2 3-14 [NOP], [END] 76 3-15 [GROUP], [GROUPE] 77 3-16 Programming Notes 78

PLC Software Manual Page 98 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2

4-4 Data Compare Function

Mnemonic Function Chapter

LD= LD activates when(S1)=(S2) 4-4-1

LD> LD activates when(S1)>(S2) 4-4-1

LD< LD activates when(S1)<(S2) 4-4-1

LD<> LD activates when(S1)≠(S2) 4-4-1

LD<= LD activates when(S1)≤(S2) 4-4-1

LD>= LD activates when(S1)≥(S2) 4-4-1

AND= AND activates when(S1)=(S2) 4-4-2

AND> AND activates when(S1)>(S2) 4-4-2

AND< AND activates when(S1)<(S2) 4-4-2

AND<> AND activates when(S1)≠(S2) 4-4-2

AND<= AND activates when(S1)≤(S2) 4-4-2

AND>= AND activates when(S1)≥(S2) 4-4-2

OR= OR activates when(S1)=(S2) 4-4-3

OR> OR activates when(S1)>(S2) 4-4-3

OR< OR activates when(S1)<(S2) 4-4-3

OR<> OR activates when(S1)≠(S2) 4-4-3

OR<= OR activates when(S1)≤(S2) 4-4-3

OR>= OR activates when(S1)≥(S2) 4-4-3

Page 99: PLC Software MANUAL - Xinje-support-centre-listo. · PDF filePLC Software Manual Page 3 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2 3-14 [NOP], [END] 76 3-15 [GROUP], [GROUPE] 77 3-16 Programming Notes 78

PLC Software Manual Page 99 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2

4-4-1 LD Compare [LD] 1: Summary

LD is the point compare instruction connected with the generatrix.

LD Compare [LD]

16 bits As below 32 bits As below

Execution

condition

- Suitable

Models

XC1.XC2.XC3.XC5.XCM

Hardware

requirement

- Software

requirement

-

2: Operands

Operands Function Data Type

S1 Specify the Data ( to be compared) or soft

component’s address code

16/32bits, BIN

S2 Specify the comparand’s value or soft component’s

address code

16/32 bits, BIN

3: Suitable soft components

16 bits instruction 32 bits instruction Activate Condition Not Activate Condition

LD= DLD= (S1)=(S2) (S1)≠(S2)

LD> DLD> (S1)>(S2) (S1)≤(S2)

LD< DLD< (S1)<(S2) (S1)≥(S2)

LD<> DLD<> (S1)≠(S2) (S1)=(S2)

LD<= DLD<= (S1)≤(S2) (S1)>(S2)

LD>= DLD>= (S1)≥(S2) (S1)<(S2)

Operands System Constant Module

D FD ED TD CD DX DY DM DS K /H ID QD

S1 ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

S2 ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

Word

Description

Page 100: PLC Software MANUAL - Xinje-support-centre-listo. · PDF filePLC Software Manual Page 3 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2 3-14 [NOP], [END] 76 3-15 [GROUP], [GROUPE] 77 3-16 Programming Notes 78

PLC Software Manual Page 100 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2

LD> D200 K-30 SET Y1

DLD> K68899 C300 M50

X1

M4

S1· S2·

LD= K100 C0 Y0X0

4-4-2.AND Compare [AND]

1: Summary

AND: The compare instruction to serial connect with the other contactors.

AND Compare [AND]

16 bits As Below 32 bits As Below

Execution

condition

Normally ON/OFF coil Suitable

Models

XC1.XC2.XC3.XC5.XCM

Hardware

requirement

- Software

requirement

-

2: Operands

Operands Function Data Type

S1 Specify the Data ( to be compared) or soft

component’s address code

16/32bit,BIN

S2 Specify the comparand’s value or soft component’s

address code

16/32bit,BIN

3: Suitable soft components

When the source data’s highest bit (16 bits:b15,32 bits:b31) is 1,

use the data as a negative.

The comparison of 32 bits counter (C300~) must be 32 bits

instruction. If assigned as a 16 bits instruction, it will lead the program

error or operation error.

Operands System Konstant Module

D FD ED TD CD DX DY DM DS K /H ID QD

S1 ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

S2 ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

Word

Notes

Page 101: PLC Software MANUAL - Xinje-support-centre-listo. · PDF filePLC Software Manual Page 3 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2 3-14 [NOP], [END] 76 3-15 [GROUP], [GROUPE] 77 3-16 Programming Notes 78

PLC Software Manual Page 101 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2

16 bits instruction 32 bits instruction Activate Condition Not Activate Condition

AND= DAND= (S1)=(S2) (S1)≠(S2)

AND> DAND> (S1)>(S2) (S1)≤(S2)

AND< DAND< (S1)<(S2) (S1)≥(S2)

AND<> DAND<> (S1)≠(S2) (S1)=(S2)

AND<= DAND<= (S1)≤(S2) (S1)>(S2)

AND>= DAND>= (S1)≥(S2) (S1)<(S2)

BGOONS1 S2

When the source data’s highest bit (16 bits:b15,32 bits:b31) is 1,

use the data as a negative.

The comparison of 32 bits counter (C300~) must be 32 bits

instruction. If assigned as a 16 bits instruction, it will lead the program

error or operation error.

Description

Notes

Page 102: PLC Software MANUAL - Xinje-support-centre-listo. · PDF filePLC Software Manual Page 3 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2 3-14 [NOP], [END] 76 3-15 [GROUP], [GROUPE] 77 3-16 Programming Notes 78

PLC Software Manual Page 102 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2

4-4-3.Parallel Compare [OR]

1: Summary

OR The compare instruction to parallel connect with the other contactors

Parallel Compare [OR]

16 bits As below 32 bits As below

Execution

condition

- Suitable

Models

XC1.XC2.XC3.XC5.XCM

Hardware

requirement

- Software

requirement

-

2: Operands

Operands Function Data Type

S1 Specify the Data ( to be compared) or soft

component’s address code

16/32 bit,BIN

S2 Specify the comparand’s value or soft component’s

address code

16/32 bit,BIN

3: Suitable soft components

Operands System Constant Module

D FD ED TD CD DX DY DM DS K /H ID QD

S1 ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

S2 ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

Word

Page 103: PLC Software MANUAL - Xinje-support-centre-listo. · PDF filePLC Software Manual Page 3 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2 3-14 [NOP], [END] 76 3-15 [GROUP], [GROUPE] 77 3-16 Programming Notes 78

PLC Software Manual Page 103 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2

16 bits instruction 32 bits instruction Activate Condition Not Activate Condition

OR= DOR= (S1)=(S2) (S1)≠(S2)

OR> DOR> (S1)>(S2) (S1)≤(S2)

OR< DOR< (S1)<(S2) (S1)≥(S2)

OR<> DOR<> (S1)≠(S2) (S1)=(S2)

OR<= DOR<= (S1)≤(S2) (S1)>(S2)

OR>= DOR>= (S1)≥(S2) (S1)<(S2)

When the source data’s highest bit (16 bits:b15,32 bits:b31) is 1,use the data as a negative.

The comparison of 32 bits counter (C300~) must be 32 bits

instruction. If assigned as a 16 bits instruction, it will lead the program

error or operation error.

Description

Notes

Page 104: PLC Software MANUAL - Xinje-support-centre-listo. · PDF filePLC Software Manual Page 3 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2 3-14 [NOP], [END] 76 3-15 [GROUP], [GROUPE] 77 3-16 Programming Notes 78

PLC Software Manual Page 104 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2

4-5 Data Move

Mnemonic Function Chapter

CMP Data compare 4-5-1

ZCP Data zone compare 4-5-2

MOV Move 4-5-3

BMOV Data block move 4-5-4

PMOV Data block move (with faster speed) 4-5-5

FMOV Fill move 4-5-6

FWRT FlashROM written 4-5-7

MSET Zone set 4-5-8

ZRST Zone reset 4-5-9

SWAP The high and low byte of the

destinated devices are exchanged 4-5-10

XCH Exchange 4-5-11

Page 105: PLC Software MANUAL - Xinje-support-centre-listo. · PDF filePLC Software Manual Page 3 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2 3-14 [NOP], [END] 76 3-15 [GROUP], [GROUPE] 77 3-16 Programming Notes 78

PLC Software Manual Page 105 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2

4-5-1 Data Compare [CMP] 1. Summary

Compare the two specified Data, output the result.

Data compare [CMP]

16 bits CMP 32 bits DCMP

Execution

condition

Normally ON/OFF, rising/falling

edge

Suitable

Models

XC1.XC2.XC3.XC5.XCM

Hardware

requirement

- Software

requirement

-

2: Operands

Operands Function Data Type

S1 Specify the data (to be compared) or soft component’s

address code

16 bit,BIN

S Specify the comparand’s value or soft component’s

address code

16 bit,BIN

D Specify the compare result’s address code bit 3: Suitable soft component

CMP D10 D20 M0

S1·X0

M0

M1

M2

D10 > D20

D10 = D20

D10 < D20

ON

ON

ON

D

Word Operands System Constant Module

D FD ED TD CD DX DY DM DS K /H ID QD

S1 ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

S ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

Oper

ands

System

X Y M S T C Dn..m

D ● ● ●

Bit

Even X000=OFF to stop ZCP instruction, M0~M2 will

keep the original status

Compare data and , output the three points’ ON/OFF status (start

with

S1· S·

, +1, +2 :the three point’s on/off output according to the valve D· D· D·

Description

Page 106: PLC Software MANUAL - Xinje-support-centre-listo. · PDF filePLC Software Manual Page 3 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2 3-14 [NOP], [END] 76 3-15 [GROUP], [GROUPE] 77 3-16 Programming Notes 78

PLC Software Manual Page 106 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2

4-5-2 Data zone compare [ZCP]

1: Summary

Compare the two specify Data with the current data, output the result.

Data Zone compare [ZCP]

16 bits ZCP 32 bits DZCP

Execution

condition

Normally ON/OFF, rising/falling

edge

Suitable

Models

XC1.XC2.XC3.XC5.XCM

Hardware

requirement

- Software

requirement

-

2: Operands

Operands Function Data Type

S1 Specify the down-limit Data (of the compare stand) or

soft component’s address code

16 bit, BIN

S2 Specify the Up-limit Data (of the compare stand) or

soft component’s address code

16 bit, BIN

S Specify the current data or soft component’s address

code

16 bit, BIN

D Specify the compare result’s data or soft component’s

address code

bit

3: Suitable soft components

ZCP D20 D30 D0 M0

S1· S2· S· D·X0

M0

M1

M2

D0 M0 ON

M1 ON

M2 ON

D0

D0

D20

D20 D31(分)

D31(分)

≤ ≤

Word Operands System Constant Module

D FD ED TD CD DX DY DM DS K /H ID QD

S1 ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

S2 ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

S ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

Bit Oper

ands

System

X Y M S T C Dn..m

D ● ● ●

Even X000=OFF stop ZCP instruction,M0~M2 will keep the original status

Description

Page 107: PLC Software MANUAL - Xinje-support-centre-listo. · PDF filePLC Software Manual Page 3 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2 3-14 [NOP], [END] 76 3-15 [GROUP], [GROUPE] 77 3-16 Programming Notes 78

PLC Software Manual Page 107 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2

4-5-3 MOV [MOV]

1: Summary

Move the specified data to the other soft components

MOV [MOV]

16 bits MOV 32 bits DMOV

Execution

condition

Normally ON/OFF, rising/falling

edge

Suitable

Models

XC1.XC2.XC3.XC5.XCM

Hardware

requirement

- Software

requirement

-

2: Operands

Operands Function Data Type

S Specify the source data or register’s address code 16 bit/32 bit, BIN

D Specify the target soft component’s address code 16 bit/32 bit, BIN

3: Suitable soft component

MOV K10 D10X0

S· D·

<read the counter’s or time’s current value> <indirectly specify the counter’s ,time’s set value>

Compare data with and , output the three point’s ON/OFF status

according to the zone size.

, +1, +2 : the three point’s ON/OFF output according to the result

S· D·

D·D·D·

Word Operands System Constant Module

D FD ED TD CD DX DY DM DS K /H ID QD

S ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

D ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

Move the source data to the target

When X000 is off, the data keeps

same

Convert constant K10 to be BIN

code automatically

S1 S2

Description

Page 108: PLC Software MANUAL - Xinje-support-centre-listo. · PDF filePLC Software Manual Page 3 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2 3-14 [NOP], [END] 76 3-15 [GROUP], [GROUPE] 77 3-16 Programming Notes 78

PLC Software Manual Page 108 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2

MOV T0 D20X1

MOV K10 D20X2

M0T20 D20

< Move the 32bits data >

DMOV D0 D10

DMOV C235 D20

(K10)(D10) ( The current value of T0)→(D20)

The same as counter

Please use DMOV when the value is 32 bits, such as

MUL instruction, high speed counter…

(D1,D0)→(D11,D10)

Page 109: PLC Software MANUAL - Xinje-support-centre-listo. · PDF filePLC Software Manual Page 3 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2 3-14 [NOP], [END] 76 3-15 [GROUP], [GROUPE] 77 3-16 Programming Notes 78

PLC Software Manual Page 109 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2

4-5-4.Data Block Move [BMOV]

1: Summary

Move the specified data block to

Data block move [BMOV]

16 bits BMOV 32 bits -

Execution

condition

Normally ON/OFF coil Suitable

Models

XC1.XC2.XC3.XC5.XCM

Hardware

requirement

- Software

requirement

-

2: Operands

Operands Function Data Type

S Specify the source data block or soft component

address code

16 bits, BIN; bit

D Specify the target soft components address code 16 bits, BIN; bit

n Specify the move data’s number 16 bits, BIN;

3: Suitable soft components

Operands System Constant Module

D FD ED TD CD DX DY DM DS K /H ID QD

S ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

D ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

n ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

Word

Bit Operands System

X Y M S T C Dn.m

S ● ● ●

D ● ● ●

Page 110: PLC Software MANUAL - Xinje-support-centre-listo. · PDF filePLC Software Manual Page 3 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2 3-14 [NOP], [END] 76 3-15 [GROUP], [GROUPE] 77 3-16 Programming Notes 78

PLC Software Manual Page 110 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2

(1) Move the specified “n” data to the specified “n” soft components in the

form block.

BMOV D5 D10 K3X0

nS· D·

D5

D6

D7

D10

D11

D12

n=3

(2) As the following picture, when the data address overlapped, the

instruction will do from 1 to 3.

BMOV D10 D11 K3

BMOV D10 D9 K3X1

X2

D10

D11

D12

D9

D10

D11

D10

D11

D12

D11

D12

D13

②③

③②①

Description

Page 111: PLC Software MANUAL - Xinje-support-centre-listo. · PDF filePLC Software Manual Page 3 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2 3-14 [NOP], [END] 76 3-15 [GROUP], [GROUPE] 77 3-16 Programming Notes 78

PLC Software Manual Page 111 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2

4-5-5 Data Block Move [PMOV]

1: Summary

Move the specified data block to the other soft components

Data block mov[PMOV]

16 bits PMOV 32 bits -

Execution

condition

Normally ON/OFF coil Suitable

Models

XC1.XC2.XC3.XC5.XCM

Hardware

requirement

- Software

requirement

-

2: Operands

Operands Function Data Type

S Specify the source data block or soft component

address code

16 bits, BIN; bit

D Specify the target soft components address code 16 bits, BIN; bit

n Specify the move data’s number 16 bits, BIN;

3: Suitable soft components

Operands System Constant Module

D FD ED TD CD DX DY DM DS K /H ID QD

S ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

D ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

n ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

Word

Oper

ands

system

X Y M S T C Dn.m

S ● ● ●

D ● ● ●

Bit

Page 112: PLC Software MANUAL - Xinje-support-centre-listo. · PDF filePLC Software Manual Page 3 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2 3-14 [NOP], [END] 76 3-15 [GROUP], [GROUPE] 77 3-16 Programming Notes 78

PLC Software Manual Page 112 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2

(3) Move the specifed “n” data to the specified “n” soft components in form

of block

PMOV D5 D10 K3X0

nS· D·

D5

D6

D7

D10

D11

D12

n=3

4-5-6 Fill Move [FMOV]

1: Summary

Move the specified data block to the other soft components

Fill Move [FMOV]

16 bits FMOV 32 bits DFMOV

Execution

condition

Normally ON/OFF, rising/falling

edge

Suitable

Models

XC1.XC2.XC3.XC5.XCM

Hardware

requirement

DFMOV need above V3.0 Software

requirement

-

2: Operands

Operands Function Data Type

S Specify the source data block or soft component

address code

16 bits, BIN; bit

D Specify the target soft components address code 16 bits, BIN; bit

n Specify the move data’s number 16 bits, BIN;

3: Suitable soft component

The function of PMOV and BMOV is mostly the same, but the PMOV

has the faster speed

PMOV finish in one scan cycle, when executing PMOV , close all the

interruptions

Mistake many happen, if there is a repeat with source address and

target address

Word Operands System Constant Module

D FD ED TD CD DX DY DM DS K /H ID QD

S ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

D ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

n ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

Description

Page 113: PLC Software MANUAL - Xinje-support-centre-listo. · PDF filePLC Software Manual Page 3 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2 3-14 [NOP], [END] 76 3-15 [GROUP], [GROUPE] 77 3-16 Programming Notes 78

PLC Software Manual Page 113 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2

<16 bits instruction>

FMOV K0 D0 K10X0

nS· D·

(4) Move K0 to D0~D9, copy a single data device to a range of destination

device.

(5) The data stored in the source device (S) is copied to every device

within the destination range, The range is specified by a device head

address (D) and a quantity of consecutive elements (n).

(6) If the specified number of destination devices (n) exceeds the available

space at the destination location, then only the available destination

devices will be written to.

<32 bits instruction >

DFMOV D0 D10 K3X0

nS· D·

Move D0.D1 to D10.D11:D12.D13:D14.D15.

<16 bits Fill Move > <32 bits Fill move>

K0 D0K0

n

D1K0

D2K0

D3K0

D4K0

D5K0

D6K0

D7K0

D8K0

D9K0

Description

Page 114: PLC Software MANUAL - Xinje-support-centre-listo. · PDF filePLC Software Manual Page 3 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2 3-14 [NOP], [END] 76 3-15 [GROUP], [GROUPE] 77 3-16 Programming Notes 78

PLC Software Manual Page 114 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2

4-5-7 FlashROM Write [FWRT] 1: Summary

Write the specified data to other soft components

FlashROM Write [FWRT]

16 bits FWRT 32 bits DFWRT

Execution

condition

rising/falling edge Suitable

Models

XC1.XC2.XC3.XC5.XCM

Hardware

requirement

- Software

requirement

-

2: Operands

Operands Function Data Type

S The data write in the source or save in the soft

element

16 bits/32 bits, BIN

D Write in target soft element 16 bits/32 bits, BIN

D1 Write in target soft element start address 16 bits/32 bits, BIN

D2 Write in data quantity bit 3: Suitable soft components

Operands System Constant Module

D FD ED TD CD DX DY DM DS K /H ID QD

S ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

D ●

D1 ●

D2 ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

Word

Page 115: PLC Software MANUAL - Xinje-support-centre-listo. · PDF filePLC Software Manual Page 3 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2 3-14 [NOP], [END] 76 3-15 [GROUP], [GROUPE] 77 3-16 Programming Notes 78

PLC Software Manual Page 115 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2

< Written of a word >

D0FWRT FD0X0

S· D·

<Written of double word> <Written of multi-word>

D0DFWRT FD0X1

S· D·

※1:FWRT instruction only allow to write data into FlashRom register. In this storage, even battery drop,

data could be used to store important technical parameters

※2:Written of FWRT needs a long time, about 150ms, so frequently operate this operate this operate

operation is recommended

※3:The written time of Flshrom is about 1,000,000 times. So we suggest using edge signal (LDP, LDF

etc.) to trigger.

※4:Frequently written of FlashROM

Write value in D0 into FD0

D0FWRT FD0X2

K3

S· D1· D2·

Write value in D0,D1 into FD0,FD1 Write value in D0,D1,D2 into FD0,FD1,FD2

Description

Page 116: PLC Software MANUAL - Xinje-support-centre-listo. · PDF filePLC Software Manual Page 3 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2 3-14 [NOP], [END] 76 3-15 [GROUP], [GROUPE] 77 3-16 Programming Notes 78

PLC Software Manual Page 116 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2

4-5-8 Zone set [MSET]

1: Summary

Set or reset the soft element in certain range

Multi-set [MSET]

16 bits MSET.ZRST 32 bits -

Execution

condition

Normally ON/OFF Suitable

Models

XC1.XC2.XC3.XC5.XCM

Hardware

requirement

- Software

requirement

-

2: Operands

Operands Function Data Type

D1 Start soft element address bit

D2 End soft element address bit

3: Suitable soft components

MSET M10 M120

D1· D2·X0

Operands System

X Y M S T C Dn.m

D1 ● ● ● ● ● ●

D2 ● ● ● ● ● ●

Bit

Zone set unit M10~M120

Are specified as the same type of soft units, and <

When > ,will not run Zone set, set M8004.M8067,and D8067=2。

D2·D1·D2·D1·

D2·D1·

Description

Page 117: PLC Software MANUAL - Xinje-support-centre-listo. · PDF filePLC Software Manual Page 3 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2 3-14 [NOP], [END] 76 3-15 [GROUP], [GROUPE] 77 3-16 Programming Notes 78

PLC Software Manual Page 117 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2

4-5-9 Zone reset [ZRST] 1: Summary

Reset the soft element in the certain range

Multi-reset [ZRST]

16 bits ZRST 32 bits -

Execution

condition

Normally ON/OFF Suitable

Models

XC1.XC2.XC3.XC5.XCM

Hardware

requirement

- Software

requirement

-

2: Operands

Operands Function Data Type

D1 Start address of soft element Bit:16 bits,BIN

D2 End address of soft element Bit:16 bits,BIN

3: Suitable soft components

ZRST M500 M559

D0 D100

D1· D2·

D1· D2·

X0

ZRST

Operands System Constant Module

D FD ED TD CD DX DY DM DS K /H ID QD

D1 ● ● ● ●

D2 ● ● ● ● ●

Word

Operands System

X Y M S T C Dn.m

D1 ● ● ● ● ● ●

D2 ● ● ● ● ● ●

Bit

Zone reset bits M5 00~M559。

Zone reset words D0~D100

Are specified as the same type of soft units, and <

When > only reset the soft unit specified in , and set

M8004.M8067,D8067=2.

D2·D1·D2·D1·

D1·D2·D1·

1. As soft unit’s separate reset instruction, RST instruction can be used to bit unit

Y, M, S and word unit T, C, D

2. As fill move for constant K0, 0 can be written into DX, DY, DM, DS, T, C, D.

Description

Other Reset

Instruction

Page 118: PLC Software MANUAL - Xinje-support-centre-listo. · PDF filePLC Software Manual Page 3 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2 3-14 [NOP], [END] 76 3-15 [GROUP], [GROUPE] 77 3-16 Programming Notes 78

PLC Software Manual Page 118 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2

4-5-10 Swap the high and low byte [SWAP]

1: Summary

Swap the high and low byte

High and low byte swap [SWAP]

16 bits SWAP 32 bits -

Execution

condition

Normally ON/OFF Suitable

Models

XC1.XC2.XC3.XC5.XCM

Hardware

requirement

- Software

requirement

-

2: Operands

Operands Function Data Type

S The address of the soft element 16 bits: BIN

3: Suitable soft components

SWAP D10

高8位

D10

低8位

S·X0

Word Operands System Constant Module

D FD ED TD CD DX DY DM DS K /H ID QD

S ● ● ●

Low 8 bits and high 8 bits change when it is 16 bits instruction.

If the instruction is a consecutive executing instruction, each operation

cycle should change.

Description

Upper 8 bits Lower 8 bits

Page 119: PLC Software MANUAL - Xinje-support-centre-listo. · PDF filePLC Software Manual Page 3 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2 3-14 [NOP], [END] 76 3-15 [GROUP], [GROUPE] 77 3-16 Programming Notes 78

PLC Software Manual Page 119 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2

4-5-11 Exchange [XCH]

1: Summary

Exchange the data in two soft element

Exchange [XCH]

16 bits XCH 32 bits DXCH

Execution

condition

Normally ON/OFF Suitable

Models

XC1.XC2.XC3.XC5.XCM

Hardware

requirement

- Software

requirement

-

2: Operands

Operands Function Data Type

D1 The soft element address 16 bits, BIN

D2 The soft element address 16 bits, BIN

3: Suitable soft component

<16 bits instruction>

XCH D10 D11X0

D1· D2·

<32 bits instruction >

DXCH D10 D20X0

D1· D2·

Operands System Constant Module

D FD ED TD CD DX DY DM DS K /H ID QD

D1 ● ● ● ● ● ●

D2 ● ● ● ● ● ●

Word

Before(D10)=100 →After (D10)=101

The contents of the two destination devices D1 and D2 are swapped,

When drive input X0 is ON, each scan cycle should carry on data

exchange, please note.

32 bits instruction [DXCH] swaps value composed by D10、D11 and the

value composed by D20、D21.

Description

Page 120: PLC Software MANUAL - Xinje-support-centre-listo. · PDF filePLC Software Manual Page 3 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2 3-14 [NOP], [END] 76 3-15 [GROUP], [GROUPE] 77 3-16 Programming Notes 78

PLC Software Manual Page 120 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2

4-6 Data Operation Instructions

Mnemonic Function Chapter

ADD Addition 4-6-1

SUB Subtraction 4-6-2

MUL Multiplication 4-6-3

DIV Division 4-6-4

INC Increment 4-6-5

DEC Decrement 4-6-5

MEAN Mean 4-6-6

WAND Logic Word And 4-6-7

WOR Logic Word Or 4-6-7

WXOR Logic Exclusive Or 4-6-7

CML Compliment 4-6-8

NEG Negation 4-6-9

Page 121: PLC Software MANUAL - Xinje-support-centre-listo. · PDF filePLC Software Manual Page 3 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2 3-14 [NOP], [END] 76 3-15 [GROUP], [GROUPE] 77 3-16 Programming Notes 78

PLC Software Manual Page 121 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2

4-6-1 Addition [ADD]

1: Summary

Add two numbers and store the result

Add [ADD]

16 bits ADD 32 bits DADD

Execution

condition

Normally ON/OFF Suitable

Models

XC1.XC2.XC3.XC5.XCM

Hardware

requirement

- Software

requirement

-

2: Operands

Operands Function Data Type

S1 The number address 16 bit/32 bit, BIN

S2 The number address 16 bit/32bit, BIN

D The result address 16 bit/32bit, BIN

3: Suitable soft components

ADD D10 D12 D14X0

S1· S2· D·

Operands System Constant Module

D FD ED TD CD DX DY DM DS K /H ID QD

S1 ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

S2 ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

D ● ● ● ● ● ●

Word

(D10)+(D12)→(D14)

3. The data contained within the two source devices are combined and the total is stored in the

specified destination device. Each data’s highest bit is the sign bit, 0 stands for positive、1

stands for negative. All calculations are algebraic processed.(5+(-8)=-3)

4. If the result of a calculation is “0”, the “0” flag acts. If the result exceeds 323,767(16 bits limit)or 2,147,483,647(32 bits limit), the carry flag acts.(refer to the next page). If the result

exceeds –323,768(16 bits limit)or –2,147,483,648(32 bits limit), the borrow flag acts(Refer

to the next page。

5. When carry on 32 bits operation, word device’s low 16 bits are assigned, the device following

closely the preceding device’s ID will be the high bits. To avoid ID repetition, we recommend

you assign device’s ID to be even ID.

6. The same device may be used as a source and a destination. If this is the case then the result

changes after every scan cycle. Please note this point.

Description

Page 122: PLC Software MANUAL - Xinje-support-centre-listo. · PDF filePLC Software Manual Page 3 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2 3-14 [NOP], [END] 76 3-15 [GROUP], [GROUPE] 77 3-16 Programming Notes 78

PLC Software Manual Page 122 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2

Flag meaning:

Flag Name Function

M8020 Zero

ON:the calculate result is zero

OFF:the calculate result is not zero

M8021 Borrow

ON:the calculate result is less than -32768(16 bit) or -2147483648(32bit)

OFF:the calculate result is over -32768(16 bit) or -2147483648(32bit)

M8022 Carry

ON:the calculate result is over 32768(16 bit) or 2147483648(32bit)

OFF:the calculate result is less than 32768(16 bit) or 2147483648(32bit)

Related Flag

Page 123: PLC Software MANUAL - Xinje-support-centre-listo. · PDF filePLC Software Manual Page 3 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2 3-14 [NOP], [END] 76 3-15 [GROUP], [GROUPE] 77 3-16 Programming Notes 78

PLC Software Manual Page 123 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2

4-6-2 Subtraction [SUB]

1: Summary

Sub two numbers, store the result

Subtraction [SUB]

16 bits SUB 32 bits DSUB

Execution

condition

Normally ON/OFF Suitable

Models

XC1.XC2.XC3.XC5.XCM

Hardware

requirement

- Software

requirement

-

2: Operands

Operands Function Data Type

S1 The number address 16 bits /32 bits,BIN

S2 The number address 16 bits /32 bits,BIN

D The result address 16 bits /32 bits,BIN

3: Suitable soft component

SUB D10 D12 D14X0

S1· S2· D·

Operands System Constant Module

D FD ED TD CD DX DY DM DS K /H ID QD

S1 ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

S2 ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

D ● ● ● ● ● ●

Word

(D10)—(D12)→(D14)

7. appoint the soft unit’s content, subtract the soft unit’s content appointed by in

the format of algebra. The result will be stored in the soft unit appointed by .

(5-(-8)=13)

8. The action of each flag, the appointment method of 32 bits operation’s soft units are

both the same with the preceding ADD instruction.

9. The importance is: in the preceding program, if X0 is ON, SUB operation will be

executed every scan cycle

S1· S2·

Description

Page 124: PLC Software MANUAL - Xinje-support-centre-listo. · PDF filePLC Software Manual Page 3 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2 3-14 [NOP], [END] 76 3-15 [GROUP], [GROUPE] 77 3-16 Programming Notes 78

PLC Software Manual Page 124 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2

The relationship of the flag’s action and vale’s positive/negative is shown below:

Page 125: PLC Software MANUAL - Xinje-support-centre-listo. · PDF filePLC Software Manual Page 3 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2 3-14 [NOP], [END] 76 3-15 [GROUP], [GROUPE] 77 3-16 Programming Notes 78

PLC Software Manual Page 125 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2

4-6-3 Multiplication [MUL] 1: Summary

Multiply two numbers, store the result

Multiplication [MUL]

16 bits MUL 32 bits DMUL

Execution

condition

Normally ON/OFF Suitable

Models

XC1.XC2.XC3.XC5.XCM

Hardware

requirement

- Software

requirement

-

2: Operands

Operands Function Data Type

S1 The number address 16 bits/32bits,BIN

S2 The number address 16 bits/32bits,BIN

D The result address 16 bits/32bits,BIN

3: Suitable soft component

Operands System Constant Module

D FD ED TD CD DX DY DM DS K /H ID QD

S1 ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

S2 ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

D ● ● ● ● ● ●

Word

Page 126: PLC Software MANUAL - Xinje-support-centre-listo. · PDF filePLC Software Manual Page 3 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2 3-14 [NOP], [END] 76 3-15 [GROUP], [GROUPE] 77 3-16 Programming Notes 78

PLC Software Manual Page 126 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2

<16 bits Operation>

MUL D0 D2 D4X0

S1· S2· D·

<32 bits Operation >

X1DMUL D0 D2 D4

S1· S2· D·

BIN BIN BIN

(D0) × (D2) → (D5,D4)

10. The contents of the two source devices are multiplied together and the result is stored at the

destination device in the format of 32 bits. As in the upward chart:

when (D0)=8,(D2)=9, (D5, D4) =72.

11. The result’s highest bit is the symbol bit: positive (0), negative (1).

12. When be bit unit, it can carry on the bit appointment of K1~K8. When appoint K4, only the

result’s low 16 bits can be obtained.

BIN BIN BIN

(D1,D0)× (D3,D2) → (D7,D6,D5,D4)

13. When use 2 bits Operation, the result is stored at the destination device in the

format of 64 bits.

14. Even when utilizing word device, 64 bits results can’t be monitored at once.

Description

Page 127: PLC Software MANUAL - Xinje-support-centre-listo. · PDF filePLC Software Manual Page 3 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2 3-14 [NOP], [END] 76 3-15 [GROUP], [GROUPE] 77 3-16 Programming Notes 78

PLC Software Manual Page 127 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2

4-6-4 Division [DIV]

1: Summary

Divide two numbers and store the result

Division [DIV]

16 bits DIV 32 bits DDIV

Execution

condition

Normally ON/OFF, rising/falling

edge

Suitable

Models

XC1.XC2.XC3.XC5.XCM

Hardware

requirement

- Software

requirement

-

2: Operands

Operands Function Data Type

S1 The number address 16 bits / 32 bits, BIN

S2 The number address 16 bits /32 bits, BIN

D The result address 16 bits /32 bits, BIN

3: Suitable soft components

Operands System Constant Module

D FD ED TD CD DX DY DM DS K /H ID QD

S1 ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

S2 ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

D ● ● ● ● ● ●

Word

Page 128: PLC Software MANUAL - Xinje-support-centre-listo. · PDF filePLC Software Manual Page 3 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2 3-14 [NOP], [END] 76 3-15 [GROUP], [GROUPE] 77 3-16 Programming Notes 78

PLC Software Manual Page 128 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2

<16 bits Operation >

DIV D0 D2 D4X0

S1· S2· D·

<32 bits Operation >

DDIV D0 D2 D4X1

S1· S2· D·

Dividend Divisor Result Remainder

BIN BIN BIN BIN

(D0) ÷ (D2) → D4) ┅ (D5)

15. appoints the device’s content be the dividend, appoints the device’s content

be the divisor, appoints the device and the next one to store the result and the

remainder.

16. In the above example, if input X0 is ON, devision operation is executed every scan

cycle.

S2·S1·

Dividend Divisor Result Remainder

BIN BIN BIN BIN

(D1,D0) ÷ (D3,D2) (D5,D4)┅ (D7,D6)

17. The dividend is composed by the device appointed by and the next one. The

divisor is composed by the device appointed by and the next one. The result and

the remainder are stored in the four sequential devices, the first one is appointed by

18. If the value of the divisor is 0, then an operation error is executed and the operation of

the DIV instruction is cancelled

S1·

S2·

19. The highest bit of the result and remainder is the symbol bit (positive:0, negative: 1).

When any of the dividend or the divisor is negative, then the result will be negative.

When the dividend is negative, then the remainder will be negative.

Description

Page 129: PLC Software MANUAL - Xinje-support-centre-listo. · PDF filePLC Software Manual Page 3 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2 3-14 [NOP], [END] 76 3-15 [GROUP], [GROUPE] 77 3-16 Programming Notes 78

PLC Software Manual Page 129 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2

4-6-5 Increment [INC] & Decrement [DEC] 1: Summary

Increase or decrease the number

Increment 1[INC]

16 bits INC 32 bits DINC

Execution

condition

Normally ON/OFF, rising/falling

edge

Suitable

Models

XC1.XC2.XC3.XC5.XCM

Hardware

requirement

- Software

requirement

-

Increment 1[DEC]

16 bits DEC 32 bits DDEC

Execution

condition

Normally ON/OFF, rising/falling

edge

Suitable

Models

XC1.XC2.XC3.XC5.XCM

Hardware

requirement

- Software

requirement

-

2: Operands

Operands Function Data Type

D The number address 16 bits / 32bits,BIN

3: Suitable soft components

Word Operands System Constant Module

D FD ED TD CD DX DY DM DS K /H ID QD

D ● ● ● ● ● ●

Page 130: PLC Software MANUAL - Xinje-support-centre-listo. · PDF filePLC Software Manual Page 3 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2 3-14 [NOP], [END] 76 3-15 [GROUP], [GROUPE] 77 3-16 Programming Notes 78

PLC Software Manual Page 130 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2

< Increment [INC]>

INC D0X0

<Decrement [DEC]>

DEC D0X1

(D0)+1→(D0)

20. On every execution of the instruction the device specified as the

destination has its current value incremented (increased) by a

value of 1.

21. In 16 bits operation, when +32,767 is reached, the next increment will

write -32,767 to the destination device. In this case, there’s no

additional flag to identify this change in the counted value.

(D0)-1 →(D0)

23. On every execution of the instruction the device specified as the

destination has its current value decremented (decreased) by a

value of 1.

24. When -32,768 or -2,147,483,648 is reached, the next decrement

will write +32,767 or +2,147,483,647 to the destination device.

Description

Page 131: PLC Software MANUAL - Xinje-support-centre-listo. · PDF filePLC Software Manual Page 3 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2 3-14 [NOP], [END] 76 3-15 [GROUP], [GROUPE] 77 3-16 Programming Notes 78

PLC Software Manual Page 131 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2

4-6-6 Mean [MEAN]

1: Summary

Get the mean value of numbers

Mean [MEAN]

16 bits MEAN 32 bits DMEAN

Execution

condition

Normally ON/OFF, rising/falling

edge

Suitable

Models

XC1.XC2.XC3.XC5.XCM

Hardware

requirement

- Software

requirement

-

2: Operands

Operands Function Data Type

S The head address of the numbers 16 bits, BIN

D The mean result address 16 bits, BIN

n The number quantity 16 bits, BIN

3: Suitable soft components

(D0) + +

3(D10)

(D1) (D2)

Operands System Constant Module

D FD ED TD CD DX DY DM DS K /H ID QD

S ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

D ● ● ● ● ● ●

n ●

Word

MEAN D0 D10 K3

S· D·X0

n

25. The value of all the devices within the source range is summed and

then divided by the number of devices summed, i.e. n.. This generates

an integer mean value which is stored in the destination device (D) The

remainder of the calculated mean is ignored.

26. If the value of n is specified outside the stated range (1 to 64) an error is

generated.

Description

Page 132: PLC Software MANUAL - Xinje-support-centre-listo. · PDF filePLC Software Manual Page 3 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2 3-14 [NOP], [END] 76 3-15 [GROUP], [GROUPE] 77 3-16 Programming Notes 78

PLC Software Manual Page 132 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2

4-6-7 Logic AND [WAND], Logic OR[WOR], Logic Exclusive OR [WXOR]

1: Summary

Do logic AND, OR, XOR for numbers

Logic AND [WAND]

16 bits WAND 32 bits DWAND

Execution

condition

Normally ON/OFF, rising/falling

edge

Suitable

Models

XC1.XC2.XC3.XC5.XCM

Hardware

requirement

- Software

requirement

-

Logic OR[WOR]

16 bits WOR 32 bits DWOR

Execution

condition

Normally ON/OFF, rising/falling

edge

Suitable

Models

XC1.XC2.XC3.XC5.XCM

Hardware

requirement

- Software

requirement

-

Logic Exclusive OR [WXOR]

16 bits WXOR 32 bits DWXOR

Execution

condition

Normally ON/OFF, rising/falling

edge

Suitable

Models

XC1.XC2.XC3.XC5.XCM

Hardware

requirement

- Software

requirement

-

2: Operands

Operands Function Data Type

S1 The soft element address 16bit/32bit,BIN

S2 The soft element address 16bit/32bit,BIN

D The result address 16bit/32bit,BIN

3: Suitable soft components

Operands System Constant Module

D FD ED TD CD DX DY DM DS K /H ID QD

S1 ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

S2 ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

D ● ● ● ● ● ●

Word

Page 133: PLC Software MANUAL - Xinje-support-centre-listo. · PDF filePLC Software Manual Page 3 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2 3-14 [NOP], [END] 76 3-15 [GROUP], [GROUPE] 77 3-16 Programming Notes 78

PLC Software Manual Page 133 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2

< Execute logic AND operation with each bit>

WAND D10 D12 D14

D·X0

S1· S2·

< Execute logic OR operation with each bit >

WOR D10 D12 D14

D·X0

S1· S2·

< Execute logic Exclusive OR operation with each bit >

WXOR D10 D12 D14

D·X0

S1· S2·

If use this instruction along with CML instruction, XOR NOT operation

could also be executed.

WXOR D10 D12 D14

D·X0

S1· S2·

CML D14 D14

0&0=0 0&1=0

1&0=0 1&1=1

0 or 0=0 0 or 1=1

1 or 0=1 1 or 1=1

0 xor 0=0 0 xor 1=1

1 xor 0=1 1 xor 1=0

Description

Page 134: PLC Software MANUAL - Xinje-support-centre-listo. · PDF filePLC Software Manual Page 3 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2 3-14 [NOP], [END] 76 3-15 [GROUP], [GROUPE] 77 3-16 Programming Notes 78

PLC Software Manual Page 134 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2

4-6-8 Converse [CML]

1: Summary

Converse the phase of the numbers

Converse [CML]

16 bits CML 32 bits DCML

Execution

condition

Normally ON/OFF, rising/falling

edge

Suitable

Models

XC1.XC2.XC3.XC5.XCM

Hardware

requirement

- Software

requirement

-

2: Operands

Operands Function Data Type

S Source number address 16 bits/32 bits, BIN

D Result address 16 bits/32 bits, BIN

3: Suitable soft components

Word Operands System Constant Module

D FD ED TD CD DX DY DM DS K /H ID QD

S1 ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

D ● ● ● ● ● ●

Page 135: PLC Software MANUAL - Xinje-support-centre-listo. · PDF filePLC Software Manual Page 3 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2 3-14 [NOP], [END] 76 3-15 [GROUP], [GROUPE] 77 3-16 Programming Notes 78

PLC Software Manual Page 135 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2

CML D0 DY0

S· D·M0↑

0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1

1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0

D0

Y17 Y7 Y6 Y5 Y4

Si gn bi t

(0=posi t i ve,1=negat i ve)

< Reading of inverted input >

M0

M1

M2

M3

M17

CML DX0 DM0M8000

X0

X1

X2

X3

X17

27. Each data bit in the source device is inverted (1→0,0→1) and sent to the

destination device. If use constant K in the source device, it can be auto

convert to be binary.

28. It’s available when you want to inverted output the PLC’s output

The sequential control instruction in

the left could be denoted by the

following CML instruction.

Description

Page 136: PLC Software MANUAL - Xinje-support-centre-listo. · PDF filePLC Software Manual Page 3 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2 3-14 [NOP], [END] 76 3-15 [GROUP], [GROUPE] 77 3-16 Programming Notes 78

PLC Software Manual Page 136 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2

4-6-9 Negative [NEG]

1: Summary

Get the negative number

Negative [NEG]

16 bits NEG 32 bits DNEG

Execution

condition

Normally ON/OFF, rising/falling

edge

Suitable

Models

XC1.XC2.XC3.XC5.XCM

Hardware

requirement

- Software

requirement

-

2: Operands

Operands Function Data Type

D The source number address 16 bits/ bits, BIN

3: Suitable soft components

NEG D10 (D10) +1 (D10)M0

Operands System Constant Module

D FD ED TD CD DX DY DM DS K /H ID QD

D ● ● ● ● ● ●

Word

29. The bit format of the selected device is inverted, I.e. any

occurrence of a “1’ becomes a “0” and any occurrence of “0”

becomes “1”, when this is complete, a further binary 1 is added to

the bit format. The result is the total logic sigh change of the

selected devices contents.

Description

Page 137: PLC Software MANUAL - Xinje-support-centre-listo. · PDF filePLC Software Manual Page 3 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2 3-14 [NOP], [END] 76 3-15 [GROUP], [GROUPE] 77 3-16 Programming Notes 78

PLC Software Manual Page 137 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2

4-7 Shift Instructions

Mnemonic Function Chapter

SHL Arithmetic shift left 4-7-1

SHR Arithmetic shift right 4-7-1

LSL Logic shift left 4-7-2

LSR Logic shift right 4-7-2

ROL Rotation left 4-7-3

ROR Rotation right 4-7-3

SFTL Bit shift left 4-7-4

SFTR Bit shift right 4-7-5

WSFL Word shift left 4-7-6

WSFR Word shift right 4-7-7

Page 138: PLC Software MANUAL - Xinje-support-centre-listo. · PDF filePLC Software Manual Page 3 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2 3-14 [NOP], [END] 76 3-15 [GROUP], [GROUPE] 77 3-16 Programming Notes 78

PLC Software Manual Page 138 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2

4-7-1 Arithmetic shift left [SHL], Arithmetic shift right [SHR]

1: Summary

Do arithmetic shift left/right for the numbers

Arithmetic shift left [SHL]

16 bits SHL 32 bits DSHL

Execution

condition

Normally ON/OFF, rising/falling

edge

Suitable

Models

XC2.XC3.XC5.XCM

Hardware

requirement

- Software

requirement

-

Arithmetic shift right [SHR]

16 bits SHR 32 bits DSHR

Execution

condition

Normally ON/OFF, rising/falling

edge

Suitable

Models

XC2.XC3.XC5.XCM

Hardware

requirement

- Software

requirement

-

2: Operands

Operands Function Data Type

D The source data address 16bit/32bit,BIN

n Shift left or right times 16bit/32bit,BIN

3: Suitable soft components

Operands System Constant Module

D FD ED TD CD DX DY DM DS K /H ID QD

D ● ● ● ● ● ●

n ●

Word

Page 139: PLC Software MANUAL - Xinje-support-centre-listo. · PDF filePLC Software Manual Page 3 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2 3-14 [NOP], [END] 76 3-15 [GROUP], [GROUPE] 77 3-16 Programming Notes 78

PLC Software Manual Page 139 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2

< Arithmetic shift left > < Arithmetic shift right >

After once execution, the low bit is filled in 0, the final bit is stored

in carry flag.

After once execution, the high bit is same with the bit before

shifting, the final bit is stored in carry flag.

Description

Page 140: PLC Software MANUAL - Xinje-support-centre-listo. · PDF filePLC Software Manual Page 3 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2 3-14 [NOP], [END] 76 3-15 [GROUP], [GROUPE] 77 3-16 Programming Notes 78

PLC Software Manual Page 140 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2

4-7-2 Logic shift left [LSL] , Logic shift right [LSR]

1: Summary

Do logic shift right/left for the numbers

Logic shift left [LSL]

16 bits LSL 32 bits DLSL

Execution

condition

Normally ON/OFF, rising/falling

edge

Suitable

Models

XC2.XC3.XC5.XCM

Hardware

requirement

- Software

requirement

-

Logic shift right [LSR]

16 bits LSR 32 bits DLSR

Execution

condition

Normally ON/OFF, rising/falling

edge

Suitable

Models

XC2.XC3.XC5.XCM

Hardware

requirement

- Software

requirement

-

2. Operands

Operands Function Data Type

D Source data address 16 bits/32 bits, BIN

n Arithmetic shift left/right times 16 bits/32bits, BIN

3. Suitable soft components

Operands System Constant Module

D FD ED TD CD DX DY DM DS K /H ID QD

D ● ● ● ● ● ●

n ●

Word

Page 141: PLC Software MANUAL - Xinje-support-centre-listo. · PDF filePLC Software Manual Page 3 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2 3-14 [NOP], [END] 76 3-15 [GROUP], [GROUPE] 77 3-16 Programming Notes 78

PLC Software Manual Page 141 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2

LSR and SHR is different, LSR add 0 in high bit when moving, SHR all bits are moved.

< Logic shift left > < Logic shift right >

After once execution, the low bit is filled in 0, the final bit is stored in

carry flag.

LSL meaning and operation are the same as SHL.

After once execution, the high bit is same with the bit before shifting,

the final bit is stored in carry flag。

Description

Page 142: PLC Software MANUAL - Xinje-support-centre-listo. · PDF filePLC Software Manual Page 3 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2 3-14 [NOP], [END] 76 3-15 [GROUP], [GROUPE] 77 3-16 Programming Notes 78

PLC Software Manual Page 142 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2

4-7-3.Rotation shift left [ROL] , Rotation shift right [ROR]

1: Summary

Continue and cycle shift left or right

Rotation shift left [ROL]

16 bits ROL 32 bits DROL

Execution

condition

Normally ON/OFF, rising/falling

edge

Suitable

Models

XC2.XC3.XC5.XCM

Hardware

requirement

- Software

requirement

-

Rotation shift right [ROR]

16 bits ROR 32 bits DROR

Execution

condition

Normally ON/OFF, rising/falling

edge

Suitable

Models

XC2.XC3.XC5.XCM

Hardware

requirement

- Software

requirement

-

2: Operands

Operands Function Data Type

D Source data address 16 bits/32 bits, BIN

n Shift right or left times 16 bits/32 bits, BIN

3: Suitable soft components

Operands System Constant Module

D FD ED TD CD DX DY DM DS K /H ID QD

D ● ● ● ● ● ●

n ●

Word

Page 143: PLC Software MANUAL - Xinje-support-centre-listo. · PDF filePLC Software Manual Page 3 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2 3-14 [NOP], [END] 76 3-15 [GROUP], [GROUPE] 77 3-16 Programming Notes 78

PLC Software Manual Page 143 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2

< Rotation shift left > < Rotation shift right >

The bit format of the destination device is rotated in bit places to the

left on every operation of the instruction.

Description

Page 144: PLC Software MANUAL - Xinje-support-centre-listo. · PDF filePLC Software Manual Page 3 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2 3-14 [NOP], [END] 76 3-15 [GROUP], [GROUPE] 77 3-16 Programming Notes 78

PLC Software Manual Page 144 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2

4-7-4 Bit shift left [SFTL]

1: Summary

Bit shift left

Bit shift left [SFTL]

16 bits SFTL 32 bits DSFTL

Execution

condition

Normally ON/OFF, rising/falling

edge

Suitable

Models

XC2.XC3.XC5.XCM

Hardware

requirement

- Software

requirement

-

2: Operands

Operands Function Types

S Source soft element head address bit

D Target soft element head address bit

n1 Source data quantity 16 bits /32 bits, BIN

n2 Shift left times 16 bits/32 bits, BIN

3. Suitable soft components

Word Operands System Constant Module

D FD ED TD CD DX DY DM DS K /H ID QD

n1 ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

n2 ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

Operands System

X Y M S T C Dn..m

S ● ● ● ● ● ●

D ● ● ● ● ●

Bit

Page 145: PLC Software MANUAL - Xinje-support-centre-listo. · PDF filePLC Software Manual Page 3 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2 3-14 [NOP], [END] 76 3-15 [GROUP], [GROUPE] 77 3-16 Programming Notes 78

PLC Software Manual Page 145 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2

(2) The instruction copies n2 source devices to a bit stack of length n1. For

every new addition of n2 bits, the existing data within the bit stack is shifted

n2 bits to the left/right. Any bit data moving to the position exceeding the n1

limit is diverted to an overflow area.

(3) In every scan cycle, loop shift left action will be executed

M15~M12→Overflow

M11~M 8→M15~M 12 M 7~M 4→M11~M8

M 3~M 0→M7~M4

X 3~X 0→M3~M0

Description

Page 146: PLC Software MANUAL - Xinje-support-centre-listo. · PDF filePLC Software Manual Page 3 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2 3-14 [NOP], [END] 76 3-15 [GROUP], [GROUPE] 77 3-16 Programming Notes 78

PLC Software Manual Page 146 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2

4-7-5 Bit shift right [SFTR]

1: Summary

Bit shift right

Bit shift right [SFTR]

16 bits SFTR 32 bits DSFTR

Execution

condition

rising/falling edge Suitable

Models

XC2.XC3.XC5.XCM

Hardware

requirement

- Software

requirement

-

2: Operands

Operands Function Data Type

S Source soft element head address bit

D Target soft element head address bit

n1 Source data quantity 16 bits/32 bits, BIN

n2 Shift right times 16 bits/32 bits, BIN

3: Suitable soft components

Operands System Constant Module

D FD ED TD CD DX DY DM DS K /H ID QD

n1 ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

n2 ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

Word

Bit Operands System

X Y M S T C Dn..m

S ● ● ● ● ● ●

D ● ● ● ● ●

Page 147: PLC Software MANUAL - Xinje-support-centre-listo. · PDF filePLC Software Manual Page 3 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2 3-14 [NOP], [END] 76 3-15 [GROUP], [GROUPE] 77 3-16 Programming Notes 78

PLC Software Manual Page 147 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2

(4) The instruction copies n2 source devices to a bit stack of length n1.

For every new addition of n2 bits, the existing data within the bit stack

is shifted n2 bits to the left/right. Any bit data moving to the position

exceeding the n1 limit is diverted to an overflow area.

(5) In every scan cycle, loop shift right action will be executed

① M 3~M 0→Overflow

② M 7~M 4→M3~M0

③ M11~M 8→M7~M4

④ M15~M12→M11~M8

⑤ X 3~X 0→M15~M12

Description

Page 148: PLC Software MANUAL - Xinje-support-centre-listo. · PDF filePLC Software Manual Page 3 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2 3-14 [NOP], [END] 76 3-15 [GROUP], [GROUPE] 77 3-16 Programming Notes 78

PLC Software Manual Page 148 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2

4-7-6 Word shift left [WSFL]

1: Summary

Word shift left

Word shift left [ [WSFL]

16 bits WSFL 32 bits -

Execution

condition

rising/falling edge Suitable

Models

XC2.XC3.XC5.XCM

Hardware

requirement

- Software

requirement

-

2: Operands

Operands Function Data Type

S Source soft element head address 16 bits/32 bits, BIN

D Target soft element head address 16 bits /32 bits, BIN

n1 Source data quantity 16 bits /32 bits, BIN

n2 Word shift left times 16 bits /32 bits, BIN

3: Suitable soft components

Operands System Constant Module

D FD ED TD CD DX DY DM DS K /H ID QD

S ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

D ● ● ● ● ● ●

n1 ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

n2 ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

Word

Page 149: PLC Software MANUAL - Xinje-support-centre-listo. · PDF filePLC Software Manual Page 3 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2 3-14 [NOP], [END] 76 3-15 [GROUP], [GROUPE] 77 3-16 Programming Notes 78

PLC Software Manual Page 149 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2

n2 word shift left

The instruction copies n2 source devices to a word stack of length

n1. For each addition of n2 words, the existing data within the word

stack is shifted n2 words to the left. Any word data moving to a

position exceeding the n1 limit is diverted to an overflow area.

In every scan cycle, loop shift left action will be executed.

① D25~D22→Overflow

② D21~D18→D25~D22 ③ D17~D14→D21~D18 ④ D13~D10→D17~D14 ⑤ D 3~D 0→D13~D10

Description

Page 150: PLC Software MANUAL - Xinje-support-centre-listo. · PDF filePLC Software Manual Page 3 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2 3-14 [NOP], [END] 76 3-15 [GROUP], [GROUPE] 77 3-16 Programming Notes 78

PLC Software Manual Page 150 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2

4-7-7 Word shift right[WSFR]

1: Summary

Word shift right

Word shift right [WSFR]

16 bits WSFR 32 bits -

Execution

condition

rising/falling edge Suitable

Models

XC2.XC3.XC5.XCM

Hardware

requirement

- Software

requirement

-

2: Operands

Operands Function Data Type

S Source soft element head address 16 bits/32 bits, BIN

D Target soft element head address 16 bits/32 bits, BIN

n1 Source data quantity 16 bits/32 bits, BIN

n2 Shift right times 16 bits/32 bits, BIN

3: Suitable soft components

Operands System Constant Module

D FD ED TD CD DX DY DM DS K /H ID QD

S ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

D ● ● ● ● ● ●

n1 ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

n2 ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

Word

Page 151: PLC Software MANUAL - Xinje-support-centre-listo. · PDF filePLC Software Manual Page 3 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2 3-14 [NOP], [END] 76 3-15 [GROUP], [GROUPE] 77 3-16 Programming Notes 78

PLC Software Manual Page 151 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2

n2 字右移

The instruction copies n2 source devices to a word stack of length

n1. For each addition of n2 words, the existing data within the word

stack is shifted n2 words to the right. Any word data moving to a

position exceeding the n1 limit is diverted to an overflow area.

① D13~D10→Overflow

② D17~D14→D13~D10

③ D21~D18→D17~D14

④ D25~D22→D21~D18

⑤ D 3~D 0→D25~D22

In every scan cycle, loop shift right action will be executed

Description

Page 152: PLC Software MANUAL - Xinje-support-centre-listo. · PDF filePLC Software Manual Page 3 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2 3-14 [NOP], [END] 76 3-15 [GROUP], [GROUPE] 77 3-16 Programming Notes 78

PLC Software Manual Page 152 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2

4-8 Data Convert

Mnemonic Function Chapter

WTD Single word integer converts to double

word integer 4-8-1

FLT 16 bits integer converts to float point 4-8-2

DFLT 32 bits integer converts to float point 4-8-2

FLTD 64 bits integer converts to float point 4-8-2

INT Float point converts to integer 4-8-3

BIN BCD convert to binary 4-8-4

BCD Binary converts to BCD 4-8-5

ASCI Hex. converts to ASCII 4-8-6

HEX ASCII converts to Hex. 4-8-7

DECO Coding 4-8-8

ENCO High bit coding 4-8-9

ENCOL Low bit coding 4-8-10

Page 153: PLC Software MANUAL - Xinje-support-centre-listo. · PDF filePLC Software Manual Page 3 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2 3-14 [NOP], [END] 76 3-15 [GROUP], [GROUPE] 77 3-16 Programming Notes 78

PLC Software Manual Page 153 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2

4-8-1 Single word integer converts to double word integer [WTD]

1: Summary

Single word integer converts to double word integer [WTD]

16 bits WTD 32 bits -

Execution

condition

Normally ON/OFF, rising/falling

edge

Suitable

Models

XC2.XC3.XC5.XCM

Hardware

requirement

- Software

requirement

-

2: Operands

Operands Function Data Type

S Source soft element address 16 bits, BIN

D Target soft element address 32 bits, BIN

3: Suitable soft components

WTD D0 D10X0

S· D·

High bits Low bits

D11 D10

0 or 1 D0

Operands System Constant Module

D FD ED TD CD DX DY DM DS K /H ID QD

S ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

D ● ● ● ● ● ●

Word

(D0) → (D11,D10)

When single word D0 is positive integer, after executing this

instruction, the high bit of double word D10 is 0.

When single word D0 is negative integer, after executing this

instruction, the high bit of double word D10 is 1.

Description

Page 154: PLC Software MANUAL - Xinje-support-centre-listo. · PDF filePLC Software Manual Page 3 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2 3-14 [NOP], [END] 76 3-15 [GROUP], [GROUPE] 77 3-16 Programming Notes 78

PLC Software Manual Page 154 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2

4-8-2 16 bits integer converts to float point [FLT]

1: Summary

16 bits integer converts to float point [FLT]

16 bits FLT 32 bits DFLT 64 bits FLTD

Execution

condition

Normally ON/OFF, rising/falling

edge

Suitable

Models

XC2.XC3.XC5.XCM

Hardware

requirement

- Software

requirement

-

2: Operands

Operands Function Data Type

S Source soft element address 16 bits/32 bits/64 bits,BIN

D Target soft element address 32 bits/64 bits,BIN

3: Suitable soft components

<16 bits>

<32 bits >

DFLT D10 D12

S· D·X0

<64 bits>

FLTD D10 D14

S· D·X0

Operands System Constant Module

D FD ED TD CD DX DY DM DS K /H ID QD

S ● ● ●

D ●

Word

(D10) → (D13,D12) FLT D10 D12

S· D·X0

(D11,D10)→ (D13,D12)

(D13,D12,D11,D10)→ (D17,D16,D15,D14)

Convert BIN integer to binary float point. As the constant K ,H will auto convert by

the float operation instruction, so this FLT instruction can’t be used.

The instruction is contrary to INT instruction

Description

Page 155: PLC Software MANUAL - Xinje-support-centre-listo. · PDF filePLC Software Manual Page 3 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2 3-14 [NOP], [END] 76 3-15 [GROUP], [GROUPE] 77 3-16 Programming Notes 78

PLC Software Manual Page 155 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2

4-8-3 Float point converts to integer [INT]

1: Summary

Float point converts to integer [INT]

16 bits INT 32 bits DINT

Execution

condition

Normally ON/OFF, rising/falling

edge

Suitable

Models

XC2.XC3.XC5.XCM

Hardware

requirement

- Software

requirement

-

2: Operands

Operands Function Data Type

S Source soft element address 16 bits/32 bits, BIN

D Target soft element address 16 bits/32 bits, BIN

3: Suitable soft components

<16 bits>

INT D10 D20

S· D·X0

<32 bits>

DINT D10 D20

S· D·X0

Operands System Constant Module

D FD ED TD CD DX DY DM DS K /H ID QD

S ● ●

D ●

Word

(D11,D10) → (D20)

Binary Float BIN integer

(D11,D10) → (D20,D21)

Binary Float BIN integer

The binary source number is converted into a BIN integer and stored at the

destination device. Abandon the value behind the decimal point.

This instruction is contrary to FLT instruction.

When the result is 0, the flag bit is ON

When converting, less than 1 and abandon it, zero flag is ON.

The result is over below data, the carry flag is ON.

16 bits operation: -32,768~32,767

32 bits operation: -2,147,483,648~2,147,483,647

Description

Page 156: PLC Software MANUAL - Xinje-support-centre-listo. · PDF filePLC Software Manual Page 3 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2 3-14 [NOP], [END] 76 3-15 [GROUP], [GROUPE] 77 3-16 Programming Notes 78

PLC Software Manual Page 156 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2

4-8-4 BCD convert to binary [BIN]

1: Summary

BCD convert to binary [BIN]

16 bits BIN 32 bits -

Execution

condition

Normally ON/OFF, rising/falling

edge

Suitable

Models

XC2.XC3.XC5.XCM

Hardware

requirement

- Software

requirement

-

2: Operands

Operands Function Data Type

S Source soft element address BCD

D Target soft element address 16 bits/32 bits, BIN

3: Suitable soft components

BIN D10 D0

S· D·X0

Operands System Constant Module

D FD ED TD CD DX DY DM DS K /H ID QD

S ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

D ● ● ● ● ● ●

Word

Convert and move instruction of Source (BCD) → destination (BIN)

When source data is not BCD code, M8067(Operation error), M8004 (error occurs)

As constant K automatically converts to binary, so it’s not suitable for this

instruction.

Description

Page 157: PLC Software MANUAL - Xinje-support-centre-listo. · PDF filePLC Software Manual Page 3 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2 3-14 [NOP], [END] 76 3-15 [GROUP], [GROUPE] 77 3-16 Programming Notes 78

PLC Software Manual Page 157 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2

4-8-5 Binary convert to BCD [BCD]

1: Summary

Binary convert to BCD [BCD]

16 bits BCD 32 bits -

Execution

condition

Normally ON/OFF, rising/falling

edge

Suitable

Models

XC2.XC3.XC5.XCM

Hardware

requirement

- Software

requirement

-

2: Operands

Operands Function Data Type

S Source soft element address 16 bits/32 bits, BIN

D Target soft element address BCD code

3: Suitable soft components

BCD D10 D0

S· D·X0

Operands System Constant Module

D FD ED TD CD DX DY DM DS K /H ID QD

S ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

D ● ● ● ● ● ●

Word

Convert and move instruction of source (BIN)→destination (BCD)

This instruction can be used to output data directly to a seven-segment

display.

Description

Page 158: PLC Software MANUAL - Xinje-support-centre-listo. · PDF filePLC Software Manual Page 3 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2 3-14 [NOP], [END] 76 3-15 [GROUP], [GROUPE] 77 3-16 Programming Notes 78

PLC Software Manual Page 158 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2

4-8-6 Hex. converts to ASCII [ASCI]

1: Summary

Hex. convert to ASCII [ASCI]

16 bits ASCI 32 bits -

Execution

condition

Normally ON/OFF, rising/falling

edge

Suitable

Models

XC2.XC3.XC5.XCM

Hardware

requirement

- Software

requirement

-

2: Operands

Operands Function Data Type

S Source soft element address 2 bits, HEX

D Target soft element address ASCII code

n Transform character quantity 16 bits, BIN

3: Suitable soft components

Operands System Constant Module

D FD ED TD CD DX DY DM DS K /H ID QD

S ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

D ● ● ● ● ● ●

n ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

Word

Page 159: PLC Software MANUAL - Xinje-support-centre-listo. · PDF filePLC Software Manual Page 3 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2 3-14 [NOP], [END] 76 3-15 [GROUP], [GROUPE] 77 3-16 Programming Notes 78

PLC Software Manual Page 159 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2

ASCI D100 D200 K4

S· D· nX0

The converted result is this

n

D K1 K2 K3 K4 K5 K6 K7 K8 K9

D200 down [C] [B] [A] [0] [4] [3] [2] [1] [8]

D200 up [C] [B] [A] [0] [4] [3] [2] [1]

D201 down [C] [B] [A] [0] [4] [3] [2]

D201 up [C] [B] [A] [0] [4] [3]

D202 down [C] [B] [A] [0] [4]

D202 up [C] [B] [A] [0]

D203 down [C] [B] [A]

D203 up [C] [B]

D204 down [C]

D·S· Convert each bit of source’s (S) Hex. format data to be ASCII code, move separately to

the high 8 bits and low 8 bits of destination (D). The convert alphanumeric number is

assigned with n.

is low 8 bits, high 8 bits, store ASCII data. D·

Assign start device:

(D100)=0ABCH

(D101)=1234H

[0]=30H [1]=31H

[5]=35H [A]=41H

[2]=32H [6]=36H

[B]=42H [3]=33H

[7]=37H [C]=43H

[4]=34H [8]=38H

Description

Page 160: PLC Software MANUAL - Xinje-support-centre-listo. · PDF filePLC Software Manual Page 3 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2 3-14 [NOP], [END] 76 3-15 [GROUP], [GROUPE] 77 3-16 Programming Notes 78

PLC Software Manual Page 160 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2

4-8-7 ASCII convert to Hex.[HEX]

1: Summary

ASCII converts to Hex. [HEX]

16 bits HEX 32 bits -

Execution

condition

Normally ON/OFF, rising/falling

edge

Suitable

Models

XC2.XC3.XC5.XCM

Hardware

requirement

- Software

requirement

-

2: Operands

Operands

Function Date type

S Source soft element address ASCII

D Target soft element address 2 bits, HEX

n Character quantity 16 bits, BIN

3: Suitable soft components

Operands System Constant Module

D FD ED TD CD DX DY DM DS K /H ID QD

S ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

D ● ● ● ● ● ●

n ●

Word

Page 161: PLC Software MANUAL - Xinje-support-centre-listo. · PDF filePLC Software Manual Page 3 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2 3-14 [NOP], [END] 76 3-15 [GROUP], [GROUPE] 77 3-16 Programming Notes 78

PLC Software Manual Page 161 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2

HEX D200 D100 K4

S· D· nX0

The completed conversion of the above program is the following:

n=k4

0 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0D200

41H? [A] 30H? [0]

0 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 1 0D201

43H? [C] 42H? [B]

0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 1 1 1 0 0D100

0 A B C

Convert the high and low 8 bits in source to HEX data. Move 4 bits

every time to destination . The convert alphanumeric number is

assigned by n.

(S·)

ASCII

Code

HEX

Convert

D200

down

30H 0

D200 up 41H A

D201

down

42H B

D201 up 43H C

D202

down

31H 1

D202 up 32H 2

n (D·) D102 D101 D100

1

Not change to

be 0

···0H

2 ··0AH

3 ·0ABH

4 0ABC

H

5 ···0H ABC1

H

6 ··0AH BC12H

7 ·0ABH C123H

Description

Page 162: PLC Software MANUAL - Xinje-support-centre-listo. · PDF filePLC Software Manual Page 3 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2 3-14 [NOP], [END] 76 3-15 [GROUP], [GROUPE] 77 3-16 Programming Notes 78

PLC Software Manual Page 162 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2

4-8-8 Coding [DECO]

1: Summary

Transform the ASCII code to Hex numbers.

Coding [DECO]

16 bits DECO s -

Execution

condition

Normally ON/OFF, rising/falling

edge

Suitable

Models

XC2.XC3.XC5.XCM

Hardware

requirement

- Software

requirement

-

2: Operands

Operands Function Data Type

S Source soft element address ASCII

D Target soft element address 2 bits HEX

n The coding soft element quantity 16bits, BIN

3: Suitable soft components

Operands System Constant Module

D FD ED TD CD DX DY DM DS K /H ID QD

S ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

n ●

Word

Operands System

X Y M S T C Dn.m

D ● ● ● ● ● ●

Bit

Page 163: PLC Software MANUAL - Xinje-support-centre-listo. · PDF filePLC Software Manual Page 3 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2 3-14 [NOP], [END] 76 3-15 [GROUP], [GROUPE] 77 3-16 Programming Notes 78

PLC Software Manual Page 163 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2

② ①

全部转化为 0 ③

①②

< When is bit unit > n≤16

DX0DECO M10 K3X10

nS· D·

0 1 1

0 0 0 1 0 0 0

X002 X001 X000

M17 M16 M15 M14 M13 M12 M11 M10

7 6 5 4 2 1 0

4

0

< When is word device > n≤4

D0DECO D1 K3X0

nS· D·

The source address is 1+2=3,starts from M10, the number 3 bit

(M13) is 1. If the source are all 0, M10 is 1.

When n=0, no operation, beyond n=0~16, don’t execute the

instruction.

When n=16, if coding command is soft unit, it’s point is

2^16=65536.

When drive input is OFF, instructions are not executed, the activate

coding output keep on activate.

Low n bits(n≤4) of source address is decoded to target address. n≤3,

the high bit of target address all become 0.

When n=0, no operation, beyond n=0~14, don’t execute the

instruction.

Description

Page 164: PLC Software MANUAL - Xinje-support-centre-listo. · PDF filePLC Software Manual Page 3 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2 3-14 [NOP], [END] 76 3-15 [GROUP], [GROUPE] 77 3-16 Programming Notes 78

PLC Software Manual Page 164 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2

4-8-9 High bit coding [ENCO]

1: Summary

Transform the ASCII code to hex numbers

High bit coding [ENCO]

16 bits ENCO 32 bits -

Execution

condition

Normally ON/OFF, rising/falling

edge

Suitable

Models

XC2.XC3.XC5.XCM

Hardware

requirement

- Software

requirement

-

2: Operands

Operands Function Data Type

S data address need coding 16 bits, BIN; bit

D Coding result address 16 bits, BIN

n soft element quantity to save result 16 bits, BIN

3: Suitable soft components

Operands System Constant Module

D FD ED TD CD DX DY DM DS K /H ID QD

S ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

D ● ● ● ● ● ●

n ●

Word

Operands System

X Y M S T C Dn..m

S ● ● ● ● ● ●

Bit

Page 165: PLC Software MANUAL - Xinje-support-centre-listo. · PDF filePLC Software Manual Page 3 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2 3-14 [NOP], [END] 76 3-15 [GROUP], [GROUPE] 77 3-16 Programming Notes 78

PLC Software Manual Page 165 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2

All be 0

② ①

被忽视

All be 0

①②

< When is bit device > n≤16

M10ENCO D10 K3X0

nS· D·

0 0 0 1 0 1 0

M17 M16 M15 M14 M13 M12 M11 M10

7 6 5 4 2 1 0

0

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1

D10b15

b0

4

< When is word device > n≤4

D0ENCO D1 K3X1

nS· D·

0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1

7 6 5 4 2 1 0

D0

D1b15

b15 b0

b0

4

If many bits in the source ID are 1, ignore the low bits. If source ID are all 0, don’t execute

the instructions.

When drive input is OFF, the instruction is not executed, encode output doesn’t change.

When n=8, if encode instruction’s “S” is bit unit, it’s point number is 2^8=256

Description

Page 166: PLC Software MANUAL - Xinje-support-centre-listo. · PDF filePLC Software Manual Page 3 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2 3-14 [NOP], [END] 76 3-15 [GROUP], [GROUPE] 77 3-16 Programming Notes 78

PLC Software Manual Page 166 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2

4-8-10 Low bit coding [ENCOL]

1: Summary

Transform the ASCII to hex numbers.

Low bit coding [ENCOL]

16 bits ENCOL 32 bits -

Execution

condition

Normally ON/OFF, rising/falling

edge

Suitable

Models

XC2.XC3.XC5.XCM

Hardware

requirement

- Software

requirement

-

2: Operands

Operands Function Data Type

S Soft element address need coding 16bit,BIN;bit

D Soft element address to save coding result 16bit,BIN

n The soft element quantity to save result 16bit,BIN

3: Suitable soft components

Operands System Constant Module

D FD ED TD CD DX DY DM DS K /H ID QD

S ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

D ● ● ● ● ● ●

n ●

Word

Operands System

X Y M S T C Dn.m

S ● ● ● ● ● ●

Bit

Page 167: PLC Software MANUAL - Xinje-support-centre-listo. · PDF filePLC Software Manual Page 3 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2 3-14 [NOP], [END] 76 3-15 [GROUP], [GROUPE] 77 3-16 Programming Notes 78

PLC Software Manual Page 167 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2

All be 0

② ①

被忽视

All be 0

①②

<if is bit device > n≤16

M10ENCOL D10 K3X0

nS· D·

0 1 0 1 0 0 0

M17 M16 M15 M14 M13 M12 M11 M10

7 6 5 4 2 1 0

0

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1

D10b15

b0

4

< if is word device> n≤4

D0ENCOL D1 K3X1

nS· D·

0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 0

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1

7 6 5 4 2 1 0

D0

D1b15

b15 b0

b0

4

If many bits in the source ID are 1, ignore the high bits. If source ID are all 0,

don’t execute the instructions。

When drive input is OFF, the instruction is not executed, encode output don’t

change

When n=8, if encode instruction’s is bit unit, it’s point number is 2^8=256 S·

Description

Page 168: PLC Software MANUAL - Xinje-support-centre-listo. · PDF filePLC Software Manual Page 3 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2 3-14 [NOP], [END] 76 3-15 [GROUP], [GROUPE] 77 3-16 Programming Notes 78

PLC Software Manual Page 168 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2

4-9 Floating Operation

Mnemonic Function Chapter

ECMP Float Compare 4-9-1

EZCP Float Zone Compare 4-9-2

EADD Float Add 4-9-3

ESUB Float Subtract 4-9-4

EMUL Float Multiplication 4-9-5

EDIV Float Division 4-9-6

ESQR Float Square Root 4-9-7

SIN Sine 4-9-8

COS Cosine 4-9-9

TAN Tangent 4-9-10

ASIN ASIN 4-9-11

ACOS ACOS 4-9-12

ATAN ATAN 4-9-13

Page 169: PLC Software MANUAL - Xinje-support-centre-listo. · PDF filePLC Software Manual Page 3 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2 3-14 [NOP], [END] 76 3-15 [GROUP], [GROUPE] 77 3-16 Programming Notes 78

PLC Software Manual Page 169 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2

4-9-1 Float Compare [ECMP]

1: Summary

Float Compare [ECMP]

16 bits - 32 bits ECMP

Execution

condition

Normally ON/OFF, rising/falling

edge

Suitable

Models

XC2.XC3.XC5.XCM

Hardware

requirement

- Software

requirement

-

2: Operands

Operands Function Data Type

S1 Soft element address need compare 32 bits, BIN

S2 Soft element address need compare 32 bits, BIN

D Compare result bit

3: Suitable soft components

Operands System Constant Module

D FD ED TD CD DX DY DM DS K /H ID QD

S1 ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

S2 ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

Word

Operands System

X Y M S T C Dn.m

D ● ● ●

Bit

Page 170: PLC Software MANUAL - Xinje-support-centre-listo. · PDF filePLC Software Manual Page 3 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2 3-14 [NOP], [END] 76 3-15 [GROUP], [GROUPE] 77 3-16 Programming Notes 78

PLC Software Manual Page 170 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2

ECMP D10 D20 M0

M0

M1

M2

X0D·S1· S2·

ECMP K500 D100 M10X0

(D11,D10) : (D21,D20)→ M0,M1,M2

(D11,D10) > (D21<D20)

Binary Floating Binary Floating

(D11,D10) = (D21<D20)

Binary Floating Binary Floating

(D11,D10) < (D21<D20)

Binary Floating Binary Floating

The status of the destination device will be kept even if the ECMP

instruction is deactivated.

The binary float data of S1 is compared to S2. The result is indicated by 3 bit

devices specified with the head address entered as D

If a constant K or H used as source data, the value is converted to floating point

before the addition operation.

(K500): (D101,D100)→M10,M11,M12

Binary converts Binary floating

Description

Page 171: PLC Software MANUAL - Xinje-support-centre-listo. · PDF filePLC Software Manual Page 3 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2 3-14 [NOP], [END] 76 3-15 [GROUP], [GROUPE] 77 3-16 Programming Notes 78

PLC Software Manual Page 171 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2

4-9-2 Float Zone Compare [EZCP]

1: Summary

Float Zone Compare [EZCP]

16 bits - 32 bits EZCP

Execution

condition

Normally ON/OFF, rising/falling

edge

Suitable

Models

XC2.XC3.XC5.XCM

Hardware

requirement

- Software

requirement

-

2: Operands

Operands Function Data Type

S1 Soft element address need compare 32 bits, BIN

S2 Upper limit of compare data 32 bits, BIN

S3 Lower limit of compare data 32 bits, BIN

D The compare result soft element address bit

3: Suitable soft components

Operands System Constant Module

D FD ED TD CD DX DY DM DS K /H ID QD

S1 ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

S2 ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

S3 ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

Word

Operands System

X Y M S T C Dn..m

D ● ● ●

Bit

Page 172: PLC Software MANUAL - Xinje-support-centre-listo. · PDF filePLC Software Manual Page 3 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2 3-14 [NOP], [END] 76 3-15 [GROUP], [GROUPE] 77 3-16 Programming Notes 78

PLC Software Manual Page 172 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2

Compare a float range with a float value:

EZCP D10 D20 D0

M3

M4

M5

X0S1· S2·

M3

S3· D·

EZCP K10 K2800 D5 M0X0

(D1,D0) < (D11,D10) ON

Binary Floating Binary Floating

(D11,D10) ≤ (D1,D0 ) ≤(D21,D20) ON

Binary Floating Binary Floating Binary Floating

(D1,D0) > (D21,D20) ON

The status of the destination device will be kept even if the EZCP

instruction is deactivated.

The data of S1 is compared to the data of S2. The result is indicated by

3 bit devices specified with the head address entered as D.

If a constant K or H used as source data, the value is converted to

floating point before the addition operation.

(K10): [D6,D5]: (K2800)→ M0,M1,M2

Binary converts Binary Floating Binary converts

to Floating to Floating

Please set S1<S2, when S2>S1, see S2 as the same with S1 and compare them

Description

Page 173: PLC Software MANUAL - Xinje-support-centre-listo. · PDF filePLC Software Manual Page 3 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2 3-14 [NOP], [END] 76 3-15 [GROUP], [GROUPE] 77 3-16 Programming Notes 78

PLC Software Manual Page 173 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2

4-9-3 Float Add[EADD]

1: Summary

Float Add [EADD]

16 bits - 32 bits EADD

Execution

condition

Normally ON/OFF, rising/falling

edge

Suitable

Models

XC2.XC3.XC5.XCM

Hardware

requirement

- Software

requirement

-

2: Operands

Operands Function Data Type

S1 Soft element address need to add 32 bits, BIN

S2 Soft element address need to add 32 bits, BIN

D Result address 32 bits, BIN

3: Suitable soft components

Operands System Constant Module

D FD ED TD CD DX DY DM DS K /H ID QD

S1 ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

S2 ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

D ● ● ● ●

Word

Page 174: PLC Software MANUAL - Xinje-support-centre-listo. · PDF filePLC Software Manual Page 3 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2 3-14 [NOP], [END] 76 3-15 [GROUP], [GROUPE] 77 3-16 Programming Notes 78

PLC Software Manual Page 174 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2

EADD D10 D20 D50

S1· S2· D·X0

EADD D100 K1234 D110X1

(D11,D10) + (D21,D20) → (D51,D50)

Binary Floating Binary Floating Binary Floating

The floating point values stored in the source devices S1 and S2 are algebraically

added and the result stored in the destination device D.

If a constant K or H used as source data, the value is converted to floating point

before the addition operation.

(K1234) + ( D101,D100) → (D111,D110)

Binary converts to Floating Binary Floating Binary Floating

The same device may be used as a source and as the destination. If this is the

case then, on continuous operation of the EADD instruction, the result of the

previous operation will be used as a new source value and a new result calculated.

This will happen in every program scan unless the pulse modifier or an interlock

program is used.

Description

Page 175: PLC Software MANUAL - Xinje-support-centre-listo. · PDF filePLC Software Manual Page 3 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2 3-14 [NOP], [END] 76 3-15 [GROUP], [GROUPE] 77 3-16 Programming Notes 78

PLC Software Manual Page 175 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2

4-9-4 Float Sub[ESUB]

1: Summary

Float Sub [ESUB]

16 bits - 32 bits ESUB

Execution

condition

Normally ON/OFF, rising/falling

edge

Suitable

Models

XC2.XC3.XC5.XCM

Hardware

requirement

- Software

requirement

-

2: Operands

Operands Function Data Type

S1 Soft element address need to subtract 32 bits, BIN

S2 Soft element address need to subtract 32 bits, BIN

D Result address 32 bits, BIN

3: Suitable soft components

ESUB D10 D20 D50

S1· S2· D·X0

ESUB D100K1234 D110X1

Operands System Constant Module

D FD ED TD CD DX DY DM DS K /H ID QD

S1 ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

S2 ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

D ● ● ● ●

Word

Description

(D11,D10) - (D21,D20) → (D51,D50)

The floating point value of S2 is subtracted from the floating point value of S1 and the

result stored in destination device D.

If a constant K or H used as source data, the value is converted to floating point

before the addition operation.

(K1234) - (D101,D100) → (D111,D110)

The same device may be used as a source and as the destination. If this is the case

then, on continuous operation of the EADD instruction, the result of the previous

operation will be used as a new source value and a new result calculated. This will

happen in every program scan unless the pulse modifier or an interlock program is

Page 176: PLC Software MANUAL - Xinje-support-centre-listo. · PDF filePLC Software Manual Page 3 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2 3-14 [NOP], [END] 76 3-15 [GROUP], [GROUPE] 77 3-16 Programming Notes 78

PLC Software Manual Page 176 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2

4-9-5.Float Mul[EMUL]

1: Summary

Float Multiply [EMUL]

16 bits - 32 bits EMUL

Execution

condition

Normally ON/OFF, rising/falling

edge

Suitable

Models

XC2.XC3.XC5.XCM

Hardware

requirement

- Software

requirement

-

2: Operands

Operands Function Data Type

S1 Soft element address need to multiply 32 bits, BIN

S2 Soft element address need to multiply 32 bits, BIN

D Result address 32 bits, BIN

3: Suitable soft components

EMUL D10 D20 D50

S1· S2· D·X0

EMUL D100K100 D110X1

Operands System Constant Module

D FD ED TD CD DX DY DM DS K /H ID QD

S1 ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

S2 ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

D ● ● ● ●

Word

(D11,D10) × (D21,D20)→ (D51,D50)

The floating value of S1 is multiplied with the floating value point value of S2. The

result of the multiplication is stored at D as a floating value.

If a constant K or H used as source data, the value is converted to floating point

before the addition operation.

(K100) × (D101,D100) → (D111,D110)

Binary converts to Floating Binary Floating Binary Floating

Description

Page 177: PLC Software MANUAL - Xinje-support-centre-listo. · PDF filePLC Software Manual Page 3 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2 3-14 [NOP], [END] 76 3-15 [GROUP], [GROUPE] 77 3-16 Programming Notes 78

PLC Software Manual Page 177 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2

4-9-6 Float Div[EDIV] 1: Summary

Float Divide [EDIV]

16 bits - 32 bits EDIV

Execution

condition

Normally ON/OFF, rising/falling

edge

Suitable

Models

XC2.XC3.XC5.XCM

Hardware

requirement

- Software

requirement

-

2: Operands

Operands Function Data Type

S1 Soft element address need to divide 32 bits, BIN

S2 Soft element address need to divide 32 bits, BIN

D Result address 32 bits, BIN

3: Suitable soft components

EDIV D10 D20 D50

S1· S2· D·X0

EDIV D100 K100 D110X1

Operands System Constant Module

D FD ED TD CD DX DY DM DS K /H ID QD

S1 ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

S2 ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

D ● ● ● ●

word

(D11,D10) ÷ (D21,D20)→ (D51,D50)

The floating point value of S1 is divided by the floating point value of

S2. The result of the division is stored in D as a floating point value. No

remainder is calculated.

If a constant K or H used as source data, the value is converted to

floating point before the addition operation

(D101,D100) ÷ (K100) →(D111,D110)

Binary converts to Floating Binary Floating Binary Floating

NB: If S2 is 0, the calculate is error, the instruction can not work

Description

Page 178: PLC Software MANUAL - Xinje-support-centre-listo. · PDF filePLC Software Manual Page 3 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2 3-14 [NOP], [END] 76 3-15 [GROUP], [GROUPE] 77 3-16 Programming Notes 78

PLC Software Manual Page 178 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2

4-9-7 Float Square Root [ESQR]

1: Summary

Float Square Root [ESQR]

16 bits - 32 bits ESQR

Execution

condition

Normally ON/OFF, rising/falling

edge

Suitable

Models

XC2.XC3.XC5.XCM

Hardware

requirement

- Software

requirement

-

2: Operands

Operands Function Data Type

S The soft element address need to do square root 32 bits, BIN

D The result address 32 bits, BIN

3: Suitable soft components

ESQR D10 D20X0

S· D·

ESQR K1024 D110X1

Operands System Constant Module

D FD ED TD CD DX DY DM DS K /H ID QD

S ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

D ● ● ● ●

Word

(D11,D10) →(D21,D20)

A square root is performed on the floating point value in S the result is stored in D

If a constant K or H used as source data, the value is converted to floating point

before the addition operation.

(K1024) → (D111,D110)

Binary converts to Floating Binary Floating

When the result is zero, zero flag activates.

Only when the source data is positive will the operation be effective. If S is negative

then an error occurs and error flag M8067 is set ON, the instruction can’t be

executed.

Description

Page 179: PLC Software MANUAL - Xinje-support-centre-listo. · PDF filePLC Software Manual Page 3 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2 3-14 [NOP], [END] 76 3-15 [GROUP], [GROUPE] 77 3-16 Programming Notes 78

PLC Software Manual Page 179 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2

4-9-8 Sine[SIN]

1: Summary

Float Sine[SIN]

16 bits - 32 bits SIN

Execution

condition

Normally ON/OFF, rising/falling

edge

Suitable

Models

XC2.XC3.XC5.XCM

Hardware

requirement

- Software

requirement

-

2: Operands

Operands Function Data Type

S The soft element address need to do sine 32 bits, BIN

D The result address 32 bits, BIN

3: Suitable soft components

SIN D50 D60X0

S· D·

D51 D50

D61 D60

Operands System Constant Module

D FD ED TD CD DX DY DM DS K /H ID QD

S ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

D ● ● ● ●

Word

(D51,D50) → (D61,D60)SIN

Binary Floating Binary Floating

This instruction performs the mathematical SIN operation on the floating point value

in S (angle RAD). The result is stored in D.

RAD value (angle×π/180)

Assign the binary floating value

SIN value

Binary Floating

Description

Page 180: PLC Software MANUAL - Xinje-support-centre-listo. · PDF filePLC Software Manual Page 3 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2 3-14 [NOP], [END] 76 3-15 [GROUP], [GROUPE] 77 3-16 Programming Notes 78

PLC Software Manual Page 180 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2

4-9-9 Cosine[SIN]

1: Summary

Float Cosine[COS]

16 bits - 32 bits COS

Execution

condition

Normally ON/OFF, rising/falling

edge

Suitable

Models

XC2.XC3.XC5.XCM

Hardware

requirement

- Software

requirement

-

2: Operands

Operands Function Data Type

S Soft element address need to do cos 32 bits, BIN

D Result address 32 bits, BIN

3: Suitable soft components

COS D50 D60X0

S· D·

D51 D50

D61 D60

Operands System Constant Module

D FD ED TD CD DX DY DM DS K /H ID QD

S ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

D ● ● ● ●

Word

(D51,D50)RAD → (D61,D60)COS

Binary Floating Binary Floating

This instruction performs the mathematical COS operation on the floating point

value in S (angle RAD). The result is stored in D.

RAD value (angle×π/180)

Assign the binary floating value

COS value

Binary Floating

Description

Page 181: PLC Software MANUAL - Xinje-support-centre-listo. · PDF filePLC Software Manual Page 3 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2 3-14 [NOP], [END] 76 3-15 [GROUP], [GROUPE] 77 3-16 Programming Notes 78

PLC Software Manual Page 181 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2

4-9-10 TAN [TAN]

1: Summary

TAN [TAN]

16 bits - 32 bits TAN

Execution

condition

Normally ON/OFF, rising/falling

edge

Suitable

Models

XC2.XC3.XC5.XCM

Hardware

requirement

- Software

requirement

-

2: Operands

Operands Function Data Type

S Soft element address need to do tan 32bit,BIN

D Result address 32bit,BIN

3: Suitable soft components

TAN D50 D60X0

S· D·

D51 D50

D61 D60

Word Operands System Constant Module

D FD ED TD CD DX DY DM DS K /H ID QD

S ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

D ● ● ● ●

(D51,D50)RAD → (D61,D60)TAN

Binary Floating Binary Floating

This instruction performs the mathematical TAN operation on the floating point

value in S. The result is stored in D.

RAD value (angle×π/180)

Assign the binary floating value

TAN value

Binary Floating

Description

Page 182: PLC Software MANUAL - Xinje-support-centre-listo. · PDF filePLC Software Manual Page 3 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2 3-14 [NOP], [END] 76 3-15 [GROUP], [GROUPE] 77 3-16 Programming Notes 78

PLC Software Manual Page 182 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2

4-9-11 ASIN [ASIN]

1: Summary

ASIN [ASIN]

16 bits - 32 bits ASIN

Execution

condition

Normally ON/OFF, rising/falling

edge

Suitable

Models

XC2.XC3.XC5.XCM

Hardware

requirement

V3.0 and above version Software

requirement

-

2: Operands

Operands Function Data Type

S Soft element address need to do arcsin 32 bits, BIN

D Result address 32 bits, BIN

3: Suitable soft components

ASIN D50 D60X0

S· D·

D51 D50

D61 D60

Operands System Constant Module

D FD ED TD CD DX DY DM DS K /H ID QD

S ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

D ● ● ● ●

Word

(D51,D50)ASIN → (D61,D60)RAD

Binary Floating Binary Floating

This instruction performs the mathematical ASIN operation on the floating point

value in S. The result is stored in D.

ASIN value

Binary Floating

RAD value (angle×π/180)

Assign the binary floating value

Description

Page 183: PLC Software MANUAL - Xinje-support-centre-listo. · PDF filePLC Software Manual Page 3 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2 3-14 [NOP], [END] 76 3-15 [GROUP], [GROUPE] 77 3-16 Programming Notes 78

PLC Software Manual Page 183 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2

4-9-12 ACOS [ACOS]

1: Summary

ACOS [ACOS]

16 bits - 32 bits ACOS

Execution

condition

Normally ON/OFF, rising/falling

edge

Suitable

Models

XC2.XC3.XC5.XCM

Hardware

requirement

V3.0 and above Software

requirement

-

2: Operands

Operands Function Data Type

S Soft element address need to do arccos 32 bits, BIN

D Result address 32 bits, BIN

3: Suitable soft components

ACOS D50 D60X0

S· D·

D51 D50

D61 D60

Operands System Constant Module

D FD ED TD CD DX DY DM DS K /H ID QD

S ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

D ● ● ● ●

Word

(D51,D50)ACOS → (D61,D60)RAD

Binary Floating Binary Floating

Calculate the arcos value(radian), save the result in the target address

TCOS value

Binary Floating

RAD value (angle×π/180)

Assign the binary floating value

Description

Page 184: PLC Software MANUAL - Xinje-support-centre-listo. · PDF filePLC Software Manual Page 3 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2 3-14 [NOP], [END] 76 3-15 [GROUP], [GROUPE] 77 3-16 Programming Notes 78

PLC Software Manual Page 184 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2

4-9-13 ATAN [ATAN]

1: Summary

ATAN [ATAN]

16 bits - 32 bits ACOS

Execution

condition

Normally ON/OFF, rising/falling

edge

Suitable

Models

XC2.XC3.XC5.XCM

Hardware

requirement

V3.0 and above Software

requirement

-

2: Operands

Operands Function Data Type

S Soft element address need to do arctan 32 bit, BIN

D Result address 32 bit, BIN

3: Suitable soft components

ATAN D50 D60X0

S· D·

D51 D50

D61 D60

Operands System Constant Module

D FD ED TD CD DX DY DM DS K /H ID QD

S ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

D ● ● ● ●

Word

(D51,D50)ATAN → (D61,D60)RAD

Binary Floating Binary Floating

Calculate the arctan value ( radian), save the result in the target address

ATAN value

Binary Floating

RAD value (angle×π/180)

Assign the binary floating value

Description

Page 185: PLC Software MANUAL - Xinje-support-centre-listo. · PDF filePLC Software Manual Page 3 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2 3-14 [NOP], [END] 76 3-15 [GROUP], [GROUPE] 77 3-16 Programming Notes 78

PLC Software Manual Page 185 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2

4-10 RTC Instructions

Mnemonic Function Chapter

TRD Clock data read 4-10-1

TWR Clock data write 4-10-2

※1: Only available on models equipped with RTC function.

Page 186: PLC Software MANUAL - Xinje-support-centre-listo. · PDF filePLC Software Manual Page 3 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2 3-14 [NOP], [END] 76 3-15 [GROUP], [GROUPE] 77 3-16 Programming Notes 78

PLC Software Manual Page 186 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2

4-10-1 Read the clock data [TRD]

1: Instruction Summary

Read the clock data:

Read the clock data: [TRD]

16 bits TRD 32 bits -

Execution

condition

Normally ON/OFF, rising/falling

edge

Suitable

Models

XC2.XC3.XC5.XCM

Hardware

requirement

V2.51 and above Software

requirement

-

2: Operands

Operands Function Data Type

D Register to save clock data 16 bits, BIN

3: Suitable Soft Components

TRD D0X0

Read PLC’s real time clock according to the following format.

The reading source is the special data register (D8013~D8019) which save clock data.

Word Operands System Constant Module

D FD ED TD CD DX DY DM DS K /H ID QD

D ● ● ●

The current time and date of the real time clock are read and stored in

the 7 data devices specified by the head address D.

Unit Item

D0 Year

D1 Month

D2 Date

D3 Hour

D4 Minute

D5 Second

D Week

Unit Item Clock data

Special data register for

real time clock t

D8018 Year 0-99

D8017 Month 1-12

D8016 Date 1-31

D8015 Hour 0-23

D8014 Minute 0-59

D8013 Second 0-59

D8019 Week 0 (Sun.)-6 (Sat.)

Functions

and Actions

Page 187: PLC Software MANUAL - Xinje-support-centre-listo. · PDF filePLC Software Manual Page 3 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2 3-14 [NOP], [END] 76 3-15 [GROUP], [GROUPE] 77 3-16 Programming Notes 78

PLC Software Manual Page 187 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2

4-10-2 Write Clock Data [TWR] 1: Instruction Summary

Write the clock data:

Write clock data [TRD]

16 bits - 32 bits TRD

Execution

condition

Normally ON/OFF, rising/falling

edge

Suitable

Models

XC2.XC3.XC5.XCM

Hardware

requirement

V2.51 and above Software

requirement

-

2: Operands

Operands Function Data Type

S Write the clock data to the register 16 bits, BIN 3: Suitable Soft Components

TWR D0X0

Word Operands System Constant Module

D FD ED TD CD DX DY DM DS K /H ID QD

S ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

The 7 data devices specified with the head

address S are used to set a new current

value of the real time clock.

(3) Write the set clock data into PLC’s real time clock.

In order to write real time clock, the 7 data devices specified with the head

address should be pre-set. S·

Unit Item Clock data

Data for clock setting

D10 Year 0-99

D11 Month 1-12

D12 Date 1-31

D13 Hour 0-23

D14 Minute 0-59

D15 Second 0-59

D16 Week 0 (Sun.)-6

Unit Item

D8018 Year Special data re

gister for

real time clock t

D8017 Month

D8016 Date

D8015 Hour

D8014 Minute

D8013 Second

D8019 Week

After executing TWR instruction, the time in real time clock will immediately change to be

the new set time. So, when setting the time it is a good idea to set the source data to a

time a number of minutes ahead and then drive the instruction when the real time reaches

this value.

Functions

and Actions

Page 188: PLC Software MANUAL - Xinje-support-centre-listo. · PDF filePLC Software Manual Page 3 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2 3-14 [NOP], [END] 76 3-15 [GROUP], [GROUPE] 77 3-16 Programming Notes 78

PLC Software Manual Page 188 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2

5 High Speed Counter (HSC)

In this chapter we explore high speed counter’s functions, including high speed count

model, wiring method, read/write HSC value, reset etc.

5-1.Functions Summary

5-2.High Speed Counter’s Mode

5-3.High Speed Counter’s Range

5-4.Input Wiring of High Speed Counter

5-5.Input Terminals Assignment for HSC

5-6.Read and Write The HSC Value

5-7.Reset Mode of HSC

5-8.Frequency Multiplication of AB Phase HSC

5-9.HSC Examples

5-10.HSC Interruption

Page 189: PLC Software MANUAL - Xinje-support-centre-listo. · PDF filePLC Software Manual Page 3 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2 3-14 [NOP], [END] 76 3-15 [GROUP], [GROUPE] 77 3-16 Programming Notes 78

PLC Software Manual Page 189 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2

Instructions List for HSC

MNEMONIC FUNCTION CIRCUIT AND SOFT COMPONENTS CHAPTER

READ/WRITE HIGH SPEED COUNTER

HSCR Read HSC

5-6-1

HSCW Write HSC

5-6-2

OUT HSC (High Speed Counter) BSTOP S1 S2

3-13

OUT 24 segments HSC

Interruption 5-10

RST HSC Reset BGOON S1 S2

3-13

Page 190: PLC Software MANUAL - Xinje-support-centre-listo. · PDF filePLC Software Manual Page 3 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2 3-14 [NOP], [END] 76 3-15 [GROUP], [GROUPE] 77 3-16 Programming Notes 78

PLC Software Manual Page 190 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2

5-1 Functions Summary

XC series PLCs have an HSC (High Speed Counter) function which is independent of the

scan cycle. By choosing different counters, the high speed input signals can be tested with

detect sensors and rotary encoders. The highest testing frequency can reach 80KHz.

Page 191: PLC Software MANUAL - Xinje-support-centre-listo. · PDF filePLC Software Manual Page 3 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2 3-14 [NOP], [END] 76 3-15 [GROUP], [GROUPE] 77 3-16 Programming Notes 78

PLC Software Manual Page 191 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2

5-2 HSC Mode

The XC Series’ high speed counter function has three count modes: Increment Mode,

Pulse + Direction Mode and AB phase Mode;

Under this mode, count and input the pulse signal, the count value increase at each pulse’s

rising edge;

Under this mode, the pulse signal and direction signal are inputted, the count value increases

or decreases with the direction signal’s status. When the count signal is OFF, the count input’s

rising edge carry on plus count; When the count signal is ON, the count input’s rising edge

carry on minus count;

Increment Mode

Pulse + Direction Mode

Page 192: PLC Software MANUAL - Xinje-support-centre-listo. · PDF filePLC Software Manual Page 3 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2 3-14 [NOP], [END] 76 3-15 [GROUP], [GROUPE] 77 3-16 Programming Notes 78

PLC Software Manual Page 192 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2

Under this mode, the HSC value increases or decreases according to two differential signals

(A phase and B phase). There are two frequyency modes available: 1-time frequency and

4-time frequency. The default count mode is 4-time mode.

1-time frequency and 4-time frequency modes are shown below:

1-time Frequency

4-time Frequency

AB Phase Mode

Page 193: PLC Software MANUAL - Xinje-support-centre-listo. · PDF filePLC Software Manual Page 3 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2 3-14 [NOP], [END] 76 3-15 [GROUP], [GROUPE] 77 3-16 Programming Notes 78

PLC Software Manual Page 193 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2

5-3 HSC Range

5-4 HSC Input Wiring

HSC’s count range is: K-2, 147, 483, 648 ~ K+2, 147, 483, 647. If the count value overflows

this range, then up flow or down flow appears;

For “up flow”, it means the count value jumps from K+2, 147, 483, 647 to be K-2, 147, 483, 648,

then continues to count; For “down flow”, it means the count value jumps from K-2, 147, 483,

648 to be K+2, 147, 483, 647 then continues to count.

For the counter’s pulse input wiring, things differ with different PLC models and counter models;

several typical input wiring methods are shown below: (take XC3-48 as the example):

Page 194: PLC Software MANUAL - Xinje-support-centre-listo. · PDF filePLC Software Manual Page 3 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2 3-14 [NOP], [END] 76 3-15 [GROUP], [GROUPE] 77 3-16 Programming Notes 78

PLC Software Manual Page 194 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2

5-5 HSC Ports Assignment

Description of Letters:

U Dir A B

Pulse input Count Direction Judgment

(OFF=increment, ON=decrement)

A phase input B phase input

Normally, X0 and X1 can accept 80KHz frequency under single phase mode and AB phase

mode. Other terminals can accept only 10KHz under single phase mode, 5KHz under AB

phase mode. X can use as normal input terminals when they are not used as high speed input.

The detailed assignment is shown as below:

XC2 Series PLC

Increment Pulse+Dir Input AB Phase Mode

C60

0

C60

2

C60

4

C60

6

C60

8

C61

0

C61

2

C61

4

C61

6

C61

8

C62

0

C62

2

C62

4

C62

6

C62

8

C63

0

C63

2 C634

Max.F 80K 80K 10K 10K 10K 80K 10K 80K 5K

4-times F √

Count

Interrupt √ √ √ √ √ √ √

X000 U U A

X001 U Dir B

X002

X003 U U A

X004 Dir B

X005

X006 U

X007 U

X010

X011

X012

XC3-14 PLC

Page 195: PLC Software MANUAL - Xinje-support-centre-listo. · PDF filePLC Software Manual Page 3 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2 3-14 [NOP], [END] 76 3-15 [GROUP], [GROUPE] 77 3-16 Programming Notes 78

PLC Software Manual Page 195 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2

* C600、C620、C630 can support 80KHz with special requirement

Increment Pulse+Dir Input AB Phase

Mode

C60

0

C60

2

C60

4

C60

6

C60

8

C61

0

C61

2

C61

4

C61

6

C61

8

C62

0

C62

2

C62

4

C62

6

C62

8

C63

0

C63

2

C63

4

*Max.F 10K 10K 10K 10K 10K 10K 5K

4-times F

Count

Interrupt √ √ √ √ √

X000 U U A

X001 Dir B

X002 U

X003 U

X004

X005 U

XC3-19AR-E

Increment Pulse+Dir Input AB Phase

Mode

C60

0

C60

2

C60

4

C60

6

C60

8

C61

0

C61

2

C61

4

C61

6

C61

8

C62

0

C62

2

C62

4

C62

6

C62

8

C63

0

C63

2

C63

4

Max.F 10K 10K 10K 10K 10K 10K 5K 5K

4-times F √

Count

Interrupt √ √ √ √ √ √

X000 U U A

X001 Dir B

X002 U U A

X003 Dir B

X004 U

X005 U

XC3-24、32 PLC and XC5-48、60 PLC

Page 196: PLC Software MANUAL - Xinje-support-centre-listo. · PDF filePLC Software Manual Page 3 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2 3-14 [NOP], [END] 76 3-15 [GROUP], [GROUPE] 77 3-16 Programming Notes 78

PLC Software Manual Page 196 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2

Increment Pulse+Dir Input AB Phase

Mode

C60

0

C60

2

C60

4

C60

6

C60

8

C61

0

C61

2

C61

4

C61

6

C61

8

C62

0

C62

2

C62

4

C62

6

C62

8

C63

0

C63

2

C63

4

Max.F 80K 80K 10K 10K 10K 10K 80K 10K 10K 80K 5K 5K

4-times F √ √

Count

Interrupt √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √

X000 U U A

X001 U Dir B

X002

X003 U U A

X004 Dir B

X005

X006 U U A

X007 Dir B

X010

X011 U

X012 U

XC3-48、60 PLC

Increment Pulse+Dir Input AB Phase

Mode

C60

0

C60

2

C60

4

C60

6

C60

8

C61

0

C61

2

C61

4

C61

6

C61

8

C62

0

C62

2

C62

4

C62

6

C62

8

C63

0

C63

2

C63

4

Max.F 80K 80K 10K 10K 80K 80K 80K 80K

4-times F √

Count

Interrupt √ √ √ √ √ √

X000 U U A

X001 Dir B

X002 U U A

X003 Dir B

X004 U

X005 U

XC5-24/32 PLC、XCM-24/32 PLC

Page 197: PLC Software MANUAL - Xinje-support-centre-listo. · PDF filePLC Software Manual Page 3 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2 3-14 [NOP], [END] 76 3-15 [GROUP], [GROUPE] 77 3-16 Programming Notes 78

PLC Software Manual Page 197 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2

Increment Pulse+Dir Input AB Phase

Mode

C60

0

C60

2

C60

4

C60

6

C60

8

C61

0

C61

2

C61

4

C61

6

C61

8

C62

0

C62

2

C62

4

C62

6

C62

8

C63

0

C63

2

C63

4

Max.F 80K 10K 80K 80K

4-times F √

Count

Interrupt √ √ √ √

X000 U U A

X001 Dir B

X002

X003 U

X004

X005

X006

Page 198: PLC Software MANUAL - Xinje-support-centre-listo. · PDF filePLC Software Manual Page 3 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2 3-14 [NOP], [END] 76 3-15 [GROUP], [GROUPE] 77 3-16 Programming Notes 78

PLC Software Manual Page 198 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2

5-6 Read/Write HSC value

All high speed counters support read instruction [HSCR] and write instruction [HSCW].

Hardware must be V3.1c and above.

5-6-1 Read HSC value [HSCR]

1: Instruction Summary

Read HSC value to the specified register;

Read from HSC [HSCR]/ write to HSC [HSCW]

16 bits

Instruction

- 32 bits

Instruction

HSCR

Execution

condition

Normally ON/OFF, rising/falling

edge

Suitable

models XC2、XC3、XC5、XCM

Hardware

requirement

V3.1c and above Software

requirement

-

2: Operands

Operands Function Type

S Specify HSC code 32 bits, BIN

D Specify the read/written register 32 bits, BIN

3: Suitable Soft Components

operan

ds

system consta

nt

module

D FD ED TD CD DX DY DM DS K /H ID QD

S ●

word

Page 199: PLC Software MANUAL - Xinje-support-centre-listo. · PDF filePLC Software Manual Page 3 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2 3-14 [NOP], [END] 76 3-15 [GROUP], [GROUPE] 77 3-16 Programming Notes 78

PLC Software Manual Page 199 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2

Sample Program:

When the activate condition is true, read the HSC value in C630 (DWORD) into

D10 (DWORD)

Instruction HSCR reads the HSC value into the specified register, improve HSC

value’s precision.

Functions and Actions

Page 200: PLC Software MANUAL - Xinje-support-centre-listo. · PDF filePLC Software Manual Page 3 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2 3-14 [NOP], [END] 76 3-15 [GROUP], [GROUPE] 77 3-16 Programming Notes 78

PLC Software Manual Page 200 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2

5-6-2 Write HSC Value [HSCW]

1: Instruction Summary

Write the specified register value into HSC;

Write HSC value [HSCW]

16 bits

Instruction

- 32 bits

Instruction

HSCW

Execution

condition

Normally ON/OFF, rising/falling

edge

Suitable

models XC2、XC3、XC5、XCM

Hardware

requirement

V3.1c and above Software

requirement

-

2: Operands

Operands Function Type

S Specify HSC code 32 bits, BIN

D Specify the read/written register 32 bits, BIN

3: Suitable soft components

When the activated condition is true, write the value in D20 (DWORD) into C630

(DWORD), the original value is replaced;

We suggest users to apply high speed counter only with HSCR and HSCW, not with other

instructions like DMOV, LD>, DMUL etc. and users must run after converting HSC to be

other registers.

operands system constant module

D FD ED TD CD DX DY DM DS K /H ID QD

S ●

D ●

Word

Functions and Actions

Page 201: PLC Software MANUAL - Xinje-support-centre-listo. · PDF filePLC Software Manual Page 3 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2 3-14 [NOP], [END] 76 3-15 [GROUP], [GROUPE] 77 3-16 Programming Notes 78

PLC Software Manual Page 201 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2

5-7 HSC Reset Mode

5-8 AB Phase Counter Multiplication Setting

Reset HSC via software:

M0

M1

( )C600 K2000

( )C600

R↑

About AB phase counter, modify the frequency multiplication value via setting FLASH data

register FD8241, FD8242, FD8243. If the value is 1, it is 1-time frequency, if it is 4, it is 4-time

frequency.

Register Function Set Value Meaning

FD8241 Frequency multiplication of C630 1 1-time frequency

4 4-time frequency

FD8242 Frequency multiplication of C632 1 1-time frequency

4 4-time frequency

FD8243 Frequency multiplication of C634 1 1-time frequency

4 4-time frequency

In the above graph, when M0 is ON, C600 starts to count the input pulse on X0; when

M1 changes from OFF to be ON, reset C600, clears the count value

Page 202: PLC Software MANUAL - Xinje-support-centre-listo. · PDF filePLC Software Manual Page 3 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2 3-14 [NOP], [END] 76 3-15 [GROUP], [GROUPE] 77 3-16 Programming Notes 78

PLC Software Manual Page 202 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2

5-9 HSC Examples

Below, we take XC3-60 PLC as the example, to introduce HSC’s program form;

When M0 is ON, C600 starts the HSC with the OFF→ON of X000;

When comes the rising edge of M1, reset HSC C600

When normally ON coil M8000 is ON, set the value of C600, the set value is

K888888888, read the HSC value (DWORD) into data register D0 (DWORD).

If the value in C600 is smaller than value in D2, set the output coil Y0 ON; If the value

in C600 equals or be larger than value in D2, and smaller than value in D4, set the

output coil Y1 ON; If the value in C600 equals or be larger than value in D4, set the

output coil Y2 ON;

When comes the rising edge of M1, resets HSC C600 and stops counting.

When M4 is ON, C620 starts the HSC with the OFF→ON of X000; judge the count

direction according to the input X001 status (OFF or ON). If X001 is OFF, it’s increment

count; if X001 is ON, it’s decrement count;

When it reaches the rising edge of M5, it will reset HSC C620 and stop counting.

Increm

ent M

od

eP

ulse+

Directio

nM

od

e

Page 203: PLC Software MANUAL - Xinje-support-centre-listo. · PDF filePLC Software Manual Page 3 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2 3-14 [NOP], [END] 76 3-15 [GROUP], [GROUPE] 77 3-16 Programming Notes 78

PLC Software Manual Page 203 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2

When M8 is ON, C630 starts to count immediately. Count input via X000 (B Phase)、

X001 (A Phase)

When the count value exceeds K3000, output coil Y2 is ON;

When comes the rising edge of M9, it resets HSC C630

When the rising edge of initial positive pulse coil M8002 comes, i.e. Each scan cycle

starts, HSC C630 reset and clear the count value.

When set coil M8000 ON, C630 starts to count, the count value is set to be K8888888。

If the count value is greater than K0 but smaller than K100, the output coil Y0 set ON; If

the count value is greater thanK100 but smaller than K200 时,the output coil Y1 set ON;

If the count value is greater thanK200, the output coilY2 set ON;

AB

Ph

ase Mo

de

Page 204: PLC Software MANUAL - Xinje-support-centre-listo. · PDF filePLC Software Manual Page 3 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2 3-14 [NOP], [END] 76 3-15 [GROUP], [GROUPE] 77 3-16 Programming Notes 78

PLC Software Manual Page 204 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2

5-10 HSC Interruption

To XC series PLC, each HSC channels has 24 segments 32-bit pre-set value. When the

HSC difference value equals the correspond 24-segment pre-set value, then interruption

occurs according to the interruption tag;

To use this function, please use hardware V3.1c or above;

5-10-1 Instruction Description

(for Interruption program instructions, please refer chapter 5-10-4)

LD M0 //HSC activate condition M0 (interruption count condition)

OUT C600 K20000 D4000 //HSC value and set the start ID of 24-segment

LDP M1 //activate condition reset

RST C600 //HSC and 24-segment reset (interruption reset)

As shown in the above graph, data register D4000 is the start ID of 24-segment pre-set value

area. As a back-up, save each pre-set value in DWORD form. Please pay attention when

using HSC:

If certain pre-set value is 0, it means count interruption stops at this segment;

Set the interruption pre-set value but not write the correspond interruption program is

not allowed;

24-segment interruption of HSC occurs in order. I.e. If the first segment interruption

doesn't happen, then the second segment interruption will not happen;

24-segment pre-set value can be specified to be relative value or absolute value.

Meantime, users can specify the set value to be loop or not. But the loop mode can't be

used together with absolute value.

Page 205: PLC Software MANUAL - Xinje-support-centre-listo. · PDF filePLC Software Manual Page 3 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2 3-14 [NOP], [END] 76 3-15 [GROUP], [GROUPE] 77 3-16 Programming Notes 78

PLC Software Manual Page 205 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2

Counter Interruption tag

C630 I2501~I2524

C632 I2601~I2624

C634 I2701~I2724

C636 I2801~I2824

C638 I2901~I2924

5-10-2 Instruction tags to HSC In the below table, we list each counter's 24-segment pre-set value to its interruption tag.

E.g.: 24-segment pre-set value of counter C600 correspond with the interruption pointer:

I1001、I1002、I1003、…I1024.

Increment Mode Pulse + Direction Mode AB Phase Mode

E.g. 1, the current value is C630 is 0, the first preset value is 10000, the preset value in

segment 2 is -5000, and the preset value in segment 3 is 20000. When counting begins: if the counter's current value is 10000, the first interruption I2501 will

be generated. When counting begins: if the counter's current value is 5000, the first interruption I2502 will be

generated. When counting begings: if the counter's current value is 25000, the first interruption I2503 will

be generated. See graph below:

Counter Interruption tag

C600 I1001~I1024

C602 I1101~I1124

C604 I1201~I1224

C606 I1301~I1324

C608 I1401~I1424

C610 I1501~I1524

C612 I1601~I1624

C614 I1701~I1724

C616 I1801~I1824

C618 I1901~I1924

Counter Interruption tag

C620 I2001~I2024

C622 I2101~I2124

C624 I2201~I2224

C626 I2301~I2324

C628 I2401~I2424

HSC 24-segment pre-set value is the difference value, the count value

equals the counter's current value plus the preset value, self-generating

the interruption. N interruption tags correspond with N interruption preset

values. The (N+1) preset value is 0; Define the preset value

C600= K5000+K20000=K25000

C600= K10000+(K 5000)=K5000

C600= K0+K10000=K10000

C630 D4000 D4001 D4002 D4003 D4004 D4005

K0 K10000 K-5000 K20000

I2501

I2502

I2503

Page 206: PLC Software MANUAL - Xinje-support-centre-listo. · PDF filePLC Software Manual Page 3 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2 3-14 [NOP], [END] 76 3-15 [GROUP], [GROUPE] 77 3-16 Programming Notes 78

PLC Software Manual Page 206 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2

E.g. 2, the current value is C630 is 10000, the first preset value is 10000, the preset value in

segment 2 is 5000, the preset value in segment 3 is 20000.

When count begins, if the counter's current value is 20000, this generates first interruption at

I2501;

When count begins, if the counter's current value is 25000, this generates first interruption at

I2502;

When count begins, if the counter's current value is 45000, this generates first interruption at

I2503.

See graph below:

C600= K25000+K20000=K45000

C600= K20000+K5000=K25000

C600= K10000+K10000=K20000

C630 D4000 D4001 D4002 D4003 D4004 D4005

K10000 K10000 K5000 K20000

I2501

I2502

I2503

Page 207: PLC Software MANUAL - Xinje-support-centre-listo. · PDF filePLC Software Manual Page 3 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2 3-14 [NOP], [END] 76 3-15 [GROUP], [GROUPE] 77 3-16 Programming Notes 78

PLC Software Manual Page 207 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2

5-10-3 Loop Mode of HSC Interruption

Mode 1: Unicycle (normal mode)

Not happen after HSC interruption ends. The conditions below can re-start the

interruption:

(1) reset the HSC

(2) Reboot the HSC activate condition

Mode 2: Continuous loop

Restart after HSC interruption ends. This mode is especially suitable for the following

application:

(7) continuous back-forth movement

(8) Generate cycle interruption according to the defined pulse

With setting the special auxiliary relays, users can set the HSC interruption to be unicycle

mode or continuous loop mode. The loop mode is only suitable with the relative count. The

detailed assignment is show below:

ID HSC ID Setting

M8270 24 segments HSC interruption loop (C600)

OFF: unicycle mode

ON: continuous loop mode

M8271 24 segments HSC interruption loop (C602)

M8272 24 segments HSC interruption loop (C604)

M8273 24 segments HSC interruption loop (C606)

M8274 24 segments HSC interruption loop (C608)

M8275 24 segments HSC interruption loop (C610)

M8276 24 segments HSC interruption loop (C612)

M8277 24 segments HSC interruption loop (C614)

M8278 24 segments HSC interruption loop (C616)

M8279 24 segments HSC interruption loop (C618)

M8280 24 segments HSC interruption loop (C620)

M8281 24 segments HSC interruption loop (C622)

M8282 24 segments HSC interruption loop (C624)

M8283 24 segments HSC interruption loop (C626)

M8284 24 segments HSC interruption loop (C628)

M8285 24 segments HSC interruption loop (C630)

M8286 24 segments HSC interruption loop (C632)

M8287 24 segments HSC interruption loop (C634)

Page 208: PLC Software MANUAL - Xinje-support-centre-listo. · PDF filePLC Software Manual Page 3 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2 3-14 [NOP], [END] 76 3-15 [GROUP], [GROUPE] 77 3-16 Programming Notes 78

PLC Software Manual Page 208 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2

5-10-4 Example of HSC Interruption

E.g.2:Application on knit-weaving machine (continuous loop mode)

The system theory is shown as below: Control of the inverter via PLC, Processing the

movement, via the feedback signal from encoder, control the knit-weaving machine and realize

the precise position.

Page 209: PLC Software MANUAL - Xinje-support-centre-listo. · PDF filePLC Software Manual Page 3 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2 3-14 [NOP], [END] 76 3-15 [GROUP], [GROUPE] 77 3-16 Programming Notes 78

PLC Software Manual Page 209 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2

Below is PLC program: Y2 represents forward output signal; Y3 represents backward output

signal; Y4 represents output signal of speed 1; C340: Back-forth times accumulation counter;

C630: AB phase HSC;

Page 210: PLC Software MANUAL - Xinje-support-centre-listo. · PDF filePLC Software Manual Page 3 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2 3-14 [NOP], [END] 76 3-15 [GROUP], [GROUPE] 77 3-16 Programming Notes 78

PLC Software Manual Page 210 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2

Instruction List Form:

LD M8002 //M8002 is initial positive pulse coil

SET M8285 //special auxiliary relay set ON, to enable C630

continuous loop

SET Y2 //set output coil Y2 (i.e. Start run forth)

LDP Y2 //knit-weaving machine back-forth times counter's

activate condition Y2(forth rising edge activate)

OUT C340 K1000000 //counter C340 starts to count

LD M8000 //M8000 is normally ON coil

DMOV K75000 D4000 //set segment-1 ID D4000 to be K75000

DMOV K15000 D4002 //set segment-2 D4002 to be K15000

DMOV K-75000 D4004 //set segment-3 D4004 to be K-75000

DMOV K-15000 D4006 //set segment-4 D4004 to be K-15000

LD M8000 //M8000 is normally ON coil

OUT C630 K30000000 D4000 //HSC and start ID of 24-segment

LD M8000 //M8000 is normally ON coil

HSCR C630 D200 //read the HSC value of C630 to D200

FEND //main program end

I2501 //interruption tag of segment 1

LD M8000 //M8000 is normally ON coil

SET Y4 //output coil Y4 set (low-speed run with speed 1)

IRET //interruption return tag

I2502 ///interruption tag of segment 2

LD M8000 //M8000 is normally ON coil

RST Y4 //output coil Y4 reset (low-speed run stop)

RST Y2 //output coil Y2 reset (run forward stops)

SET Y3 //output coil Y3 set (back running)

IRET //interruption return tag

I2503 ///interruption tag of segment 3

LD M8000 //M8000 is normally ON coil

SET Y4 //output coil Y4 set (low-speed run with speed 1)

IRET //interruption return tag

I2504 ///interruption tag of segment 4

LD M8000 //M8000 is normally ON coil

RST Y3 //output coil Y3 reset (back running stop)

RST Y4 //output coil Y4 reset (low-speed run stop)

SET Y2 //output coil Y2 set (run forward)

IRET //interruption return tag

Page 211: PLC Software MANUAL - Xinje-support-centre-listo. · PDF filePLC Software Manual Page 3 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2 3-14 [NOP], [END] 76 3-15 [GROUP], [GROUPE] 77 3-16 Programming Notes 78

PLC Software Manual Page 211 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2

6 Pulse Output

In this chapter we explain the pulse function of XC series PLCs. The content includes

pulse output instructions, input/output wiring, items to note in relation to coils and registers

etc.

6-1.Functions Summary

6-2.Pulse Output Types and Instructions

6-3.Output Wiring

6-4.Items to Note

6-5.Sample Programs

6-6.Coils and Registers in relation to Pulse Output

Page 212: PLC Software MANUAL - Xinje-support-centre-listo. · PDF filePLC Software Manual Page 3 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2 3-14 [NOP], [END] 76 3-15 [GROUP], [GROUPE] 77 3-16 Programming Notes 78

PLC Software Manual Page 212 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2

Pulse Output Instructions List

Mnemonic Function Circuit And Soft Device Chapter

PULSE OUTPUT

PLSY

Unidirectional

ration pulse

output without

ACC/DEC time

change

PLSY S1 S2 D

6-2-1

PLSF

Variable

frequency

pulse output

PLSF S D

6-2-2

PLSR

Ration pulse

output with

ACC/DEC

speed

PLSR S1 S2 S3 D

6-2-3

PLSNEXT/

PLSNT

Pulse Section

Switch PLSNT S

6-2-4

STOP Pulse Stop STOP S

6-2-5

PLSMV Refresh Pulse

Nr. immediately PLSMV S D

6-2-6

ZRN Original Return ZRN S1 S2 S3 D

6-2-7

DRVI

Relative

Position

Control

DRVI S1 S2 S3 D1 D2

6-2-8

DRVA

Absolute

Position

Control

DRVA S1 S2 S3 D1 D2

6-2-9

PLSA

Absolute

Position

multi-section

pulse control

PLSA S1 S2 D

6-2-10

Page 213: PLC Software MANUAL - Xinje-support-centre-listo. · PDF filePLC Software Manual Page 3 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2 3-14 [NOP], [END] 76 3-15 [GROUP], [GROUPE] 77 3-16 Programming Notes 78

PLC Software Manual Page 213 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2

6-1 Functions Summary

Generally, XC3 and XC5 series PLC are equipped with 2CH pulse output function. Via different

instructions, users can realize unidirectional pulse output without ACC/DEC speed;

unidirectional pulse output with ACC/DEC speed; multi-segments, positive/negative output etc.,

the output frequency can reach 400K Hz.

Y0COM0

Y1COM1

Y2COM2

※1: To use pulse output, please choose PLC with transistor output, like XC3-14T-E or XC3-60RT-E etc.

※2: XC5 series 32I/O PLC has 4CH (Y0, Y1, Y2, Y3) pulse output function.

Stepping Motor

Driver

Page 214: PLC Software MANUAL - Xinje-support-centre-listo. · PDF filePLC Software Manual Page 3 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2 3-14 [NOP], [END] 76 3-15 [GROUP], [GROUPE] 77 3-16 Programming Notes 78

PLC Software Manual Page 214 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2

6-2 Pulse Output Types and Instructions

6-2-1 Unidirectional ration pulse output

without ACC/DEC time change [PLSY]

1: Instruction Summary

Instruction to generate ration pulse with the specified frequency;

Unidirectional ration pulse output without ACC/DEC time change [PLSY]

16 bits

instruction

PLSY 32 bits

instruction

DPLSY

Execution

condition

Normally ON/OFF coil Suitable

models XC2、XC3、XC5、XCM

Hardware

requirement

- Software

requirements

-

2: Operands

Operands Function Type

S1 Specify the frequency’s value or register ID 16 bits/32 bits, BIN

S2 Specify the pulse number or register’s ID 16 bits /32 bits, BIN

D Specify the pulse output port bit

3: Suitable soft components

operands system constant module

D FD ED TD CD DX DY DM DS K /H ID QD

S1 ● ● ● ● ●

S2 ● ● ● ● ●

Word

operands system

X Y M S T C Dn.m

D ●

Bit

Page 215: PLC Software MANUAL - Xinje-support-centre-listo. · PDF filePLC Software Manual Page 3 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2 3-14 [NOP], [END] 76 3-15 [GROUP], [GROUPE] 77 3-16 Programming Notes 78

PLC Software Manual Page 215 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2

《16 bits Instruction》

PLSY K30 D1 Y0M0

S1· S2· D·

M8170RST M0

《32 bits Instruction》

DPLSY K30 D1 Y0M0

S1· S2· D·

M8170RST M0

Frequency Range: 0~400KHz;

Pulse Quantity Range: 0~K32767;

Pulse output from Y000 or Y001 only;

When M0 is ON, PLSY instruction output 30Hz pulse at Y0, the pulse number is

decided by D1, M8170 is set ON only when sending the pulse. When the output

pulse number reaches the set value, stop sending the pulse, M8170 is set to be

OFF, reset M0;

Frequency Range: 0~400KHz;

Pulse Quantity Range: 0~K2147483647;

Pulse output from Y000 or Y001 only;

When M0 is ON, DPLSY instruction output 30Hz pulse at Y0, the pulse number is

decided by D2D1, M8170 is set ON only when sending the pulse. When the output

pulse number reaches the set value, stop sending the pulse, M8170 is set to be OFF,

reset M0;

Functions and Actions

Page 216: PLC Software MANUAL - Xinje-support-centre-listo. · PDF filePLC Software Manual Page 3 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2 3-14 [NOP], [END] 76 3-15 [GROUP], [GROUPE] 77 3-16 Programming Notes 78

PLC Software Manual Page 216 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2

《continuous or limited pulse number》

When finish sending the set pulse number, stop outputting automatically

Limited pulse output

Set pulse number

If the control object is stepping/servo motor, we recemend users not use this

instruction, to avoid the motor losing synchronism. PLSR is available.

Output Mode

Items to Note

Page 217: PLC Software MANUAL - Xinje-support-centre-listo. · PDF filePLC Software Manual Page 3 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2 3-14 [NOP], [END] 76 3-15 [GROUP], [GROUPE] 77 3-16 Programming Notes 78

PLC Software Manual Page 217 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2

6-2-2 Variable Pulse Output [PLSF]

1: Instruction Summary

Instruction to generate continuous pulse in the form of variable frequency

Variable Pulse Output [PLSF]

16 bits

Instruction

PLSF 32 bits

Instruction

DPLSF

Execution

condition

Normally ON/OFF coil Suitable

Models XC2、XC3、XC5、XCM

Hardware

requirement

- Software

requirement

-

2: Operands

Operands Function Type

S Specify the frequency or register ID 16 bits/32 bits, BIN

D Specify pulse output port bit

3: Suitable soft components

operands system constant module

D FD ED TD CD DX DY DM DS K /H ID QD

S ● ● ● ● ●

Word

operands system

X Y M S T C Dn.m

D ●

Bit

Page 218: PLC Software MANUAL - Xinje-support-centre-listo. · PDF filePLC Software Manual Page 3 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2 3-14 [NOP], [END] 76 3-15 [GROUP], [GROUPE] 77 3-16 Programming Notes 78

PLC Software Manual Page 218 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2

《16 bit instruction form》

PLSF D0 Y0M0

S· D·

《32 bit instruction form》

DPLSF D0 Y0M0

S· D·

Sequential output pulse with the set frequency till stop output via the instruction

Sequential pulse output

Frequency range: 6Hz~400KHz (when the set frequency is lower than 200Hz,

output 200Hz)

Pulse can only be output at Y000 or Y001.

With the changing of setting frequency in D0, the output pulse frequency changes at

Y0

Frequency range: 6Hz~400KHz (when the set frequency is lower than 200Hz, output

200Hz)

Pulse can only be output at Y000 or Y001.

With the changing of setting frequency in D0, the output pulse frequency changes at

Y0

Accumulate pulse number in register D8170 (DWord)

Functions and Actions

Output Mode

Page 219: PLC Software MANUAL - Xinje-support-centre-listo. · PDF filePLC Software Manual Page 3 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2 3-14 [NOP], [END] 76 3-15 [GROUP], [GROUPE] 77 3-16 Programming Notes 78

PLC Software Manual Page 219 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2

6-2-3 Multi-segment pulse control at relative position [PLSR]

PLSR/DPLSR instruction has two control modes. Below we will introduce one by one;

Mode 1: segment uni-directional pulse output PLSR

1: Instruction Summary

Generate certain pulse quantity (segmented) with the specified frequency and

acceleration/deceleration time

Segmented uni-directional pulse output [PLSR]

16 bits

Instruction

PLSR 32 bits

Instruction

DPLSR

Execution

condition

Normally ON/OFF coil Suitable

Models XC2、XC3、XC5、XCM

Hardware

requirement

- Software

requirement

-

2: Operands

Operands Function Type

S1 Specify the soft component’s start ID of the segmented

pulse parameters

16 bit/ 32 bit, BIN

S2 Specify acceleration/deceleration time or soft

component’s ID

16 bit/ 32 bit, BIN

D Specify the pulse output port Bit

3: Suitable soft components

operands system constant module

D FD ED TD CD DX DY DM DS K /H ID QD

S1 ● ● ● ●

S2 ● ● ● ● ●

Word

operands system

X Y M S T C Dn.m

D ●

Bit

Page 220: PLC Software MANUAL - Xinje-support-centre-listo. · PDF filePLC Software Manual Page 3 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2 3-14 [NOP], [END] 76 3-15 [GROUP], [GROUPE] 77 3-16 Programming Notes 78

PLC Software Manual Page 220 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2

《16 bit instruction form》

PLSR D0 D100 Y0

RST M0

M0

M8170

S1· S2· D·

《32 bit instruction form》

DPLSR D0 D100 Y0

RST M0

M0

M8170

S1· S2· D·

The parameters’ address is a section starts from Dn or FDn. In the above example (16bit

instruction form): D0 shows the first segment pulse’s highest frequency; D1 shows the first

segment’s pulse number; D2 shows the second segment pulse’s highest frequency; D3

shows the second segment’s pulse number,…… if the set value in Dn、Dn+1 is 0, this

represents the end of segment, the segment number is not limited.

To 32 bit instruction DPLSR, D0, D1 set the first segment pulse’s highest frequency; D2,

D3 set the first segment’s pulse number; D4, D5 set the second segment pulse’s highest

frequency; D6, D7 set the second segment’s pulse number……

Acceleration/deceleration time is the time from the start to the first segment’s highest

frequency. Meantime, it defines the slope of all segment’s frequency to time. In this way

the following acceleration/deceleration will perform according to this slope.

Pulse can be output at only Y000 or Y001

Frequency range: 0~400KHz;

Pulse number range: 0~K32,767 (16 bits instruction) 、 0~K2,147,483,647 (32 bits

instruction)

Acceleration/deceleration time : below 65535 ms

Functions and Actions

Page 221: PLC Software MANUAL - Xinje-support-centre-listo. · PDF filePLC Software Manual Page 3 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2 3-14 [NOP], [END] 76 3-15 [GROUP], [GROUPE] 77 3-16 Programming Notes 78

PLC Software Manual Page 221 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2

Mode 2: segmented dual-directional pulse output PLSR

1: Instruction Summary Generate certain pulse quantity with the specified frequency、acceleration/deceleration time and pulse direction ;

Segmented dual-directional pulse output [PLSR]

16 bits

Instruction

PLSR 32 bits

Instruction

DPLSR

Execution

condition

Normally ON/OFF coil Suitable

Models XC2、XC3、XC5、XCM

Hardware

requirement

- Software

requirement

-

2: Operands

Operands Function Type

S1 Specify the soft component’s start ID of the segmented pulse

parameters

16 bit/ 32 bit, BIN

S2 Specify acceleration/deceleration time or soft component’s

ID

16 bit/ 32 bit, BIN

D1 Specify the pulse output port Bit

D2 Specify the pulse output direction’s port Bit

3: Suitable soft components

operands system constant module

D FD ED TD CD DX DY DM DS K /H ID QD

S1 ● ● ● ●

S2 ● ● ● ● K

Word

operands system

X Y M S T C Dn.m

D1 ●

D2 ●

Bit

Page 222: PLC Software MANUAL - Xinje-support-centre-listo. · PDF filePLC Software Manual Page 3 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2 3-14 [NOP], [END] 76 3-15 [GROUP], [GROUPE] 77 3-16 Programming Notes 78

PLC Software Manual Page 222 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2

《16 bit instruction form》

PLSR D0 D100 Y0

RST M0

M0

M8170

S1· S2·

Y3

D1· D2·

动作示意图,如下所示:

The parameters’ address is a section starts from Dn or FDn. In the above example: D0 set

the first segment pulse’s highest frequency; D1 sshows the first segment’s pulse number;

D2 shows the second segment pulse’s highest frequency; D3 shows the second segment’s

pulse number,…… if the set value in Dn、Dn+1 is 0, this represents the end of segment, the

number of segments available is not limited.

Acceleration/deceleration time is the time from the start to the first segment’s highest

frequency. Meantime, it defines the slope of all segment’s frequency to time. In this way the

following acceleration/deceleration will perform according to this slope.

Pulse can be output at only Y000 or Y001

Y for Pulse direction can be specified freely. E.g.: if in S1 (the first segment) the pulse

number is positive, Y output is ON; if the pulse number is negative, Y output is OFF; Note: in

the first segment’s pulse output, the pulse direction is only decided by the pulse number’s

nature (positive or negative) of the first segment.

Frequency range: 0~400KHz;

Pulse number range: 0~K32,767 (16 bits instruction)、0~K2,147,483,647 (32 bits instruction)

Acceleration/deceleration time : below 65535 ms

Functions and Actions

Page 223: PLC Software MANUAL - Xinje-support-centre-listo. · PDF filePLC Software Manual Page 3 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2 3-14 [NOP], [END] 76 3-15 [GROUP], [GROUPE] 77 3-16 Programming Notes 78

PLC Software Manual Page 223 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2

6-2-4 Pulse Segment Switch [PLSNEXT]/[PLSNT]

1: Instruction Summary

Enter the next pulse output;

Pulse segment switch [PLSNEXT]/[PLSNT]

16 bits

Instruction

PLSNEXT/PLSNT 32 bits

Instruction

-

Execution

condition

Rising/falling edge Suitable

Models XC2、XC3、XC5、XCM

Hardware

requirement

- Software

requirement

-

2: Operands

Operands Function Type

D Specify the pulse output port Bit

3: Suitable soft components

operands system

X Y M S T C Dn.m

D ●

Bit

Page 224: PLC Software MANUAL - Xinje-support-centre-listo. · PDF filePLC Software Manual Page 3 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2 3-14 [NOP], [END] 76 3-15 [GROUP], [GROUPE] 77 3-16 Programming Notes 78

PLC Software Manual Page 224 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2

《16 bit instruction form》

Y0PLSNEXTM1

PLSR D0 D100 Y0M0

D

If the pulse output reaches the highest frequency at the current segment, and output

steadily at this frequency; when M1 changes from OFF to ON, then enter the next

pulse output with the acceleration/deceleration time;

Run the instruction within the acceleration/deceleration time is invalid;

Instruction PLSNT is the brief of PLSNEXT, the functions are same;

--------(the dashed line represents the original pulse output

Functions and Actions

Page 225: PLC Software MANUAL - Xinje-support-centre-listo. · PDF filePLC Software Manual Page 3 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2 3-14 [NOP], [END] 76 3-15 [GROUP], [GROUPE] 77 3-16 Programming Notes 78

PLC Software Manual Page 225 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2

6-2-5 Pulse Stop [STOP]

1: Instruction Summary

Stop pulse output immediately;

Pulse stop [STOP]

16 bits

Instruction

STOP 32 bits

Instruction

-

Execution

condition

Rising/falling edge Suitable

Models XC2、XC3、XC5、XCM

Hardware

requirement

- Software

requirement

-

2: Operands

Operands Function Type

D Specify the port to stop pulse output Bit

3: Suitable soft components

《16 bit instruction form》

D0PLSR D100 Y0M0

M1

M8170

STOP Y0

RST M0

D

When M000 changes from OFF to be ON, PLSR output pulse at Y000. D0 specifies the

frequency, D001 specifies the pulse number, D100 specifies the

acceleration/deceleration time; when the output pulse number reaches the set value,

stop outputting the pulse; on the rising edge of M001, STOP instruction stops outputting

the pulse at Y000.

operands system

X Y M S T C Dn.m

D ●

Bit

Functions and Actions

Page 226: PLC Software MANUAL - Xinje-support-centre-listo. · PDF filePLC Software Manual Page 3 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2 3-14 [NOP], [END] 76 3-15 [GROUP], [GROUPE] 77 3-16 Programming Notes 78

PLC Software Manual Page 226 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2

6-2-6 Refresh the pulse number at the port [PLSMV]

1: Instruction Summary

Refresh the pulse number at the port;

Refresh the pulse number at the port [PLSMV]

16 bits

Instruction

- 32 bits

Instruction

PLSMV

Execution

condition

Normally ON/OFF coil Suitable

Models XC2、XC3、XC5、XCM

Hardware

requirement

- Software

requirement

-

2: Operands

Operands Function Type

S Specify the pulse number or soft components’ ID 32bit, BIN

D Specify the port to refresh the pulse Bit

3: Suitable soft components

operands system

X Y M S T C Dn.m

D ●

Bit

operands system constant module

D FD ED TD CD DX DY DM DS K /H ID QD

S ● ● ● ● ●

Word

Page 227: PLC Software MANUAL - Xinje-support-centre-listo. · PDF filePLC Software Manual Page 3 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2 3-14 [NOP], [END] 76 3-15 [GROUP], [GROUPE] 77 3-16 Programming Notes 78

PLC Software Manual Page 227 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2

《32 bit instruction form》

When the working table is moving backward, it gets the origin signal X2, executes

the external interruption, PLSMV command run immediately, this is not effected by

the scan cycle. Refresh the pulse number from Y0 and send to D8170.

This instruction is used remove the accumulation difference caused in pulse

control.

Functions and Actions

Page 228: PLC Software MANUAL - Xinje-support-centre-listo. · PDF filePLC Software Manual Page 3 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2 3-14 [NOP], [END] 76 3-15 [GROUP], [GROUPE] 77 3-16 Programming Notes 78

PLC Software Manual Page 228 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2

6-2-7 Back to the Origin [ZRN]

1: Instruction Summary

Back to the Origin

Back to the Origin [ZRN]

16 bits

Instruction

ZRN 32 bits

Instruction

DZRN

Execution

condition

Normally ON/OFF coil Suitable

Models XC2、XC3、XC5、XCM

Hardware

requirement

- Software

requirement

-

2: Operands

Operands Function Type

S1 Specify the backward speed or soft components’ ID 16/32bit, BIN

S2 Specify the creeping speed or soft components’ ID 16/32 bit, BIN

S3 Specify the soft components’ ID of the close point’s signal Bit

D Specify the pulse output port Bit

3: Suitable soft components

operands system

X Y M S T C Dn.m

S3 ● ●

D ●

Word

Bit

operands system constant module

D FD ED TD CD DX DY DM DS K /H ID QD

S1 ● ● ● ● ●

S2 ● ● ● ● ●

Page 229: PLC Software MANUAL - Xinje-support-centre-listo. · PDF filePLC Software Manual Page 3 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2 3-14 [NOP], [END] 76 3-15 [GROUP], [GROUPE] 77 3-16 Programming Notes 78

PLC Software Manual Page 229 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2

《16 bit instruction form》

《32 bit instruction form》

Pulse output address: Y0 or Y1 only.

S1 and S2 direction is same and the absolute value of S1 is greater than S2.

After driving the instruction, move with the origin return speed S1.

When the closed point signal turns from OFF to be ON, decrease the speed to be S2.

When the closed point signal turns from ON to be OFF, write to registers

(Y0:[D8171,D8170],Y1:[D8174,D8173]) when stopping pulse output.

The decrease time can be specified by D8230~D8239; please refer to chapter 6-6 for

details.

Functions and Actions

Page 230: PLC Software MANUAL - Xinje-support-centre-listo. · PDF filePLC Software Manual Page 3 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2 3-14 [NOP], [END] 76 3-15 [GROUP], [GROUPE] 77 3-16 Programming Notes 78

PLC Software Manual Page 230 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2

6-2-8 Relative position uni-segment pulse control [DRVI]

1:Instruction Summary

Relative position uni-segment pulse control;

Relative position uni-segment pulse control [DRVI]

16 bits

Instruction

DRVI 32 bits

Instruction

DDRVI

Execution

condition

Normally ON/OFF coil Suitable

Models XC2、XC3、XC5、XCM

Hardware

requirement

- Software

requirement

-

2:Operands

Operands Function Type

S1 Specify the output pulse value or soft components ID 16/32bit, BIN

S2 Specify the output pulse frequency or soft components

ID

16/32 bit, BIN

D1 Specify the pulse output port Bit

D2 Specify the pulse output direction port Bit

3: Suitable soft components

operands system

X Y M S T C Dn.m

D1 ●

D2 ●

Word

Bit

operands system constant module

D FD ED TD CD DX DY DM DS K /H ID QD

S1 ● ● ● ● ●

S2 ● ● ● ● ●

Page 231: PLC Software MANUAL - Xinje-support-centre-listo. · PDF filePLC Software Manual Page 3 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2 3-14 [NOP], [END] 76 3-15 [GROUP], [GROUPE] 77 3-16 Programming Notes 78

PLC Software Manual Page 231 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2

《16 bit instruction form》

《32 bit instruction form》

Pulse output ID: only Y0 or Y1.

Pulse output direction can specify any Y.

Acceleration/deceleration time is specified by D8230 (single word).

The relative drive form means: move from the current position.

Functions and Actions

Page 232: PLC Software MANUAL - Xinje-support-centre-listo. · PDF filePLC Software Manual Page 3 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2 3-14 [NOP], [END] 76 3-15 [GROUP], [GROUPE] 77 3-16 Programming Notes 78

PLC Software Manual Page 232 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2

6-2-9 Absolute position uni-segment pulse control [DRVA]

1:Instruction Summary

Absolute position uni-segment pulse control

Absolute position uni-segment pulse control [DRVA]

16 bits

Instruction

DRVA 32 bits

Instruction

DDRVA

Execution

condition

Normally ON/OFF coil Suitable

Models XC2、XC3、XC5、XCM

Hardware

requirement

- Software

requirement

-

2: Operands

Operands Function Type

S1 Specify the output pulse value or soft components ID 16/32bit, BIN

S2 Specify the output pulse frequency or soft components ID 16/32 bit, BIN

D1 Specify the pulse output port Bit

D2 Specify the pulse output direction port Bit

3: Suitable soft components

operands system

X Y M S T C Dn.m

D1 ●

D2 ●

Word

Bit

operands system constant module

D FD ED TD CD DX DY DM DS K /H ID QD

S1 ● ● ● ● ●

S2 ● ● ● ● ●

Page 233: PLC Software MANUAL - Xinje-support-centre-listo. · PDF filePLC Software Manual Page 3 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2 3-14 [NOP], [END] 76 3-15 [GROUP], [GROUPE] 77 3-16 Programming Notes 78

PLC Software Manual Page 233 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2

《16 bit instruction form》

《32 bit instruction form》

(Y0:[D8171,D8170],Y1:[D8174,D8173])

Pulse output ID: only Y0 or Y1.

Pulse output direction can specify any Y.

Acceleration/deceleration time is specified by D8230 (single word).

The relative drive form means: move from the origin position.

Target position means S1, correspond with the following current value register as the

absolute position.

Functions and Actions

Page 234: PLC Software MANUAL - Xinje-support-centre-listo. · PDF filePLC Software Manual Page 3 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2 3-14 [NOP], [END] 76 3-15 [GROUP], [GROUPE] 77 3-16 Programming Notes 78

PLC Software Manual Page 234 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2

6-2-10 Absolute position multi-segment pulse control [PLSA]

PLSA/DPLSA has two control modes, below we will introduce one by one;

Mode 1: uni-directional pulse output PLSA

1: Instruction Summary

Generate absolute position segmented pulse with the specified frequency,

acceleration/deceleration time and pulse direction;

Absolute position multi-segment pulse control [PLSA]

16 bits

Instruction

PLSA 32 bits

Instruction

DPLSA

Execution

condition

Normally ON/OFF coil Suitable

Models XC2、XC3、XC5、XCM

Hardware

requirement

- Software

requirement

-

2: Operands

Operands Function Type

S1 Specify the soft component’s number to output the pulse

parameters

16/32bit, BIN

S2 Specify the acceleration/deceleration time or soft component’s

number

16/32 bit, BIN

D Specify the pulse output port Bit

3: Suitable soft components

operands system

X Y M S T C Dn.m

D1 ●

Word

Bit

operands system constant module

D FD ED TD CD DX DY DM DS K /H ID QD

S1 ● ● ● ●

S2 ● ● ● ● K

Page 235: PLC Software MANUAL - Xinje-support-centre-listo. · PDF filePLC Software Manual Page 3 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2 3-14 [NOP], [END] 76 3-15 [GROUP], [GROUPE] 77 3-16 Programming Notes 78

PLC Software Manual Page 235 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2

《16 bit instruction form》

《32 bit instruction form》

The parameters’ address is a section starts from Dn or FDn. In the above example: D0

shows the first segment pulse’s highest frequency; D1 shows the first segment’s absolute

position; D2 shows the second segment pulse’s highest frequency; D3 shows the second

segment’s absolute position,…… if the set value in Dn, Dn+1 is 0, this represents the end

of segment. Up to a maximum of 24 segments can be set.

Acceleration/deceleration time is the time from the start to the first segment’s highest

frequency. Meantime, it defines the slope of all segment’s frequency to time. In this way

the following acceleration/deceleration will perform according to this slope.

Pulse can be output at only Y000 or Y001

Functions and Actions

Page 236: PLC Software MANUAL - Xinje-support-centre-listo. · PDF filePLC Software Manual Page 3 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2 3-14 [NOP], [END] 76 3-15 [GROUP], [GROUPE] 77 3-16 Programming Notes 78

PLC Software Manual Page 236 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2

Mode 2: dual-directional pulse output PLSA

1: Instruction Summary

Generate absolute position pulse with the specified frequency, acceleration/deceleration

time and pulse direction;

Absolute position multi-segment pulse control [PLSA]

16 bits

Instruction

PLSA 32 bits

Instruction

DPLSA

Execution

condition

Normally ON/OFF coil Suitable

Models XC2、XC3、XC5、XCM

Hardware

requirement

- Software

requirement

-

2: Operands

Operands Function Type

S1 Specify the soft component’s number to output the pulse

parameters

16/32bit, BIN

S2 Specify the acceleration/deceleration time or soft component’s

number

16/32 bit, BIN

D1 Specify the pulse output port Bit

D2 Specify the pulse direction port Bit

3、suitable soft components

operands system

X Y M S T C Dn.m

D1 ●

D2 ●

Word

Bit

operands system constant module

D FD ED TD CD DX DY DM DS K /H ID QD

S1 ● ● ● ●

S2 ● ● ● ● K

Page 237: PLC Software MANUAL - Xinje-support-centre-listo. · PDF filePLC Software Manual Page 3 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2 3-14 [NOP], [END] 76 3-15 [GROUP], [GROUPE] 77 3-16 Programming Notes 78

PLC Software Manual Page 237 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2

《16 bit instruction form》

《32 bit instruction form》

The parameters’ address is a section starts from Dn or FDn. In the above example: D0

shows the first segment pulse’s highest frequency; D1 sshows the first segment’s

absolute position; D2 shows the second segment pulse’s highest frequency; D3 shows

the second segment’s absolute position,…… if the set value in Dn, Dn+1 is 0, this

represents the end of segment. Up to a mximum of 24 segments can be set.

Acceleration/deceleration time is the time from the start to the first segment’s highest

frequency. Meantime, it defines the slope of all segment’s frequency to time. In this way

the following acceleration/deceleration will perform according to this slope.

Pulse can be output at only Y000 or Y001

The Y port to output the pulse direction can be set freely;

Functions and Actions

Page 238: PLC Software MANUAL - Xinje-support-centre-listo. · PDF filePLC Software Manual Page 3 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2 3-14 [NOP], [END] 76 3-15 [GROUP], [GROUPE] 77 3-16 Programming Notes 78

PLC Software Manual Page 238 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2

6-3 Output Wiring

Y0COM0

Y1COM1

Y2COM2

Below is the graph to show the output terminals and stepping driver wiring:

Y0PU

PUY1

PLC side Stepping driver side

Output port Y0: Pulse output port 0 (single phase) Output port Y1: Pulse output port 1 (single phase)

Page 239: PLC Software MANUAL - Xinje-support-centre-listo. · PDF filePLC Software Manual Page 3 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2 3-14 [NOP], [END] 76 3-15 [GROUP], [GROUPE] 77 3-16 Programming Notes 78

PLC Software Manual Page 239 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2

频率的跳变

6-4 Items to Note

1: Concept of Step Frequency

2、frequency jump in segment pulse output

3: Dual pulse output is invalid

D0PLSR D100 Y0M0

D200PLSR D1000 Y0M1

In one main program, users can’t write two or more pulse output instructions with one

output port Y;

Therefore the sample below is wrong;

During ACC/DEC, each step time is 5ms, this time is fixed and not changeable.

The minimum step frequency (each step’s rising/falling time) is 10Hz. If the frequency is

lower than 10Hz, calculate as 10Hz; the maximum step frequency is 15Hz. If the

frequency is larger than 15Hz, calculate as 15Hz.

In case of frequency larger than 200Hz, please make sure each segment’s pulse

number no less than 10, if the set value is less than 10, send as 200Hz.

When outputting the segmented pulse, if the current segment’s pulse has been set out,

while meantime it doesn’t reach the highest frequency, then from the current segment to

the next pulse output segment, pulse jump appears, see graph above;

Page 240: PLC Software MANUAL - Xinje-support-centre-listo. · PDF filePLC Software Manual Page 3 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2 3-14 [NOP], [END] 76 3-15 [GROUP], [GROUPE] 77 3-16 Programming Notes 78

PLC Software Manual Page 240 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2

6-5 Sample Programs

FRQM K20 D0 K1 X003X000

PLSF D0 Y0

E.g.2: follow function

In this sample, the pulse frequency from Y0 equals with the frequency tested from X003. If

the frequency tested from X003 changes, the pulse frequency from Y0 changes;

E.g.1: Stop at certain length

With instruction [PLSR] and [PLSNEXT], realize this “stop at certain length” function;

M0

M1

M8170

Take the sample program as the example, set

two segments pulse output in D0, D1 and D2,D3, with the same frequency value; In second

segment pulse output, set pulse number D3

as the output pulse number after receive M1

signal. This will realize “stop at certain length”

function. See graph on the left.

Page 241: PLC Software MANUAL - Xinje-support-centre-listo. · PDF filePLC Software Manual Page 3 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2 3-14 [NOP], [END] 76 3-15 [GROUP], [GROUPE] 77 3-16 Programming Notes 78

PLC Software Manual Page 241 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2

6-6 Relative coils and registers of pulse output

Some flags of pulse output are listed below:

Some special registers of pulse output are listed below:

ID Pulse ID Function Specification

M8170 PULSE_1 “sending pulse” flag Being ON when sending the pulse,

M8171 overflow flag of “32 bits pulse

sending” When overflow, Flag is on

M8172 Direction flag 1 is positive direction, the correspond

direction port is on

M8173 PULSE_2 “sending pulse” flag Being ON when sending the pulse,

M8174 overflow flag of “32 bits pulse

sending” When overflow, Flag is on

M8175 Direction flag 1 is positive direction, the correspond

direction port is on

M8176 PULSE_3 “sending pulse” flag Being ON when sending the pulse,

M8177 overflow flag of “32 bits pulse

sending” When overflow, Flag is on

M8178 Direction flag 1 is positive direction, the correspond

direction port is on

M8179 PULSE_4 “sending pulse” flag Being ON when sending the pulse,

M8180 overflow flag of “32 bits pulse

sending” When overflow, Flag is on

M8181 Direction flag 1 is positive direction, the correspond

direction port is on

M8210 PULSE_1 Pulse alarm flag (frequency change

suddenly) 1 is alarm, 0 is correct

M8211 Neglect the alarm or not When flag is 1, stop sending alarm

M8212 PULSE_2 Pulse alarm flag (frequency change

suddenly) 1 is alarm, 0 is correct

M8213 Neglect the alarm or not When flag is 1, stop sending alarm

M8214 PULSE_3 Pulse alarm flag (frequency change

suddenly) 1 is alarm, 0 is correct

M8215 Neglect the alarm or not When flag is 1, stop sending alarm

M8216 PULSE_4 Pulse alarm flag (frequency change

suddenly) 1 is alarm, 0 is correct

M8217 Neglect the alarm or not When flag is 1, stop sending alarm

M8218 PULSE_5 Pulse alarm flag (frequency change

suddenly) 1 is alarm, 0 is correct

M8219 Neglect the alarm or not When flag is 1, stop sending alarm

Page 242: PLC Software MANUAL - Xinje-support-centre-listo. · PDF filePLC Software Manual Page 3 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2 3-14 [NOP], [END] 76 3-15 [GROUP], [GROUPE] 77 3-16 Programming Notes 78

PLC Software Manual Page 242 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2

ID Pulse ID Function Specification

D8170 PULSE_1 The low 16 bits of accumulated pulse number

D8171 The high 16 bits of accumulated pulse number

D8172 The current segment (means Nr.n segment)

D8173 PULSE_2 The low 16 bits of accumulated pulse number

D8174 The high 16 bits of accumulated pulse number

D8175 The current segment (means Nr.n segment)

D8176 PULSE_3 The low 16 bits of accumulated pulse number

D8177 The high 16 bits of accumulated pulse number

D8178 The current segment (means Nr.n segment)

D8179 PULSE_4 The low 16 bits of accumulated pulse number

D8180 The high 16 bits of accumulated pulse number

D8181 The current segment (means Nr.n segment)

D8190 PULSE_1 The low 16 bits of the current accumulated

current pulse number

D8191 The high 16 bits of the current accumulated

current pulse number

D8192 PULSE_2 The low 16 bits of the current accumulated

current pulse number

D8193 The high 16 bits of the current accumulated

current pulse number

D8194 PULSE_3 The low 16 bits of the current accumulated

current pulse number

Only XC5-32RT-E

(4PLS) model has

D8195 The high 16 bits of the current accumulated

current pulse number

D8196 PULSE_4 The low 16 bits of the current accumulated

current pulse number

D8197 The high 16 bits of the current accumulated

current pulse number

D8210 PULSE_1 The error pulse segment’s position

D8212 PULSE_2 The error pulse segment’s position

D8214 PULSE_3 The error pulse segment’s position

D8216 PULSE_4 The error pulse segment’s position

D8218 PULSE_5 The error pulse segment’s position

Page 243: PLC Software MANUAL - Xinje-support-centre-listo. · PDF filePLC Software Manual Page 3 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2 3-14 [NOP], [END] 76 3-15 [GROUP], [GROUPE] 77 3-16 Programming Notes 78

PLC Software Manual Page 243 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2

Absolute position/relative position/back to origin;

ID Pulse Function Description

D8230 PULSE_1

Rising time of the absolute/relation position

instruction (Y0)

D8231 Falling time of the origin return instruction (Y0)

D8232 PULSE_2

Rising time of the absolute/relation position

instruction (Y1)

D8233 Falling time of the origin return instruction (Y1)

D8234 PULSE_3

Rising time of the absolute/relation position

instruction (Y2)

D8235 Falling time of the origin return instruction (Y2)

D8236 PULSE_4

Rising time of the absolute/relation position

instruction (Y3)

D8237 Falling time of the origin return instruction (Y3)

D8238 PULSE_5

Rising time of the absolute/relation position

instruction

D8239 Falling time of the origin return instruction

Page 244: PLC Software MANUAL - Xinje-support-centre-listo. · PDF filePLC Software Manual Page 3 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2 3-14 [NOP], [END] 76 3-15 [GROUP], [GROUPE] 77 3-16 Programming Notes 78

PLC Software Manual Page 244 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2

7 Communication Function

This chapter includes: basic concepts of communication, Modbus communication, free

communication and CAN-bus communication;

7-1.Summary

7-2.Modbus Communication

7-3.Free Communication

7-4.CAN Communication

Page 245: PLC Software MANUAL - Xinje-support-centre-listo. · PDF filePLC Software Manual Page 3 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2 3-14 [NOP], [END] 76 3-15 [GROUP], [GROUPE] 77 3-16 Programming Notes 78

PLC Software Manual Page 245 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2

Relative Instructions:

Mnemonic Function Circuit and Soft Components Chapter

MODBUS Communication

COLR Coil Read

7-2-3

INPR Input coil read INPR S1 S2 S3 D1 D2

7-2-3

COLW Single coil write COLW D1 D2 S1 S2

7-2-3

MCLW Multi-coil write MCLW D1 D2 D3 S1 S2

7-2-3

REGR Register read REGR S1 S2 S3 D1 D2

7-2-3

INRR Input register read INRR S1 S2 S3 D1 D2

7-2-3

REGW Single register write REGW D1 D2 S1 S2

7-2-3

MRGW Multi-register write MRGW D1 D2 D3 S1 S2

7-2-3

Free Communication

SEND Send data SEND S1 S2 n

7-3-2

RCV Receive data RCV S1 S2 n

7-3-2

CAN-bus Communication

CCOLR Read coil

7-4-4

CCOLW Write coil

7-4-4

CREGR Read register CREGR S1 S2 S3 D

7-4-4

CREGW Write register CREGW D1 D2 D3 S

7-4-4

Page 246: PLC Software MANUAL - Xinje-support-centre-listo. · PDF filePLC Software Manual Page 3 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2 3-14 [NOP], [END] 76 3-15 [GROUP], [GROUPE] 77 3-16 Programming Notes 78

PLC Software Manual Page 246 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2

7-1 Summary

XC2-PLC, XC3-PLC, XC5-PLC main units can fulfill your requirements for communication

and networking. They not only support simple networks (Modbus protocol, Free

Communication protocol), but also support complicated networks.

XC2-PLC, XC3-PLC, XC5-PLC offer communication accessthat enables communication

with peripheral devices (such as printers, instruments etc.) that have their own

communication protocol.

XC2-PLC, XC3-PLC, XC5-PLC all support Modbus protocol and Free protocol however,

the XC5-PLC also supports CAN-Bus functions.

7-1-1 COM Port

There are 2 COM ports (Port1、Port2) on XC3 Series PLC basic units, while there are 3

COM ports on XC5 Series PLC main units. In addition to the same COM ports (COM1、COM2),

they have also CAN COM port.

COM 1 (Port1) is the program port, it can be used to download the program and connect

with the other devices. The parameters (baud rate, data bit etc.) of this COM port are fixed,

can’t be re-set.

COM 2 (Port2) is communication port, it can be used to download a program and connect

with the other devices. The parameters (baud rate, data bit etc.) of this COM port can be re-set

via software.

Via BD cards, XC Series PLCs can accommodate other COM ports. These COM ports

can be RS232 and RS485.

Y

X

X0X1COM

COM X2X3

X4X5

X6X7

X10X11

X12X13

X14X15

X16X17

X20X21

X22X23

X24X25

X26X27

X30X37

X40X36X35

X34X33

X32X31 X41

X42X43

Y27Y26

Y25Y24

Y15Y17

COM6Y21

Y20COM7

Y23Y22Y16

Y13Y14COM5

Y11Y12

Y7Y10

Y6COM4

Y4Y5

COM3Y3

Y2Y1COM2

Y0COM1COM0

CAN+CAN-

AB0V

24V

PORT2PORT1XC5- 60R- E

ERRRUNPWR

0 1 32 6 754

4 5 762 310

COM Port

Page 247: PLC Software MANUAL - Xinje-support-centre-listo. · PDF filePLC Software Manual Page 3 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2 3-14 [NOP], [END] 76 3-15 [GROUP], [GROUPE] 77 3-16 Programming Notes 78

PLC Software Manual Page 247 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2

1: RS232 COM Port

2: RS485 COM port:

For the RS485 COM port, A is “+” signal、B is “-“ signal.

The A, B terminals (RS485) on XC Series PLCs come from COM2, so, you cannot connect a

device to the COM2 plug socket and also to the A & B terminals.

3: CAN COM port:

CAN port can be used to realize CAN-Bus communication. The pin terminals are “CAN+”,

“CAN-“

For the detailed CAN communication functions, please refer to “6-8.CAN-Bus function (XC5

series)”

COM1 Pin Definition:

3 4 51 2

6 87

Mini Din 8 pin female

2:PRG

4:RxD

5:TxD

COM2 Pin Definition:

3 4 51 2

6 87

Mini Din 8 pin female

4:RxD

5:TxD

Page 248: PLC Software MANUAL - Xinje-support-centre-listo. · PDF filePLC Software Manual Page 3 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2 3-14 [NOP], [END] 76 3-15 [GROUP], [GROUPE] 77 3-16 Programming Notes 78

PLC Software Manual Page 248 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2

7-1-2 Communication Parameters

Station Modbus Station number: 1~254、255 (FF) is free format communication

Baud Rate 300bps~115.2Kbps

Data Bit 8 bits data、7 bits data

Stop Bit 2 stop bits、1 stop bit

Parity Even、Odd、No check

The default parameters of COM 1:

Station number is 1, baud rate is 19200bps, 8 data bit, 1 stop bit, Even

COM 1

Number Function Description

FD8210 Communication mode 255 is free format,

1~254 bit is Modbus station number

FD8211 Communication format Baud rate, data bit, stop bit, parity

FD8212 ASC timeout judgment time Unit: ms,if set to be 0, it means no timeout

waiting

FD8213 Reply timeout judgment time Unit: ms,if set to be 0, it means no timeout

waiting

FD8214 Start symbol High 8 bits invalid

FD8215 End symbol High 8 bits invalid

FD8216 Free format setting

8/16 bits cushion,

with/without start bit,

with/without stop bit

Set the parameters with the COM ports on XC series PLC;

Communication Parameters

Parameters Setting

Page 249: PLC Software MANUAL - Xinje-support-centre-listo. · PDF filePLC Software Manual Page 3 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2 3-14 [NOP], [END] 76 3-15 [GROUP], [GROUPE] 77 3-16 Programming Notes 78

PLC Software Manual Page 249 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2

COM 2

FD8220 Communication mode 255 is free format,

1~254 bit is Modbus station number

FD8221 Communication format Baud rate, data bit, stop bit, parity

FD8222 ASC timeout judgment time Unit: ms,if set to be 0, it means no timeout

waiting

FD8223 Reply timeout judgment time Unit: ms,if set to be 0, it means no timeout

waiting

FD8224 Start symbol High 8 bits invalid

FD8225 End symbol High 8 bits invalid

FD8226 Free format setting

8/16 bits cushion,

with/without start bit,

with/without stop bit

COM 3

FD8230 Communication mode 255 is free format,

1~254 bit is Modbus station number

FD8231 Communication format Baud rate, data bit, stop bit, parity

FD8232 ASC timeout judgment time Unit: ms,if set to be 0, it means no timeout

waiting

FD8233 Reply timeout judgment time Unit: ms,if set to be 0, it means no timeout

waiting

FD8234 Start symbol High 8 bits invalid

FD8235 End symbol High 8 bits invalid

FD8236 Free format setting

8/16 bits cushion,

with/without start bit,

with/without stop bit

※1: The PLC will be offline after changing the communication parameters, use “stop when reboot”

function to keep PLC online.

※2: After modifying the data with special FLASH data registers, the new data will come into effect after

reboot.

Page 250: PLC Software MANUAL - Xinje-support-centre-listo. · PDF filePLC Software Manual Page 3 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2 3-14 [NOP], [END] 76 3-15 [GROUP], [GROUPE] 77 3-16 Programming Notes 78

PLC Software Manual Page 250 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2

0:300bps

1:600bps

2:1200 bps

3:2400 bps

4:4800 bps

0:8bits data

0:2 stop bits

0:No check

1:Odd check

2:Even check

0: 8 bits communication

1: 16 bits communication

0: without start symbol

1: with start symbol

0: without end symbol

1: with end symbol

Reserved

FD8211 (COM1)/FD8221 (COM2)/FD8231 (COM3)

FD8216 (COM1)/FD8226 (COM2)/FD8236 (COM3)

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

Set Communication Parameters

Page 251: PLC Software MANUAL - Xinje-support-centre-listo. · PDF filePLC Software Manual Page 3 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2 3-14 [NOP], [END] 76 3-15 [GROUP], [GROUPE] 77 3-16 Programming Notes 78

PLC Software Manual Page 251 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2

7-2 Modbus Communication

7-2-1 Function

XC Series PLCs support both Modbus master and Modbus slave.

MASTER FORMAT: When PLC is set to be master, PLC sends request to other slave devices

via Modbus instructions, other devices respond to the master unit.

SLAVE FORMAT: when PLC is set to be slave, it can only communicate with master devices.

The default status of XC-PLC is Modbus slave.

7-2-2 Address For the soft component’s number in PLC which corresponds with Modbus address number,

please see the following table:

Coil Space: (Modbus ID prefix is “0x”)

Bit ID ModbusID

( decimal K)

Modbus ID

(Hex. H)

M0~M7999 0~7999 0~1F3F

X0~X1037 16384~16927 4000~421F

Y0~Y1037 18432~18975 4800~4A1F

S0~S1023 20480~21503 5000~53FF

M8000~M8511 24576~25087 6000~61FF

T0~T618 25600~26218 6400~666A

C0~C634 27648~28282 6C00~6E7A

Register Space: (Modbus ID prefix is “4x”)

Word ID ModbusID

( decimal K)

Modbus ID

(Hex. H)

D0~D7999 0~7999 0~1F3F

TD0~TD618 12288~12906 3000~326A

CD0~CD634 14336~14970 3800~3A7A

D8000~D8511 16384~16895 4000~41FF

FD0~FD5000 18432~23432 4800~5B88

FD8000~FD8511 26624~27135 6800~69FF

※1: Bit soft components X、Y are in Octal form, the left are in decimal form.

Page 252: PLC Software MANUAL - Xinje-support-centre-listo. · PDF filePLC Software Manual Page 3 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2 3-14 [NOP], [END] 76 3-15 [GROUP], [GROUPE] 77 3-16 Programming Notes 78

PLC Software Manual Page 252 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2

7-2-3 Communication Instructions Modbus instructions include coil read/write, register read/write; below, we describe these

instructions in details:

Coil Read [COLR] 1: Instruction Summary

Read the specified station’s specified coil status to the local PLC;

Coil read [COLR]

16 bits

instruction

COLR 32 bits

instruction

-

Execution

Condition

Normally ON/OFF coil Suitable

Models XC2、XC3、XC5、XCM

Hardware

Requirement

- Software

Requirement

-

2: Operands

Operands Function Type

S1 Specify the remote communication station or soft component’s

ID

16bits, BIN

S2 Specify the remote coil’s start ID or soft component’s ID 16bits, BIN

S3 Specify the coil number or soft component’s ID 16bits, BIN

D1 Specify the start ID of the local receive coils bit

D2 Specify the serial port’s number 16bits, BIN 3: Suitable soft components

COLR K1 K500 K3 M1X0

K2

S1· S2· S3· D1· D2·

Read coil instruction, Modbus code is 01H。

Serial Port: K1~K3

Input Coil Read [INPR]

Operands Operands

X Y M S T C Dn.m

D1 ● ● ● ● ● ●

Word

Bit

Operands System constant module

D FD ED TD CD DX DY DM DS K /H ID QD

S1 ● ● ● ● ●

S2 ● ● ● ● ●

S3 ● ● ● ● ●

D2 K

Function

Page 253: PLC Software MANUAL - Xinje-support-centre-listo. · PDF filePLC Software Manual Page 3 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2 3-14 [NOP], [END] 76 3-15 [GROUP], [GROUPE] 77 3-16 Programming Notes 78

PLC Software Manual Page 253 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2

1: Instruction

Read the specified station’s specified input coils into local coils:

Input coil read [INPR]

16 bits

instruction

INPR 32 bits instruction -

Execution

Condition Normally ON/OFF、rising edge

Suitable Models XC2、XC3、XC5、XCM

Hardware

Requirement

- Software

Requirement

-

2: Operands

Operands Function Type

S1 Specify the remote communication station or soft component’s ID 16bits, BIN

S2 Specify the remote coil’s start ID or soft component’s ID 16bits, BIN

S3 Specify the coil number or soft component’s ID 16bits, BIN

D1 Specify the start ID of the local receive coils bit

D2 Specify the serial port’s number 16bits, BIN

3: Suitable Soft Components

INPR K1 K500 K3 M1X0

K2

S1· S2· S3· D1· D2·

Instruction to read the input coil, Modbus code is 02H

Serial port: K1~K3

When X0 is ON, execute COLR or INPR instruction, set communication flag after

execution of the instruction; when X0 is OFF, no operation. If error happens during

communication, it resends automatically. If 3 errors are noted, the communication error

flag will be set. The user can check the relative registers to judge the error.

Single Coil Write [COLW]

Operands System

X Y M S T C Dn.m

D1 ● ● ● ● ● ●

Word

Bit

Operands System constant module

D FD ED TD CD DX DY DM DS K /H ID QD

S1 ● ● ● ● ●

S2 ● ● ● ● ●

S3 ● ● ● ● ●

D2 K

Function

Page 254: PLC Software MANUAL - Xinje-support-centre-listo. · PDF filePLC Software Manual Page 3 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2 3-14 [NOP], [END] 76 3-15 [GROUP], [GROUPE] 77 3-16 Programming Notes 78

PLC Software Manual Page 254 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2

1: Summary

Write the local coil status to the specified station’s specified coil;

Single coil write [COLW]

16 bits

instruction

COLW 32 bits

instruction

-

Execution

Condition Normally ON/OFF、rising edge

Suitable

Models XC2、XC3、XC5、XCM

Hardware

Requirement

- Software

Requirement

-

2: Operands

Operands Function Type

D1 Specify the remote communication station or soft component’s ID 16bits, BIN

D2 Specify the remote coil’s start ID or soft component’s ID 16bits, BIN

S1 Specify the start ID of the local receive coils bit

S2 Specify the serial port’s number 16bits, BIN

3: Suitable soft components

COLW K1 K500 M1X0

K2

D1· D2· S1· S2·

Write the single coil, Modbus code is 05H

Serial port: K1~K3

Multi-coil Write [MCLW]

1:Summary

Operands System

X Y M S T C Dn.m

S1 ● ● ● ● ● ●

Word

Bit

Operands System constant module

D FD ED TD CD DX DY DM DS K /H ID QD

D1 ● ● ● ● ●

D2 ● ● ● ● ●

S2 K

Function

Page 255: PLC Software MANUAL - Xinje-support-centre-listo. · PDF filePLC Software Manual Page 3 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2 3-14 [NOP], [END] 76 3-15 [GROUP], [GROUPE] 77 3-16 Programming Notes 78

PLC Software Manual Page 255 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2

Write the local multi-coil status into the specified station’s specified coil;

Multi-coil write [MCLW]

16 bits

instruction

MCLW 32 bits instruction -

Execution

Condition Normally ON/OFF、rising edge

Suitable Models XC2、XC3、XC5、XCM

Hardware

Requirement

- Software

Requirement

-

2: Operands

Operands Function Type

D1 Specify the remote communication station or soft component’s

ID

16bits, BIN

D2 Specify the remote coil’s start ID or soft component’s ID 16bits, BIN

D3 Specify the coil number or soft component’s ID 16bits, BIN

S1 Specify the start ID of the local receive coils bit

S2 Specify the serial port’s number 16bits, BIN 3: Suitable soft components

MCLW K1 K500 K3 M1X0

K2

D1· S1· S2·D2· D3·

Instruction to write the multiply coils, Modbus code is 0FH

Serial port: K1~K3

When X0 is ON, execute COLW or MCLW instruction, set communication flag after

execution the instruction; when X0 is OFF, no operation. If error happens during

communication, it resends automatically. If 4 errors are noted, the communication error

flag will be set. The user can check the relative registers to judge the error.

Register Read [REGR]

1: Summary

Operands System

X Y M S T C Dn.m

S1 ● ● ● ● ● ●

Word

Bit

Operands System constant module

D FD ED TD CD DX DY DM DS K /H ID QD

D1 ● ● ● ● ●

D2 ● ● ● ● ●

D3 ● ● ● ● ●

S2 K

Function

Page 256: PLC Software MANUAL - Xinje-support-centre-listo. · PDF filePLC Software Manual Page 3 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2 3-14 [NOP], [END] 76 3-15 [GROUP], [GROUPE] 77 3-16 Programming Notes 78

PLC Software Manual Page 256 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2

Read the specified station’s specified register to the local register;

Register read [REGR]

16 bits

instruction

REGR 32 bits

instruction

-

Execution

Condition Normally ON/OFF、rising edge

Suitable

Models XC2、XC3、XC5、XCM

Hardware

Requirement

- Software

Requirement

-

2: Operands

Operands Function Type

S1 Specify the remote communication station or soft component’s ID 16bits, BIN

S2 Specify the remote coil’s start ID or soft component’s ID 16bits, BIN

S3 Specify the coil number or soft component’s ID 16bits, BIN

D1 Specify the start ID of the local receive coils bit

D2 Specify the serial port’s number 16bits, BIN

3: Suitable soft components

REGR K1 K500 K3 D1X0

K2

S1· S2· S3· D1· D2·

Instruction to read the REGISTERS, Modbus code is 03H

Serial port: K1~K3

Register Input Read [INNR]

1: Summary

Read the specified station’s specified input register to the local register

Word Operands System constant module

D FD ED TD CD DX DY DM DS K /H ID QD

S1 ● ● ● ● ●

S2 ● ● ● ● ●

S3 ● ● ● ● ●

D1 ●

D2 K

Function

Page 257: PLC Software MANUAL - Xinje-support-centre-listo. · PDF filePLC Software Manual Page 3 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2 3-14 [NOP], [END] 76 3-15 [GROUP], [GROUPE] 77 3-16 Programming Notes 78

PLC Software Manual Page 257 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2

Read Input Register [INRR]

16 bits

instruction

INRR 32 bits

instruction

-

Execution

Condition Normally ON/OFF、rising edge

Suitable

Models XC2、XC3、XC5、XCM

Hardware

Requirement

- Software

Requirement

-

2:Operands

Operands Function Type

S1 Specify the remote communication station or soft component’s ID 16bits, BIN

S2 Specify the remote coil’s start ID or soft component’s ID 16bits, BIN

S3 Specify the coil number or soft component’s ID 16bits, BIN

D1 Specify the start ID of the local receive coils bit

D2 Specify the serial port’s number 16bits, BIN

3: Suitable soft components

INRR K1 K500 K3 D1X0

K2

S1· S2· S3· D1· D2·

Instruction to read the input registers, Modbus code is 04H

Serial port: K1~K3

When X0 is ON, execute REGR or INRR instruction, set communication flag after

execution the instruction; when X0 is OFF, no operation. If error happens during

communication, it resends automatically. If 4 errors are noted, the communication error

flag will be set. The user can check the relative registers to judge the error.

Single Register Write [REGW]

1: Summary

Instruction to write the local specified register into the specified station’s specified register;

Word Operands System constant module

D FD ED TD CD DX DY DM DS K /H ID QD

S1 ● ● ● ● ●

S2 ● ● ● ● ●

S3 ● ● ● ● ●

D1 ●

D2 K

Function

Page 258: PLC Software MANUAL - Xinje-support-centre-listo. · PDF filePLC Software Manual Page 3 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2 3-14 [NOP], [END] 76 3-15 [GROUP], [GROUPE] 77 3-16 Programming Notes 78

PLC Software Manual Page 258 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2

Single register write [REGW]

16 bits

instruction

REGW 32 bits

instruction

-

Execution

Condition Normally ON/OFF、rising edge

Suitable

Models XC2、XC3、XC5、XCM

Hardware

Requirement

- Software

Requirement

-

2: Operands

Operands Function Type

D1 Specify the remote communication station or soft

component’s ID

16bits, BIN

D2 Specify the remote coil’s start ID or soft

component’s ID

16bits, BIN

S1 Specify the start ID of the local receive coils 16bits, BIN

S2 Specify the serial port’s number 16bits, BIN

3: Suitable soft components

REGW K1 K500 D1X0

K2

D1· S1· S2·D2·

Write the single register, Modbus code is 06H

Serial port: K1~K3

Multi-register write [MRGW]

1:Summary

Instruction to write the local specified register to the specified station’s specified register;

Word Operands System constant module

D FD ED TD CD DX DY DM DS K /H ID QD

D1 ● ● ● ● ●

D2 ● ● ● ● ●

S1 ●

S2 K

Function

Page 259: PLC Software MANUAL - Xinje-support-centre-listo. · PDF filePLC Software Manual Page 3 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2 3-14 [NOP], [END] 76 3-15 [GROUP], [GROUPE] 77 3-16 Programming Notes 78

PLC Software Manual Page 259 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2

Multi-register write [MRGW]

16 bits

instruction

MRGW 32 bits

instruction

-

Execution

Condition Normally ON/OFF 、 rising

edge

Suitable

Models XC2、XC3、XC5、XCM

Hardware

Requirement

- Software

Requirement

-

2: Operands

Operands Function Type

D1 Specify the remote communication station or soft

component’s ID

16bits, BIN

D2 Specify the remote coil’s start ID or soft

component’s ID

16bits, BIN

D3 Specify the coil number or soft component’s ID 16bits, BIN

S1 Specify the start ID of the local receive coils bit

S2 Specify the serial port’s number 16bits, BIN

3: Suitable soft components

MRGW K1 K500 K3 D1X0

K2

D1· D2· D3· S1· S2·

Instruction to write the multiply registers, Modbus code is 10H

Serial port: K1~K3

When X0 is ON, execute REGW or MRGW instruction, set communication flag after execution

the instruction; when X0 is OFF, no operation. If error happens during communication, it

resends automatically. If 4 errors are noted, the communication error flag will be set. The user

can check the relative registers to judge the error.

Word Operands System constant module

D FD ED TD CD DX DY DM DS K /H ID QD

D1 ● ● ● ● ●

D2 ● ● ● ● ●

S1 ●

S2 K

Function

Page 260: PLC Software MANUAL - Xinje-support-centre-listo. · PDF filePLC Software Manual Page 3 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2 3-14 [NOP], [END] 76 3-15 [GROUP], [GROUPE] 77 3-16 Programming Notes 78

PLC Software Manual Page 260 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2

7-3 Free Format Communication

7-3-1 Communication Mode

Free format communication transfer data in the form of data block, each block can transfer a

maximum of 128 bytes. Each block can set a start symbol and stop symbol, or not set.

Communication Mode:

Port1, Port2 or Port3 can realize free format communication

Under free format form, FD8220 or FD8230 should set to be 255 (FF)

Baud Rate: 300bps~115.2Kbps

Data Format

Data Bit: 7bits、8bits

Parity: Odd, Even, No Check

Stop bit: 1 bit,2 bits

Start Symbol: 1 bit

Stop Symbol: 1 bit

User can set a start/stop symbol, after set the start/stop symbol, PLC will automatically add

this start/stop symbol when sending data; remove this start/stop symbol when receiving

data.

Communication Format: 8 bits,16 bits

If utilizing 8 bits buffer format to communicate, within the communication process, the high

bytes are invalid, PLCs only use the low bytes to send and receive data.

If utilizing 16 bits buffer format to communicate, when PLC is sending data, PLC will send

low bytes before sending higher bytes

Start Symbol (1 byte) Data Block (max. 128 bytes) End Symbol (1 byte)

Page 261: PLC Software MANUAL - Xinje-support-centre-listo. · PDF filePLC Software Manual Page 3 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2 3-14 [NOP], [END] 76 3-15 [GROUP], [GROUPE] 77 3-16 Programming Notes 78

PLC Software Manual Page 261 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2

7-3-2 Instruction Form Send Data [SEND] 1: Summary

Write the local specified data to the specified station’s specified ID;

Send data [SEND]

16 bits

instruction

SEND 32 bits

instruction

-

Execution

Condition Normally ON/OFF 、 rising

edge

Suitable

Models XC2、XC3、XC5、XCM

Hardware

Requirement

- Software

Requirement

-

2: Operands

Operands Function Type

S1 Specify the start ID of local PLC 16bits, BIN

S2 Specify the ASC number to send or soft component’s

ID

16bits, BIN

n Specify the COM port Nr. 16bits, BIN 3: Suitable soft components

SEND D10 D100 K2

S1· S2· nM0

Data send instruction, send data on the rising edge of M0;

Serial port: K2~K3

When sending data, set “sending” flag M8132 (COM2) ON

Word Operands System constant module

D FD ED TD CD DX DY DM DS K /H ID QD

S1 ● ● ● ●

S2 ● ● ● ● ●

n ● K

Function

Page 262: PLC Software MANUAL - Xinje-support-centre-listo. · PDF filePLC Software Manual Page 3 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2 3-14 [NOP], [END] 76 3-15 [GROUP], [GROUPE] 77 3-16 Programming Notes 78

PLC Software Manual Page 262 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2

Receive Data [RCV] 1: Summary

Write the specified station’s data to the local specified ID;

Receive data [RCV]

16 bits

instruction

RCV 32 bits

instruction

-

Execution

Condition Normally ON/OFF 、 rising

edge

Suitable

Models XC2、XC3、XC5、XCM

Hardware

Requirement

- Software

Requirement

-

2: Operands

Operands Function Type

S1 Specify the start ID of local PLC 16bits, BIN

S2 Specify the ASC number to receive or soft component’s ID 16bits, BIN

n Specify the COM port Nr. 16bits, BIN 3: Suitable soft components

RCV D20 D200 K2

S1· S2· nM1

Data receive instruction, receive data on the rising edge of M0;

Serial port: K2~K3

When receiving data, set “receiving” flag M8134(COM2) ON

※1: If you require PLC to receive but not send, or receive before send, you need to set

the communication timeout as 0ms

Word Operands System constant module

D FD ED TD CD DX DY DM DS K /H ID QD

S1 ● ● ● ●

S2 ● ● ● ● ●

n ●

Function

Page 263: PLC Software MANUAL - Xinje-support-centre-listo. · PDF filePLC Software Manual Page 3 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2 3-14 [NOP], [END] 76 3-15 [GROUP], [GROUPE] 77 3-16 Programming Notes 78

PLC Software Manual Page 263 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2

7-4 CAN-Bus Format

7-4-1 Brief Introduction of CAN-Bus

XC5 Series PLCs support CAN-Bus functions. Below we will give some basic concept on

CAN-Bus;

CAN (Controller Area Network) belongs to the industrial area bus category. Compared with

common communication bus, CAN-Bus data communication has performance of outstanding

dependability, real time ability and flexibility.

CAN controller works under multi-master format. In the network, each node can send data to

the bus according to the bus visit priority. These characters enable each node in the CAN-Bus

network to have stronger data communication real time performance, and easy to construct a

redundant structure, improving the system’s dependability and flexibility.

In CAN-Bus networks, any node can initiatively send message at any time to any other node,

no master and no slave. Enabling flexible communication; it’s easy to compose multi-device

backup system, distributing format monitor, control system. To fulfill different real time

requirements, the nodes can be divided to be different priority levels. With non-destroy bus

arbitrament technology, when two nodes send message to the network at the same time, the

low level priority node intuitively stops data sending, while high level priority node can continue

transferring data without any influence. This gives functions of node to node, node to

multi-node, bureau broadcasting sending/receiving data. Each frame’s valid byte number is 8,

so the transfer time is short, the probability ratio is low.

Page 264: PLC Software MANUAL - Xinje-support-centre-listo. · PDF filePLC Software Manual Page 3 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2 3-14 [NOP], [END] 76 3-15 [GROUP], [GROUPE] 77 3-16 Programming Notes 78

PLC Software Manual Page 264 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2

7-4-2 External Wiring

CAN-Bus Communication Port: CAN+、CAN-

The wiring among each node of CAN-Bus is shown in the following graph; at the two ends, add

120 ohm middle-terminal resistors.

7-4-3 CAN-Bus Network Form

There are two forms of CAN-Bus network: one is instructions communication format; the

other is internal protocol communication format. These two forms can work at the same

time

Instructions communication format

This format means, in the local PLC program, via CAN-Bus instructions, execute bit or

word reading/writing with the specified remote PLC.

Internal protocol communication format

This format means, via setting of special register, via configure table format, realize allude

with each other among PLC’s certain soft component’s space. In this way, realize PLC

source sharing in CAN-Bus network.

7-4-4 CAN-Bus Instructions

120R 120R

00 01 02

CAN+ CAN- CAN+ CAN- CAN+ CAN-

Page 265: PLC Software MANUAL - Xinje-support-centre-listo. · PDF filePLC Software Manual Page 3 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2 3-14 [NOP], [END] 76 3-15 [GROUP], [GROUPE] 77 3-16 Programming Notes 78

PLC Software Manual Page 265 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2

Read Coil [CCOLR]

1:Instruction Description

Function:Read the specified station’s specified coil status into the local specified coil.

Read Coil [CCOLR]

16 bits

instruction

CCOLR 32 bits

instruction

-

Execution

Condition

Normally ON/OFF, rising

edge activates

Suitable

Models

XC5

Hardware

Requirement

- Software

Requirement

-

2: Operands

Operands Function Type

S1 Specify remote communication station ID or soft component’s

number;

16bits, BIN

S2 Specify the remote coil’s start ID or soft component’s number; 16bits, BIN

S3 Specify the coil number or soft component’s number; 16bits, BIN

D Specify the local receive coil’s start ID bit 3: Suitable Soft Components

CCOLR K2 M20K20 K4

S1· S2· S3· D·X0

Execute CCOLR instruction when X0 changes from OFF to ON; read the four coils data of

remote station at address 2, coil’s start ID K20 to local M20~M23.

Write the Coil [CCOLW]

1: Summary

Word Operands System Constant Module

D FD ED TD CD DX DY DM DS K /H ID QD

S1 ● ● ● ● ●

S2 ● ● ● ● ●

S3 ● ● ● ● ●

Operands System

X Y M S T C Dn.m

D ● ● ● ● ● ●

Bit

Function

Page 266: PLC Software MANUAL - Xinje-support-centre-listo. · PDF filePLC Software Manual Page 3 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2 3-14 [NOP], [END] 76 3-15 [GROUP], [GROUPE] 77 3-16 Programming Notes 78

PLC Software Manual Page 266 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2

Write the local specified multi-coils status into the specified station’s specified coils;

Write the coil [CCOLW]

16 bits

instruction

CCOLW 32 bits

instruction

-

Execution

Condition Normally ON/OFF 、 rising

edge

Suitable

Models

XC5

Hardware

Requirement

- Software

Requirement

-

2: Operands

Operands Function Type

D1 Specify remote communication station ID or soft

component’s number;

16 BIN

D2 Specify the remote coil’s start ID or soft

component’s number;

16 BIN

D3 Specify the coil number or soft component’s

number;

16 BIN

S Specify the local receive coil’s start ID Position

3: Suitable soft components

CCOLW K2 M20K20 K4X0

S·D1· D2· D3·

Execute CCOLW instruction when X0 changes from OFF to ON; write the local M20~

M23 to the remote station 20th, coil’s start ID K20.

Read Register [CREGR]

1: Summary

Read the specified station’s specified register to the local specified register;

Word Operands System constant module

D FD ED TD CD DX DY DM DS K /H ID QD

S1 ● ● ● ● ●

S2 ● ● ● ● ●

S3 ● ● ● ● ●

Operands System

X Y M S T C Dn.m

D ● ● ● ● ● ●

Bit

Function

Page 267: PLC Software MANUAL - Xinje-support-centre-listo. · PDF filePLC Software Manual Page 3 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2 3-14 [NOP], [END] 76 3-15 [GROUP], [GROUPE] 77 3-16 Programming Notes 78

PLC Software Manual Page 267 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2

Read register [CREGR]

16 bits

instruction

CREGR 32 bits instruction -

Execution

Condition Normally ON/OFF、rising edge

Suitable Models XC5

Hardware

Requirement

- Software

Requirement

-

2: Operands

Operands Function Type

D1 Specify remote communication station ID or soft component’s

number;

16bits, BIN

D2 Specify the remote register’s start ID or soft component’s number; 16bits, BIN

D3 Specify the register number or soft component’s number; 16bits, BIN

S Specify the local receive coil’s start ID 16bits, BIN

3: Suitable soft components

CREGR K2 D20K20 K4

S1· S2· S3· D·X0

Execute CREGR instruction when X0 changes from OFF to ON; read the remote station

2th, coil’s start ID K20 to the local D20~D23

Write the Register [CREGW]

1: Summary

Write the specified local input register to the specified station’s specified register;

Word Operands System constant module

D FD ED TD CD DX DY DM DS K /H ID QD

S1 ● ● ● ● ●

S2 ● ● ● ● ●

S3 ● ● ● ● ●

D ● ● ●

Function

Page 268: PLC Software MANUAL - Xinje-support-centre-listo. · PDF filePLC Software Manual Page 3 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2 3-14 [NOP], [END] 76 3-15 [GROUP], [GROUPE] 77 3-16 Programming Notes 78

PLC Software Manual Page 268 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2

Write the register [CREGW]

16 bits

instruction

CREGW 32 bits

instruction

-

Execution

Condition Normally ON/OFF、rising edge

Suitable

Models

XC5

Hardware

Requirement

- Software

Requirement

-

2: Operands

Operands Function Type

D1 Specify remote communication station ID or soft

component’s number;

16bits, BIN

D2 Specify the remote register’s start ID or soft

component’s number;

16bits, BIN

D3 Specify the register number or soft component’s

number;

16bits, BIN

S Specify the local receive coil’s start ID 16bits, BIN

3: Suitable soft components

CREGW K2 D20K20 K4X0

S·D1· D2· D3·

Execute CREGW instruction when X0 changes from OFF to ON; write the local D20~

D23 to the remote station 2th, coil’s start ID K20.

7-4-5 Communication Form of Internal Protocol

Word Operands System constant module

D FD ED TD CD DX DY DM DS K /H ID QD

S1 ● ● ● ● ●

S2 ● ● ● ● ●

S3 ● ● ● ● ●

D ● ● ●

Function

Function

Page 269: PLC Software MANUAL - Xinje-support-centre-listo. · PDF filePLC Software Manual Page 3 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2 3-14 [NOP], [END] 76 3-15 [GROUP], [GROUPE] 77 3-16 Programming Notes 78

PLC Software Manual Page 269 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2

Open/close the internal protocol communication function

Set the value in register FD8350:

0: do not use CAN internal protocol communication;

1: use CAN internal protocol communication

CAN internal protocol communication is default to be closed

Set the communication parameters

See the setting methods with baud rate, station number, sending frequency etc. in the below

table:

Define the configure items:

Internal protocol communication is to communicate via setting the configure items;

The configure items include: read the bit, read the word, write the bit, write the word;

The configure form:

Step 1: add the four configure items numbers separately: FD8360—read the bit items;

FD8361—read the word items; FD8362—write the bit items; FD8363—write the word items.

Step 2: set each configure item’s communication object, each item includes four parameters:

remote node’s station; remote node’s object ID; local object’s ID; number; the corresponding

register ID is: FD8370~FD8373 represents Nr.1 item; FD8374~FD8377 represents Nr.2

item, ……FD9390~FD9393 represents Nr.256 item. A maximum of 256 items can be set;

see tables below:

Nr. Function Description

FD8350 CAN communication mode 0 represents not use; 1 represents internal protocol

Communication Setting

Page 270: PLC Software MANUAL - Xinje-support-centre-listo. · PDF filePLC Software Manual Page 3 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2 3-14 [NOP], [END] 76 3-15 [GROUP], [GROUPE] 77 3-16 Programming Notes 78

PLC Software Manual Page 270 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2

FD8351 CAN baud rate See CAN baud rate setting table

FD8352 Self CAN station For CAN protocol use (the default value is 1)

FD8354 Configured sending

frequency

The set value’s unit is ms, represents “send every ms”

if set to be 0, it means send every cycle, the default value

is 5ms

FD8360 Read bit number

- FD8361 Read word number

FD8362 write bit number

FD8363 write word number

FD8370 Remote node’s ID

The Nr.1 item’s configuration FD8371 Remote node’s object ID

FD8372 Local object’s ID

FD8373 Number

…… …… ……

FD9390 Remote node’s ID

The Nr.256 item’s configuration FD9391 Remote node’s object ID

FD9392 Local object’s ID

FD9393 Number

FD8351

value

Baud

Rate

(BPS)

0 1K

1 2K

2 5K

3 10K

M8240 CAN self check

error flag

Set 1 if error; set 0 if

correct

M8241 Error flag of CAN

configure

Set 1 if error; set 0 if

correct

If set to be 1, then

recover after error

happens;

Status Flag Baud Rate Setting

Page 271: PLC Software MANUAL - Xinje-support-centre-listo. · PDF filePLC Software Manual Page 3 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2 3-14 [NOP], [END] 76 3-15 [GROUP], [GROUPE] 77 3-16 Programming Notes 78

PLC Software Manual Page 271 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2

7-4-6 CAN Free Format Communication CAN Sending [CSEND]

1: Instructions Summary

Write the specified data from the unit to a specified address (data transfer in one unit)

CAN Sending [CSEND]

D8240 CAN error information

0: no error

2: initialize error

30: bus error

31: error alarm

32: data overflow

D8241 The configure item’s Nr. which has error Show the first number of error

configure item

D8242 Data package number sent every second -

D8243 Data package number received every

second -

D8244 CAN communication error count -

Register Status

Page 272: PLC Software MANUAL - Xinje-support-centre-listo. · PDF filePLC Software Manual Page 3 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2 3-14 [NOP], [END] 76 3-15 [GROUP], [GROUPE] 77 3-16 Programming Notes 78

PLC Software Manual Page 272 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2

16bits

instruction

CSEND 32bits

instruction

-

Executing

Condition Normally ON/OFF、Rising edge

Suitable

Models

XC5

Hardware

Requirement

- Software

Requirement

-

2: Operands

Operands Function Type

S1 specify the ID number to send the data package 16bits, BIN

S2 specify the first ID number of sent data or soft

component locally

16bits, BIN

S3 specify the byte number of sent data 16bits, BIN

3: Suitable soft components

Word

type

Operands System constant module

D FD ED TD CD DX DY DM DS K /H ID QD

S1 ● ● ● ● ●

S2 ● ● ● ●

S3 ● ● ● ● ●

Functions and Actions

Page 273: PLC Software MANUAL - Xinje-support-centre-listo. · PDF filePLC Software Manual Page 3 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2 3-14 [NOP], [END] 76 3-15 [GROUP], [GROUPE] 77 3-16 Programming Notes 78

PLC Software Manual Page 273 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2

CSEND K100 D0 K4

S1· S2·M0

S3·

Instruction to enable data sending, send data at every rising edge of M0

ID number of sending data package is 100, 4 bytes data, the first ID is in D0

8 bits data transfer: the transferred data is: D0L, D1L, D2L, D3L (D0L means the low byte

of D0)

16 bits data transfer: the transferred data is: D0L, D0H, D1L, D1H (D0H means the high

byte of D0)

CSEND D10 D0 D20M0

The ID of sending data package is specified by D10, the data number is specified by D20,

the first ID is in D0;

8 bits data transfer: the transferred data is: D0L, D1L, D2L, D3L (D0L means the low byte

of D0)

16 bits data transfer: the transferred data is: D0L, D0H, D1L, D1H (D0H means the high

byte of D0)

Standard Frame: the valid bits of the data package ID number that is specified by D10 is

the low 11 bits, the left bits are invalid;

The expansion frame: the valid bits of the data package ID number that is specified by

D10 is the low 29 bits, the left bits are invalid;

The maximum data bits specified by D20 is 8, if exceeds 8, the instruction will send only 8

bits;

CAN Receive [CRECV]

1: Instructions Summary

Write the specified data in one unit to a specified address in another unit (data transfers

between different units)

CAN Receive [CRECV]

Page 274: PLC Software MANUAL - Xinje-support-centre-listo. · PDF filePLC Software Manual Page 3 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2 3-14 [NOP], [END] 76 3-15 [GROUP], [GROUPE] 77 3-16 Programming Notes 78

PLC Software Manual Page 274 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2

16 bits

instruction

CRECV 32 bits

instruction

-

Executing

Condition Normally ON/OFF 、 Rising

edge

Suitable

Models

XC5

Hardware

Requirement

- Software

Requirement

-

2: Operands

Operands Function Type

S1 specify the ID number to receive the data package 16bits, BIN

S2 specify the first ID number of received soft

component locally

16bits, BIN

S3 specify the byte number of received data 16bits, BIN

S4 specify the soft component’s start ID number of ID

filter code

16bits, BIN

3: Suitable soft components

Word

Type

Operands System Constant Module

D FD ED TD CD DX DY DM DS K /H ID QD

S1 ● ● ● ●

S2 ● ● ● ●

S3 ● ● ● ●

S4 ●

Functions and Actions

Page 275: PLC Software MANUAL - Xinje-support-centre-listo. · PDF filePLC Software Manual Page 3 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2 3-14 [NOP], [END] 76 3-15 [GROUP], [GROUPE] 77 3-16 Programming Notes 78

PLC Software Manual Page 275 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2

CRECV D0 D10 D20

S1· S2·M0

S3·

D30

S4·

The 32 bits memory combined by [D1, D0] (D0 is low byte, D1 is high byte) is used to

stock ID number of the received data package. The received data length is stored in D20.

The data content is stored in registers start from D10. D30 specifies the received ID filter

code; if the received data doesn’t fit the filter codes, then it will keep the RECV status;

ID filter code: D30 specifies the start address of ID filter codes; the instruction specifies

two groups of filter codes, occupy D30~D37 zone;

Filter

Code

Memory Description Example

The

first

group

D31, D30 D30 low bytes, D31 high bytes,

they compose a 32 bits mask

code

D30=0xFFFF, D31=0x0000, then the

mask code is 0x0000FFFF

D30=0x1234, D31=0x0000, then filter

value is 0x00001234

If ID and 0x0000FFFF equals

0x00001234, the pass the first group

of filter. If the ID pass any of two

groups, the allow the reception

D33, D32 D32 low bytes, D33 high bytes,

they compose a 32 bits filter

value

The

first

group

D35, D34 D34 low bytes, D35 high bytes,

they compose a 32 bits mask

code

D37, D36 D36 low bytes, D37 high bytes,

they compose a 32 bits filter

value

Standard/ expansion frame: the setting of FD8358 has no effect to reception. If the data

frame fulfills ID mask codes, the standard frame and the expansion frames can be all

received. When receive the standard frame, the ID bits is 11, but will still occupy the 32

bits memory combined by [D1,D0]

8 bits data transfer: the transfer data is: D0L, D1L, D2L, D3L……(D0L means the low byte

of D0)

16 bits data transfer: the transfer data is: D0L, D0H, D1L, D1H……(D0H means the high

byte of D0)

Relate Special Soft Components List

1: System FD8000 Setting

Page 276: PLC Software MANUAL - Xinje-support-centre-listo. · PDF filePLC Software Manual Page 3 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2 3-14 [NOP], [END] 76 3-15 [GROUP], [GROUPE] 77 3-16 Programming Notes 78

PLC Software Manual Page 276 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2

ID Function Description

FD8350 CAN Mode

0: not usable

1: XC-CAN network

2: Free format FREE

FD8351 CAN baud rate

0, 1KBPS initial value, actual is 5KBPS.

1, 2KBPS initial value, actual is 5KBPS.

2, 5KBPS initial value

3, 10KBPS initial value

4, 20KBPS initial value

5, 40KBPS initial value

6, 50KBPS initial value

7, 80KBPS initial value

8, 100KBPS initial value

9, 150KBPS initial value

10, 200KBPS initial value

11, 250KBPS initial value

12, 300KBPS initial value

13, 400KBPS initial value

14, 500KBPS initial value

15, 600KBPS initial value

16, 800KBPS initial value

17, 1000KBPS initial value

FD8358 CAN free format

mode

low 8 bits: 0-standard frame .

low 8 bits: 1-expansion frame

high 8 bits: 0-8 bits data store

high 8 bits: 1-16 bits data store

FD8359 CAN accept

timeout time for free format using, unit: ms

CAN send timeout

time fixed to be 5ms

2: System M8000 flag

ID Function Description

M8240 CAN error flag ON: error happens

Page 277: PLC Software MANUAL - Xinje-support-centre-listo. · PDF filePLC Software Manual Page 3 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2 3-14 [NOP], [END] 76 3-15 [GROUP], [GROUPE] 77 3-16 Programming Notes 78

PLC Software Manual Page 277 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2

OFF: normal

if set M8242 as ON, and manually set M8240 as

ON, this will enable CAN reset

M8241 CAN node dropped off flag

XC-CAN mode valid

ON: certain node/nodes are dropped off

OFF: Normal

M8242 do reset or not if CAN error

happens

ON: CAN reset automatically when error happens

OFF: take no operation when error happens

M8243 CAN send/accept finished

flag

FREE mode valid

ON: receive/accept finish

reset ON automatically when starting to

send/accept

M8244 CAN send/accept timeout

flag

FREE mode valid

ON: send/accept timeout

Set OFF automatically when starting to send/accept

3: System D8000

ID Function Description

D8240 CAN error information

0: no error

2: initializing error

30: CAN bus error

31: error alarm

32: data overflow

D8241 configure item number when

error happens XC-CAN valid

D8242 data package number sent

every second both XC-CAN and FREE modes are valid

D8243 data package number

accepted every second both XC-CAN and FREE modes are valid

D8244 CAN communication error

counter

correspond with M8240

at every CAN error, M8240 will be set ON

one time, D8244 increase 1

Page 278: PLC Software MANUAL - Xinje-support-centre-listo. · PDF filePLC Software Manual Page 3 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2 3-14 [NOP], [END] 76 3-15 [GROUP], [GROUPE] 77 3-16 Programming Notes 78

PLC Software Manual Page 278 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2

8 PID Control Function

In this chapter, we mainly introduce the applications of PID instructions for XC Series PLC

basic units, including: call the instructions, set the parameters, items to note, sample

programs etc.

8-1. Brief Introduction of the Functions

8-2. Instruction Formats

8-7. Sample Programs

8-5. Advanced Mode

8-6.Application Outlines

8-4. Autotune Mode

8-3. Parameter Setting

Page 279: PLC Software MANUAL - Xinje-support-centre-listo. · PDF filePLC Software Manual Page 3 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2 3-14 [NOP], [END] 76 3-15 [GROUP], [GROUPE] 77 3-16 Programming Notes 78

PLC Software Manual Page 279 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2

8-1 Brief Introduction of the Functions

PID instructions and auto-tune functions are added into XC Series PLC basic units (Version

3.0 and above). Via auto-tune method, users can achive the best sampling time and PID

parameters and improve the control precision.

The previous versions cannot support PID function on basic units unless they extend with

analog modules or BD cards. PID instruction has brought many facilities to the users.

1. The output can be data form D and on-off quantity Y, user can choose them freely when

programming.

2. Via auto-tune, users can achive the best sampling time and PID parameters and improve

the control precision.

3. User can choose positive or negative movement via software setting. The former is used in

heating control; the later is used in cooling control.

4. PID control separates the basic units with the expansions; this improves the flexibility of this

function.

Page 280: PLC Software MANUAL - Xinje-support-centre-listo. · PDF filePLC Software Manual Page 3 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2 3-14 [NOP], [END] 76 3-15 [GROUP], [GROUPE] 77 3-16 Programming Notes 78

PLC Software Manual Page 280 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2

8-2 Instruction Forms

1: Brief Introductions of the Instructions

Execute PID control instructions with the data in specified registers.

PID control [PID]

16 bits

instruction

PID 32 bits

instruction

-

Executing

Condition

Normally ON/normally closed

coil activates

Suitable

Models XC2、XC3、XC5、XCM

Hardware

Condition

V3.0 or above Software

Condition

V3.0 or above

2: Operands

Operands Usage Type

S1 set the ID Nr. of the target value (SV) 16bits, BIN

S2 set the ID Nr. of the tested value (PV) 16 bits, BIN

S3 set the first ID Nr. of the control parameters 16 bits, BIN

D the ID Nr. of the operation resule (MV) or output port 16 bits, BIN

3: Suitable soft components

Operands System

X Y M S T C Dn.m

D ● ● ● ● ●

Word

Type

Bit

Type

Operands System Constant Module

D FD ED TD CD DX DY DM DS K /H ID QD

S1 ● ●

S2 ● ●

S3 ●

D ● ●

Page 281: PLC Software MANUAL - Xinje-support-centre-listo. · PDF filePLC Software Manual Page 3 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2 3-14 [NOP], [END] 76 3-15 [GROUP], [GROUPE] 77 3-16 Programming Notes 78

PLC Software Manual Page 281 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2

PID D0 D10 D4000 D100X0

D·S1· S2· S3·

PID D0 D10 D4000 Y0X0

D·S1· S2· S3·

S3~ S3+ 43 will be occupied by this instruction, do not use them as the common data

registers.

This instruction executes with each sampling time interval.

To the operation result D, the data registers are used to store PID output values; the

output points are used to output the occupy ratio in the form of ON/OFF.

PID control rules are shown as below:

e(t) = r (t ) –c ( t ) (1-1)

u(t) = Kp [ e ( t ) + 1/Ti∫e(t)dt + TD de(t)/dt] (1-2)

Here, e(t) is warp, r(t) is the given value, c(t) is the actual output value, u(t) is the control

value;

In function (1-2), Kp is the proportion coefficient, Ti is the integration time coefficient, and

TD is the differential time coefficient.

The result of the operation:

5. Analog output: MV= digital form of u (t), the default range is 0 ~ 4095.

6. Digital output: Y=T*[MV/PID output upper limit]. Y is the output’s activation time within the

control cycle. T is the control cycle, equals to the sampling time. PID output upper limit

default value is 4095.

u(t

)

c(t) r(t) e(t

Proportion

Integral

Differential

Be controlled object

+

+

+

-

Functions

and Actions

Page 282: PLC Software MANUAL - Xinje-support-centre-listo. · PDF filePLC Software Manual Page 3 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2 3-14 [NOP], [END] 76 3-15 [GROUP], [GROUPE] 77 3-16 Programming Notes 78

PLC Software Manual Page 282 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2

8-3 Parameters Setting

Users can call PID instructions in XCP Pro software directly and set the parameters in the

window (see graph below), for the details please refer to XCP Pro user manual. Users can also

write the parameters into the specified registers by MOV instructions before PID operation.

Page 283: PLC Software MANUAL - Xinje-support-centre-listo. · PDF filePLC Software Manual Page 3 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2 3-14 [NOP], [END] 76 3-15 [GROUP], [GROUPE] 77 3-16 Programming Notes 78

PLC Software Manual Page 283 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2

8-3-1 Register and their Functions

For PID control instruction’s relative parameters ID, please refer to the below table:

ID Function Description Memo

S3 sampling time 32 bits without sign Unit: ms

S3+1 sampling time 32 bits without sign Unit: ms

S3+2 mode setting bit0:

0: Negative; 1 Negative;

bit1~bit6 not usable

bit7:

0: Manual PID; 1: Auto-tune PID

bit8:

1: Auto-tune successful flag

bit9~bit14 not usable

bit15:

0: regular mode; 1: advanced mode

S3+3 Proportion Gain (Kp) Range: 1~32767[%]

S3+4 Integration time (TI) 0~32767[*100ms] 0 is taken as no integral.

S3+5 Differential time (TD) 0~32767[*10ms] 0 is taken as no differential.

S3+6 PID operation zone 0~32767 PID adjustment band width

value.

S3+7 control death zone 0~32767 PID value keeps constant in

death zone

S3+8 PID Auto-tune cycle

varied value

full scale AD value *(0.3~1%)

S3+9 PID Auto-tune

overshoot permission

0: enable overshoot

1:disable overshoot

S3+10 current target value

adjustment percent in

auto-tune finishing

transition stage

S3+11 current target value

resident count in

auto-tune finishing

transition stage

S3+12~

S3+39

occupied by PID

operation’s internal

process

Below is the ID of advanced PID mode setting

S3+40 Input filter constant (a) 0~99[%] 0: no input filter

S3+41 Differential gain (KD) 0~100[%] 0: no differential gain

S3+42 Output upper limit value -32767~32767

S3+43 Output lower limit value -32767~32767

Page 284: PLC Software MANUAL - Xinje-support-centre-listo. · PDF filePLC Software Manual Page 3 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2 3-14 [NOP], [END] 76 3-15 [GROUP], [GROUPE] 77 3-16 Programming Notes 78

PLC Software Manual Page 284 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2

8-3-2 Parameters Description

Movement Direction:

Positive movement: the output value MV will increase with the increasing of the detected

value PV, usually used for cooling control.

Negative movement: the output value MV will decrease with the increasing of the

detected value PV, usually used for heating control.

Mode Setting

Common Mode:

The parameter’s register zone is from S3 to S3+43, S3 to S3+11 and needs to be set by

users. S3+12 to S3+43+12 are occupied by the system and are not available to users.

Advanced Mode:

The parameter’s register zone is from S3 to S3+43, S3 to (S3+11) and (S3+40) to (S3+43)

need to be set by users. (S3+12) to (S3+39) are occupied by the system and are not

availableto users.

Sample Time [S3]

The system samples the current value according to certain time interval and compare

them with the output value. This time interval is the sample time T. There is no

requirement for T during AD output. T should be larger than one PLC scan period during

port output. T value should be chosen among 100~1000 times of PLC scan periods.

PID Operation Zone [S3+6]

PID control is entirely opened at the beginning and close to the target value with the

highest speed (the defaulted value is 4095), when it entered into the PID computation

range, parameters Kp, Ti, TD will be effective.

See graph below:

D 1 ·

If the target value is 100, PID operation zone is 10, then the real PID’s operation zone is from

90 to 110.

Page 285: PLC Software MANUAL - Xinje-support-centre-listo. · PDF filePLC Software Manual Page 3 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2 3-14 [NOP], [END] 76 3-15 [GROUP], [GROUPE] 77 3-16 Programming Notes 78

PLC Software Manual Page 285 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2

8-4 Auto-tune Mode

Death Region [S3+7]

Within this region the PID value will not vary. This stops the system from making small

changes which will imbalance the system.

D 2·

Suppose: we set the death region value to be 10. Then in the above graph, the difference is

only 2 comparing the current value with the last value. The PID control will not change value.

The difference is 13 (more than death region 10) comparing the current value with the next

value, this difference value is larger than control death region value, the PID control will start to

vary.

Page 286: PLC Software MANUAL - Xinje-support-centre-listo. · PDF filePLC Software Manual Page 3 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2 3-14 [NOP], [END] 76 3-15 [GROUP], [GROUPE] 77 3-16 Programming Notes 78

PLC Software Manual Page 286 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2

If users do not know how to set the PID parameters, they can choose auto-tune mode which

can find the optimal control parameters (sampling time, proportion gain Kp, integral time Ti,

differential time TD) automatically.

I. Auto-tune mode is suitable for these objectives: temperature, pressure; but is not

suitable for liquid level and flow.

II. Users can set the sampling cycle to be 0 at the beginning of the auto-tune process

then modify the value manually in terms of practical needs after the auto-tune

process is completed.

III. Before selecting auto-tune, the system should be under the no-control steady state. If

the function is to ‘Take the temperature’ for example: the detected temperature

should be the same as the environment temperature.

To enter the auto-tune mode, please set bit7 of (S3+ 2) to be 1 and turn on PID working

condition. If bit8 of (S3+ 2) turns to 1, it means the auto-tune is successful.

PID auto-tune period value [S3+ 8]

Set this value in [S3+ 8] during auto-tune.

This value decides the auto-tune performance, in a general way, set this value to be the AD

result corresponding to one standard detected unit. The default value is 10. The suggested

setting range:

full-scale AD result × 0.3 ~ 1%.

This value does not normally need altering, however, if the system is interfered greatly by

outside, this value should be increased modestly to avoid wrong judgment for positive or

negative movement. If this value is too large, the PID control period (sampling time) set by the

auto-tune process will be too long.

※1: if users have no experience, please use the defaulted value 10, set PID sampling time ( control

period ) to be 0ms then start the auto-tune.

PID auto-tune overshooting permission setting [S3+ 9]

If set 0, overshooting is permitted, the system can study the optimal PID parameters all the

time. But in self-study process, detected value may be lower or higher than the target value,

safety factor should be considered here.

If set 1, overshooting is not permitted. For these objectives which have strict safety demand

such as pressure vessel, set [S3+ 9] to be 1 to prevent from detected value being seriously

over the target value. In this process, if [S3+ 2] bit8 changes from 0 to 1, it means the

auto-tune is successful and the optimal parameters are set; if [S3+ 2] is always 0 until [S3+ 2]

bit7 changes from 1 to 0, it means the auto-tune is completed but the parameters are not the

best and need to be modified by users.

Every adjustment percent of current target value at auto-tune process finishing transition

Page 287: PLC Software MANUAL - Xinje-support-centre-listo. · PDF filePLC Software Manual Page 3 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2 3-14 [NOP], [END] 76 3-15 [GROUP], [GROUPE] 77 3-16 Programming Notes 78

PLC Software Manual Page 287 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2

8-5 Advanced Mode

stage [S3+10]

This parameter is effective only when [S3+ 9] is 1.

If setting PID control after auto-tune, small range of overshooting may be occurred. It is better

to decrease this parameter to control the overshooting. But response delay may occur if this

value is too small. The defaulted value is 100% which means the parameter is not effective.

The recommended range is 50~80%.

Cutline Explanation: Current target value adjustment percent is 2/3 (S3 + 10 = 67%), the original temperature of the

system is 0 ºC, target temperature is 100 ºC, the current target temperature adjustment

situation is shown as below:

Next current target value = current target value + (final target value – current target value) ×

2/3;

So the changing sequence of current target is 66 ºC, 88 ºC, 96 ºC, 98 ºC, 99 ºC, 100 ºC.

The stay times of the current target value at auto-tune process finishing transition stage

[S3+11]

This parameter is valid only when [S3+9] is 1;

If entering into PID control directly after auto-tune, small range of overshoot may occur.

Overshoot can be prevented if increasing this parameter properly, but it will cause response

lag if this value is too large. The default value is 15 times. The recommended range is from 5 to

20.

Page 288: PLC Software MANUAL - Xinje-support-centre-listo. · PDF filePLC Software Manual Page 3 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2 3-14 [NOP], [END] 76 3-15 [GROUP], [GROUPE] 77 3-16 Programming Notes 78

PLC Software Manual Page 288 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2

8-6 Application Outlines

8-7 Example Program

Users can set some parameters in advanced mode in order to get the better effect of PID

control. Enter into the advanced mode, please set [S3+2] bit 15 to be 1, or set it in the

XCP Pro software.

Input Filter constant

It will smooth the sampling value. The default value is 0% which means no filter.

Differential Gain

The low pass filtering process will relax the sharp change of the output value. The default

value is 50%, the relaxing effect will be more obviously if increasing this value. Users do not

need to change it.

Upper-limit and lower-limit value

Users can choose the analog output range via setting this value.

Default value: lower- limit output= 0

Upper -limit= 4095

Under continuous output, the system whose effectability will die down with the change of

the feedback value can do self-study, such as temperature or pressure. It is not suitable

for flux or liquid level.

Under the condition of overshoot permission, the system will get the optimal PID

parameters from self-study.

Under the condition of overshoot not allowed, the PID parameters got from self-study is

up to the target value, it means that different target value will produce different PID

parameters which are not the optimal parameters of the system and for reference only.

If the self-study is not available, users can set the PID parameters according to practical

experience. Users need to modify the parameters when debugging. Below are some

experience values of the control system for your reference:

Temperature system:

P (%) 2000 ~ 6000, I (minutes) 3 ~ 10, D (minutes) 0.5 ~ 3

Flux system: P (%) 4000 ~ 10000, I (minutes) 0.1 ~ 1

Pressure system: P (%) 3000 ~ 7000, I (minutes) 0.4 ~ 3

Liquid level system: P (%) 2000 ~ 8000, I (minutes) 1 ~ 5

Page 289: PLC Software MANUAL - Xinje-support-centre-listo. · PDF filePLC Software Manual Page 3 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2 3-14 [NOP], [END] 76 3-15 [GROUP], [GROUPE] 77 3-16 Programming Notes 78

PLC Software Manual Page 289 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2

PID Control Program is shown below:

Soft components function comments:

D4000.7: auto-tune bit

D4002.8: auto-tune successful sign

M0: normal PID control

M1: auto-tune control

M2: enter into PID control after auto-tune

// Move ID100 content into D10

// convert PID mode to be auto tune

at the beginning of auto tune

control starts or auto tune finish

// start PID, D0 is target value, D10 is

detected value, from D4000 the

zone is PID parameters area;

output PID result via Y0

// PID control finish, close auto tune

PID mode

// if auto tune is successful, and

overshoot is permitted, close auto

tune control bit, auto tune finish;

If auto tune turns to be manual

mode, and auto tune is not

permitted, close auto tune control

bit

Page 290: PLC Software MANUAL - Xinje-support-centre-listo. · PDF filePLC Software Manual Page 3 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2 3-14 [NOP], [END] 76 3-15 [GROUP], [GROUPE] 77 3-16 Programming Notes 78

PLC Software Manual Page 290 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2

9 C Language Function Block

In this chapter, we focus on C language function block’s specifications; edition; instruction

calling; application points etc. We end the chapter with the common functions list.

9-1.Functions Summary

9-2.Instrument Form

9-3.Operation Steps

9-4.Import and Export of the Functions

9-5.Function Block Editing

9-6.Example Program

9-7.Application Points

9-8.C Language Function List

Page 291: PLC Software MANUAL - Xinje-support-centre-listo. · PDF filePLC Software Manual Page 3 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2 3-14 [NOP], [END] 76 3-15 [GROUP], [GROUPE] 77 3-16 Programming Notes 78

PLC Software Manual Page 291 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2

9-1 Functions Summary

9-2 Instruction Format

This is the new added function in XCP Pro software. This function enables the customers to

write function blocks with C language in XCP Pro and call the function blocks at any necessary

place. This function supports most of C language functions, strength the program’s security. As

users can call the function at many places and call different functions, this function increases

the programmer’s efficiency greatly.

Page 292: PLC Software MANUAL - Xinje-support-centre-listo. · PDF filePLC Software Manual Page 3 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2 3-14 [NOP], [END] 76 3-15 [GROUP], [GROUPE] 77 3-16 Programming Notes 78

PLC Software Manual Page 292 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2

9-3 Operation Steps

1:Instruction Summary

Call the C language Function Block at the specified place

Call the C language Function Block [NAME_C]

16 bits

Instruction

NAME_C 32 bits

Instruction

-

Execution

Condition

Normally ON/OFF,

Rising/Falling Edge

activation

Suitable

Models XC1、XC2、XC3、XC5、XCM

Hardware

Requirement

V3.0C and above Software

Requirement

V3.0C and above

2: Operands

Operands Function Type

S1 name of C Function Block, defined by the user String

S2 Correspond with the start ID of word W in C language

Function

16bits, BIN

S3 Correspond with the start ID of word B in C language

Function

16bits, BIN

3: Suitable Soft Components

NAME_C D0 M0X0

S1· S2· S3·

The name is composed by numbers, letters and underscores, the first character must not

be a number and the name shouldn’t be longer than 8 ASC.

The name can’t be same with PLC’s internal instructions e.g. LD, ADD, SUB, PLSR etc.

The name can’t be same as any function blocks already existing in the PLC.

Operands System

X Y M S T C Dn.m

S3 ●

Word

Bit

Operands System Constant Module

D FD ED TD CD DX DY DM DS K /H ID QD

S2 ●

Functions

and Actions

Page 293: PLC Software MANUAL - Xinje-support-centre-listo. · PDF filePLC Software Manual Page 3 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2 3-14 [NOP], [END] 76 3-15 [GROUP], [GROUPE] 77 3-16 Programming Notes 78

PLC Software Manual Page 293 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2

1: Open PLC edit tool, in the left “Project” toolbar, choose “Function Block”, right click it and

choose “Add New Function Block”

2: See graph below, fill in the information of your function;

3: After creating the new Function Block, you can see the edit interface as shown below:

Page 294: PLC Software MANUAL - Xinje-support-centre-listo. · PDF filePLC Software Manual Page 3 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2 3-14 [NOP], [END] 76 3-15 [GROUP], [GROUPE] 77 3-16 Programming Notes 78

PLC Software Manual Page 294 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2

Parameters’ transfer format: if Function Block is called in ladder format, the transferred

D and M is the start ID of W and B. Take the above graph as the example, start with D0

and M0, then W[0] is D0, W[10] is D10, B[0 is M0, B[10]is M10. If in the ladder the used

parameters are D100, M100, then W[0] is D100, B[0]is M100. So, word and bit

component’s start address is defined in PLC program by the user.

Parameter W: represent Word soft component, use in the form of data group. E.g.

W[0]=1;W[1]=W[2]+W[3]; in the program, use according to standard C language rules.

Parameter B: represents Bit soft component, use in the form of data group. Supports SET

and RESET. E.g: B[0]=1;B[1]=0; And assignment, for example B[0]=B[1].

Double-word operation: add D in front of W, e.g. DW[10]=100000, it means assignment to

the double-word W[10]W[11]

Floating Operation: Supports the definition of floating variable in the function, and

executes floating operation;

Function Library: In Function Block, users can use the Functions and Variables in

function library directly. For the Functions and Variables in function library, see the C

Language Function List at the end of this chapter.

Edit your C language

program between “{}”

Main function’s name (its function block’s

name, this name can’t be changed freely, and

users should modify in the edit window.

WORD W: correspond with soft component D

BIT B: correspond with soft component M

Page 295: PLC Software MANUAL - Xinje-support-centre-listo. · PDF filePLC Software Manual Page 3 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2 3-14 [NOP], [END] 76 3-15 [GROUP], [GROUPE] 77 3-16 Programming Notes 78

PLC Software Manual Page 295 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2

The other data type supported:

BOOL; //BOOL Quantity

INT8U; //8 bits unsigned integral

INT8S; //8 bits signed integral

INT16U //16 bits unsigned integral

INT16S //8 bits signed integral

INT32U //32 bits unsigned integral

INT32S //32 bits signed integral

FP32; //Single precision Floating

FP64; // Double precision Floating

Predefined Marco

#define true 1

#define false 0

#define TRUE 1

#define FALSE 0

Page 296: PLC Software MANUAL - Xinje-support-centre-listo. · PDF filePLC Software Manual Page 3 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2 3-14 [NOP], [END] 76 3-15 [GROUP], [GROUPE] 77 3-16 Programming Notes 78

PLC Software Manual Page 296 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2

9-4 Import and Export the Functions

9-5 Edit the Function Blocks

1: Export

(1) Function: export the function as the file, then other PLCs program can import to use;

(2) Export Format

a) Editable; export the source codes and save as a file. If imported again, the file is

editable.

b) Not editable: if the source code is not exported the file will be read-only by third parties. 2: Import

Function; Import the existing Function Block file, to use in the PLC program;

Choose the Function Block, right click “Import Function Block From Disk”, choose the

correct file, then click OK.

Page 297: PLC Software MANUAL - Xinje-support-centre-listo. · PDF filePLC Software Manual Page 3 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2 3-14 [NOP], [END] 76 3-15 [GROUP], [GROUPE] 77 3-16 Programming Notes 78

PLC Software Manual Page 297 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2

Example: Add D0 and D1 in the PLC’s registers, then assign the value to D2;

(1) In “Project” toolbar, new create a Function Block, here we name the Function Block as

ADD_2, then edit C language program;

(2) Click compile after edition

According to the information shown in the output blank, we can search and modify the

grammar error in C language program. Here we can see that in the program there is no “;” sign

behind W[2]=W[0]+W[1];

Compile the program again after modify the program. In the information list, we can confirm

that there is now no grammar error in the program.

The information list

Page 298: PLC Software MANUAL - Xinje-support-centre-listo. · PDF filePLC Software Manual Page 3 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2 3-14 [NOP], [END] 76 3-15 [GROUP], [GROUPE] 77 3-16 Programming Notes 78

PLC Software Manual Page 298 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2

(3) Write PLC program, assign value 10 and 20 into registers D0, D1 separately, then call

Function Block ADD_2, see graph below:

(4) Download program into PLC, run PLC and set M0.

(5) From Free Monitor in the toolbar, we can see that D2 changes to be 30, it means the

assignment is successful.

Free Monitor

Page 299: PLC Software MANUAL - Xinje-support-centre-listo. · PDF filePLC Software Manual Page 3 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2 3-14 [NOP], [END] 76 3-15 [GROUP], [GROUPE] 77 3-16 Programming Notes 78

PLC Software Manual Page 299 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2

9-6 Example Program

Function: calculate CRC parity value via Function Block

CRC calculation rules:

(1) Set 16 bits register (CRC register) = FFFF H

(2) XOR (Exclusive OR) 8 bits information with the low byte of the 16 bits CRC register.

(3) Right shift 1 bit of CRC register, fill 0 in the highest bit.

(4) Check the right shifted value, if it is 0, save the new value from step3 into CRC register; if it

is not 0, XOR the CRC register value with A001 H and save the result into the CRC register.

(5) Repeat step3&4 until all the 8 bits have been calculated.

(6) Repeat step2~5, then calculate the next 8 bits information. Until all the information has

been calculated, the result will be the CRC parity code in CRC register.

Edit C language Function Block program, see graph below:

Page 300: PLC Software MANUAL - Xinje-support-centre-listo. · PDF filePLC Software Manual Page 3 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2 3-14 [NOP], [END] 76 3-15 [GROUP], [GROUPE] 77 3-16 Programming Notes 78

PLC Software Manual Page 300 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2

9-7 Application Points

Edit PLC ladder program,

D0: Parity data byte number;

D1~D5: Parity data’s content, see graph below:

Download to PLC, then RUN PLC, set M0, via Free Monitor, we can find that values in D6

and D7 are the highest and lowest bit of CRC parity value.

When uploading a PLC program which contains some Function Blocks, the Function

Blocks can’t be uploaded, there will be an error say: There is an unknown instruction;

In one Function Block file, you can write many subsidiary functions, can call each other;

Each Function Block files are independent, they can’t call its owned functions;

Function Block files can call C language library functions in form of floating, arithmetic like

sin, cos, tan etc.

Page 301: PLC Software MANUAL - Xinje-support-centre-listo. · PDF filePLC Software Manual Page 3 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2 3-14 [NOP], [END] 76 3-15 [GROUP], [GROUPE] 77 3-16 Programming Notes 78

PLC Software Manual Page 301 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2

9-8 C Language Function List

The default function library

Constant Data Description

_LOG2 (double)0.693147180559945309417232121458 Logarithm of 2

_LOG10 (double)2.3025850929940459010936137929093 Logarithm of 10

_SQRT2 (double)1.41421356237309504880168872421 Radical of 2

_PI (double)3.1415926535897932384626433832795 PI

_PIP2 (double)1.57079632679489661923132169163975 PI/2

_PIP2x3 (double)4.71238898038468985769396507491925 PI*3/2

String Function Description

void * memchr(const void *s, int c, size_t n); Return the first c position among n words before

s position

int memcmp(const void *s1, const void *s2, size_t n); Compare the first n words of position s1 and s2

void * memcpy(void *s1, const void *s2, size_t n); Copy n words from position s2 to s1and return

s1

void * memset(void *s, int c, size_t n); Replace the n words start from s position with

word c, and return position s

char * strcat(char *s1, const char *s2); Connect string ct behind string s

char * strchr(const char *s, int c); Return the first word c position in string s

int strcmp(const char *s1, const char *s2); Compare string s1 and s2

char * strcpy(char *s1, const char *s2); Copy string s1 to string s2

Page 302: PLC Software MANUAL - Xinje-support-centre-listo. · PDF filePLC Software Manual Page 3 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2 3-14 [NOP], [END] 76 3-15 [GROUP], [GROUPE] 77 3-16 Programming Notes 78

PLC Software Manual Page 302 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2

Double-precision math function Single-precision math function Description

double acos(double x); oat acosf(float x); Inverse cosine function.

double asin(double x); float asinf(float x); Inverse sine function

double atan(double x); float atanf(float x); Inverse tangent function

double atan2(double y, double x); float atan2f(float y, float x); Inverse tangent value of

parameter (y/x)

double ceil(double x); float ceilf(float x);

Return the smallest double

integral which is greater or equal

with parameter x

double cos(double x); float cosf(float x); Cosine function

double cosh(double x); float coshf(float x); Hyperbolic cosine function

cosh(x)=(e^x+e^(-x))/2.

double exp(double x); float expf(float x); Exponent (e^x) of a nature data

double fabs(double x); float fabsf(float x); Absolute value of parameter x

double floor(double x); float floorf(float x);

Return the largets dounble

integral which is smaller or

equals with x

double fmod(double x, double y); float fmodf(float x, float y); If y is not zero, return the

reminder of floating x/y

double frexp(double val, int _far *exp); float frexpf(float val, int _far *exp);

Break floating data x to be

mantissa and exponent x =

m*2^exp, return the mantissa of

m, save the logarithm into exp.

double ldexp(double x, int exp); float ldexpf(float x, int exp); X multipy the (two to the power of

n) is x*2^n.

double log(double x); float logf(float x); Nature logarithm logx

double log10(double x); float log10f(float x); logarithm (log10x)

double modf(double val, double *pd); float modff(float val, float *pd);

Break floating data X to be

integral part and decimal part,

return the decimal part, save the

integral part into parameter ip.

double pow(double x, double y); float powf(float x, float y); Power value of parameter y (x^y)

double sin(double x); float sinf(float x); sine function

double sinh(double x); float sinhf(float x); Hyperbolic sine function,

sinh(x)=(e^x-e^(-x))/2.

double sqrt(double x); float sqrtf(float x); Square root of parameter X

double tan(double x); float tanf(float x); tangent function.

double tanh(double x); float tanhf(float x); Hyperbolic tangent function,

tanh(x)=(e^x-e^(-x))/(e^2+e^(-x)).

Page 303: PLC Software MANUAL - Xinje-support-centre-listo. · PDF filePLC Software Manual Page 3 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2 3-14 [NOP], [END] 76 3-15 [GROUP], [GROUPE] 77 3-16 Programming Notes 78

PLC Software Manual Page 303 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2

10 Sequential Function BLOCK

This chapter describes the basic concepts; internal instruction manipulation; relative

instructions; executing form and application points of Sequential Function Blocks.

10-1.Basic Concept of Block

10-2.Call the Block

10-3.Edit the Internal Instructions of Block

10-4.Execute Form of Block

10-5.Edit Requirements with Block Internal Instructions

10-6.Block Relative Instructions

10-7.Block Execute Falg Bit/Register

Page 304: PLC Software MANUAL - Xinje-support-centre-listo. · PDF filePLC Software Manual Page 3 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2 3-14 [NOP], [END] 76 3-15 [GROUP], [GROUPE] 77 3-16 Programming Notes 78

PLC Software Manual Page 304 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2

Relative Instructions:

Mnemonic Function Circuit and soft components chapter

SEQUENTIAL FUNCTION BLOCK

BSTOP Pause the execution of

BLOCK BSTOP S1 S2

10-6-1

BGOON Continue to execute

BLOCK BGOON S1 S2

10-6-1

Page 305: PLC Software MANUAL - Xinje-support-centre-listo. · PDF filePLC Software Manual Page 3 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2 3-14 [NOP], [END] 76 3-15 [GROUP], [GROUPE] 77 3-16 Programming Notes 78

PLC Software Manual Page 305 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2

10-1 BLOCK Basic Concept

10-1-1 BLOCK Summary Sequential function block, in short BLOCK, is a program block to realize certain functions. We

can treat the block as a special flow, in this special flow, all the programs run according to one

principle, i.e. sequential execution principle; this is how BLOCK differs from other programs.

BLOCK starts with SBLOCK, ends with SBLOCKE, the programmer writes programs between

them. If in one BLOCK there are many “send pulse” instructions (also same with other type of

instructions), then the pulse instructions will run according to the time order of the activate

conditions; the next pulse instruction runs only after the previous instruction finishes.

See a whole BLOCK structure below:

USER’S EXECUTION

PROGRAM

Pulse

Communication

Inverter Config.

Wait Instruction

Instruction List

SBLOCK BLOCK n

SBLOCKE

BLOCK starts

The programs within BLOCK,

all the instructions run accord

to order

BLOCK Ends

Page 306: PLC Software MANUAL - Xinje-support-centre-listo. · PDF filePLC Software Manual Page 3 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2 3-14 [NOP], [END] 76 3-15 [GROUP], [GROUPE] 77 3-16 Programming Notes 78

PLC Software Manual Page 306 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2

10-1-2 Reason to introduce BLOCK

How to write instructions to optimize the original pulse, communication in flows;

As in XCP Pro, we don’t support to run many pulse, communication instructions in one

flow, it’s troublesome to write the program. With BLOCK, we support writing many pulse,

communication instructions, all the instructions run accord to sequential principle;

Wrong (×) Correct (√)

WITHOUT

BLOCK

WITH

BLOCK

Page 307: PLC Software MANUAL - Xinje-support-centre-listo. · PDF filePLC Software Manual Page 3 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2 3-14 [NOP], [END] 76 3-15 [GROUP], [GROUPE] 77 3-16 Programming Notes 78

PLC Software Manual Page 307 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2

10-2 Call the BLOCK

In one program, you can call many BLOCKs. Call BLOCK via XCP Pro. See method below:

10-2-1 Add a BLOCK

Open XCP Pro, in the left toolbar, find “Sequence Block”, right click it, you can see “Add

Sequence Block”. See graph below:

Click this command, see the configure interface below:

Page 308: PLC Software MANUAL - Xinje-support-centre-listo. · PDF filePLC Software Manual Page 3 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2 3-14 [NOP], [END] 76 3-15 [GROUP], [GROUPE] 77 3-16 Programming Notes 78

PLC Software Manual Page 308 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2

The above interface is used to edit one BLOCK, in that interface you can add many program

sections, modify and delete the correspond sections, including pulse, communication, motion

control etc; upwards/downwards is used to up/down shift the instructions in BLOCK.

Please note: in the left bottom there is a “inset” item, if you choose it, the “Add” button will

change to be “Insert:, see screenshot below:

The difference between “Add” and “Insert”:

Add: add the specified content at the end of BLOCK;

Insert: add the specified content at any place of BLOCK;

Click “Add”, you can see that the system lists all the instruction types you may use, including

instruction list, pulse configure, Modbus instruction, Wait instruction, inverter read/write, free

format communication; see screenshot below:

Page 309: PLC Software MANUAL - Xinje-support-centre-listo. · PDF filePLC Software Manual Page 3 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2 3-14 [NOP], [END] 76 3-15 [GROUP], [GROUPE] 77 3-16 Programming Notes 78

PLC Software Manual Page 309 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2

For example, add a “Pulse Item” in the BLOCK and set it:

Click OK, we can see that in the configure interface, the corresponding information also been

added, see screenshot below:

Page 310: PLC Software MANUAL - Xinje-support-centre-listo. · PDF filePLC Software Manual Page 3 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2 3-14 [NOP], [END] 76 3-15 [GROUP], [GROUPE] 77 3-16 Programming Notes 78

PLC Software Manual Page 310 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2

Click “OK”, in the Ladder interface, you can see the instructions section as below:

Meantime, in the left toolbar, you can see the new added block, see graph below:

Page 311: PLC Software MANUAL - Xinje-support-centre-listo. · PDF filePLC Software Manual Page 3 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2 3-14 [NOP], [END] 76 3-15 [GROUP], [GROUPE] 77 3-16 Programming Notes 78

PLC Software Manual Page 311 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2

10-2-2 Move the BLOCK

If you want to move the created BLOCK elsewhere, you should delete the original BLOCK

(choose all and delete), see graph below:

Then move the mouse to the required place, activate this place; right click the created BLOCK,

in the pop-up menu, choose “Add To Lad”, see graph below:

Here we can see that the BLOCK appears at the activate place, see graph below

Page 312: PLC Software MANUAL - Xinje-support-centre-listo. · PDF filePLC Software Manual Page 3 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2 3-14 [NOP], [END] 76 3-15 [GROUP], [GROUPE] 77 3-16 Programming Notes 78

PLC Software Manual Page 312 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2

10-2-3 Delete the BLOCK

If just delete the BLOCK called in the program, you can choose the BLOCK area and delete

(refer the previous method).

If you want to delete one BLOCK thoroughly, choose “Delete Sequence Block”. After this, you

can’t call it any more, the only method is to add it again; see graph below:

10-2-4 Modify the BLOCK

Page 313: PLC Software MANUAL - Xinje-support-centre-listo. · PDF filePLC Software Manual Page 3 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2 3-14 [NOP], [END] 76 3-15 [GROUP], [GROUPE] 77 3-16 Programming Notes 78

PLC Software Manual Page 313 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2

10-3 Edit the internal instructions in BLOCK

After adding the BLOCK, if you want to modify it totally, you just click the start and end

segments in the ladder window; if you just want to modify a certain program segment, you just

double-click the instruction. The two methods are shown below:

(A)Double click the start/end segment of BLOCK:

(B)Double click certain instruction:

Page 314: PLC Software MANUAL - Xinje-support-centre-listo. · PDF filePLC Software Manual Page 3 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2 3-14 [NOP], [END] 76 3-15 [GROUP], [GROUPE] 77 3-16 Programming Notes 78

PLC Software Manual Page 314 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2

10-3-1 Common Item

In order to add the programs to BLOCK freely, we enable the user to write instructions in form

of instruction list.

Open the edit interface, click “Add”, see graph below:

Click “Common Item”, a new interface will pop up, see below:

In the interface, user can add the required programs freely. The point to note is that, “Skip” is

Page 315: PLC Software MANUAL - Xinje-support-centre-listo. · PDF filePLC Software Manual Page 3 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2 3-14 [NOP], [END] 76 3-15 [GROUP], [GROUPE] 77 3-16 Programming Notes 78

PLC Software Manual Page 315 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2

used to control the run or not on the instructions. If not fill it in, it default to run; if choose “Skip”,

and fill in the control coil, then when the coil activates, the instructions will not be executed.

See below:

Click “OK”, in the ladder you can see program as shown below:

The M0 before “Instruction List” is the condition to run the instruction or not.

Note: In one BLOCK, user can add many program segments, each segment is controlled by

“SKIP”. If the condition is true, then skip to run the instruction; if the condition is false or vacant,

execute the instruction.

In the above graph, the instruction list is not shown in details, but you can add the comments

according to the program’s function. See below:

After adding the comment, BLOCK changes in the ladder, see graph below:

Page 316: PLC Software MANUAL - Xinje-support-centre-listo. · PDF filePLC Software Manual Page 3 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2 3-14 [NOP], [END] 76 3-15 [GROUP], [GROUPE] 77 3-16 Programming Notes 78

PLC Software Manual Page 316 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2

10-3-2 Pulse Configure

Open “Pulse Config” interface with the same method, see below:

In this configure interface, you can set pulse output form, single or 24 segments, opposite or

absolute. Write the other parameters in the corresponding blanks, like frequency, pulse,

acceleration and deceleration time, pulse number etc.

Add two sending pulse instruction into “BLOCK”, see below:

※1:In BLOCK, the pulse output instructions are both in 32 bits form;

10-3-3 Modbus Instruction

Page 317: PLC Software MANUAL - Xinje-support-centre-listo. · PDF filePLC Software Manual Page 3 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2 3-14 [NOP], [END] 76 3-15 [GROUP], [GROUPE] 77 3-16 Programming Notes 78

PLC Software Manual Page 317 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2

As before, open Modbus instructions configure interface, see below:

Modbus instructions configuration is easy, just choose “Modbus Item” from the draw down

menu, fill in the remote station Nr., COM Nr., local coil ID, coil Nr., the system will generate the

instruction automatically. See below:

10-3-4 Wait Instruction

Same asthe previous method, open Wait configure interface. Wait instruction is used to wait

Page 318: PLC Software MANUAL - Xinje-support-centre-listo. · PDF filePLC Software Manual Page 3 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2 3-14 [NOP], [END] 76 3-15 [GROUP], [GROUPE] 77 3-16 Programming Notes 78

PLC Software Manual Page 318 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2

the flag bit or time. There are two wait forms in the configure interface, one is the flg bit, the

other is timer. See the configure method as below:

(A)Flag

(B)Timer Wait

(C)See the result in the ladder

10-3-5 Frequency Inverter Configure This time is applied for PLCs with XINJE inverters. By changing this interface, user can

Page 319: PLC Software MANUAL - Xinje-support-centre-listo. · PDF filePLC Software Manual Page 3 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2 3-14 [NOP], [END] 76 3-15 [GROUP], [GROUPE] 77 3-16 Programming Notes 78

PLC Software Manual Page 319 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2

read/write the inverters. See below:

The interface includes four parts, they are: inverter station number, COM port number, control

inverter action, monitor inverter’s status, user define etc. Below we introduce the four parts one

by one:

(A)inverter’s station number and COM port

The station number is used to specify the inverter’s station number, the COM port is PLC’s

COM port, see the configuration below:

(B)Control Inverter’s Action

This item includes “write constant value” and “write from register”. “write constant value”

Page 320: PLC Software MANUAL - Xinje-support-centre-listo. · PDF filePLC Software Manual Page 3 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2 3-14 [NOP], [END] 76 3-15 [GROUP], [GROUPE] 77 3-16 Programming Notes 78

PLC Software Manual Page 320 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2

specify the inverter’s running manner directly; “write from register” decide the inverter’s

running manner according to register’s value:

The first form is very easy, choose the required operation directly, see graph below:

For the second form, we take an example to show: write D0 into inverter:

(C)Inverter Status Read Into

Page 321: PLC Software MANUAL - Xinje-support-centre-listo. · PDF filePLC Software Manual Page 3 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2 3-14 [NOP], [END] 76 3-15 [GROUP], [GROUPE] 77 3-16 Programming Notes 78

PLC Software Manual Page 321 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2

This is used to read inverter’s status. According to the object shown on interface, insert the

value into the specified register in PLC, see below:

(D)User Define

Set the inverter via user define mode, read from and write into inverter directly. The configure

interface is shown below:

Page 322: PLC Software MANUAL - Xinje-support-centre-listo. · PDF filePLC Software Manual Page 3 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2 3-14 [NOP], [END] 76 3-15 [GROUP], [GROUPE] 77 3-16 Programming Notes 78

PLC Software Manual Page 322 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2

Add a write instruction, see configuration below:

Add a read instruction:

See the result below:

Page 323: PLC Software MANUAL - Xinje-support-centre-listo. · PDF filePLC Software Manual Page 3 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2 3-14 [NOP], [END] 76 3-15 [GROUP], [GROUPE] 77 3-16 Programming Notes 78

PLC Software Manual Page 323 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2

10-3-6 Free Format Communication Add free format communication instructions in the block.

For example, select “send” instruction, first address set to D0, serial port is 2, 16 bits.

There are two methods to set the data. Const data is to set the value directly. Reg is to set

the value via register.

Page 324: PLC Software MANUAL - Xinje-support-centre-listo. · PDF filePLC Software Manual Page 3 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2 3-14 [NOP], [END] 76 3-15 [GROUP], [GROUPE] 77 3-16 Programming Notes 78

PLC Software Manual Page 324 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2

10-4 Running Form of the BLOCK

Change to check out tab, select the checking mode.

The communication parameters also need to be set. Click “serial port config”:

1: If there are many blocks, they run as the normal program. The block is running when the

condition is ON.

(A)the condition is normal ON, normal OFF coil

Page 325: PLC Software MANUAL - Xinje-support-centre-listo. · PDF filePLC Software Manual Page 3 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2 3-14 [NOP], [END] 76 3-15 [GROUP], [GROUPE] 77 3-16 Programming Notes 78

PLC Software Manual Page 325 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2

(B)the condition is rising or falling edge of pulse

When M1, M2, M3 is from OFF to ON, all these blocks will run once.

2: The instructions in the block run in sequence according to the scanning time. They run one

after another when the condition is ON.

(A)Without SKIP condition

Scanning period 1 Scanning period 2 Scanning period 3

M1

M2

M3

Block1 Block1, Block2 Block1, Block2, Block3

M1

SBLOCK Sequence block 1

SBLOCK Sequence block 2

SBLOCK Sequence block 3

M2

M3

M1

SBLOCK Sequence block 1

SBLOCK Sequence block 2

SBLOCK Sequence block 3

M2

M3

Page 326: PLC Software MANUAL - Xinje-support-centre-listo. · PDF filePLC Software Manual Page 3 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2 3-14 [NOP], [END] 76 3-15 [GROUP], [GROUPE] 77 3-16 Programming Notes 78

PLC Software Manual Page 326 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2

The instructions running sequence in block 1 is shown as below:

(B)With SKIP condition

Scanning period 1 Scanning period 2 Scanning period 3

M2

Scanning period 4 Scanning period 5

PLS Y0 PLS Y1 Inverter config

BLOCK running

BLOCK condition is

OFF and all the

sequence instructions

are finished running.

M 2

SBLOCK Sequence block1

Inverter Config

SBLOCKE

M 0 ( )

Y0

M 1 ( )

Y1

DPLSR D 0 D2 D4 Y0

DPLSR D 0 D2 D4 Y1

Page 327: PLC Software MANUAL - Xinje-support-centre-listo. · PDF filePLC Software Manual Page 3 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2 3-14 [NOP], [END] 76 3-15 [GROUP], [GROUPE] 77 3-16 Programming Notes 78

PLC Software Manual Page 327 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2

10-5 BLOCK instruction editing rules

Explanation:

A) When M2 is ON, block 1 is running.

B) All the instructions run in sequence in the block.

C) M3, M4, M5 are the sign of SKIP, when they are ON, this instruction will not run.

D) When M3 is OFF, if no other instructions use this Y0 pulse , DPLSR D0 D2 D4 Y0 will

run; if not, the DPLSR D0 D2 D4 Y0 will run after it is released by other instructions.

E) After “DPLSR D0 D2 D4 Y0” is over, check M4. If M4 is OFF, check “DPLSR D0 D2

D4 Y1”, if M4 is ON, check M5. If M5 is OFF, “inverter config” will run.

M2

SBLOCK Sequence block1

Inverter config

SBLOCKE

M0( )

Y0

M1( )

Y1

DPLSR D 0 D2 D4 Y0

DPLSR D 0 D2 D4 Y1

M3

M4

M5

Page 328: PLC Software MANUAL - Xinje-support-centre-listo. · PDF filePLC Software Manual Page 3 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2 3-14 [NOP], [END] 76 3-15 [GROUP], [GROUPE] 77 3-16 Programming Notes 78

PLC Software Manual Page 328 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2

In the BLOCK, when Instruction Editing follow the rules below:

1:Do not use the same pulse output terminal in different BLOCK.

NO(×) YES(√)

2: Do not use the same pulse output terminal in BLOCK and main program.

NO(×) YES(√)

3: There only can be one SKIP condition for one BLOCK instruction.

DPLSR D 0 D 2 D 4 Y0

M0 SBLOCK Sequence block1

SBLOCKE

M1

M2

DPLSR D 10 D 12 D 14 Y0

SBLOCK Sequence block2

SBLOCKE

DPLSR D 0 D2 D4 Y0

M0

SBLOCK Sequence block1

SBLOCKE

M1

M2

DPLSR D 10 D12 D14 Y1

SBLOCK Sequence block2

SBLOCKE

DPLSR D 0 D 2 D 4 Y0

M0

M2

DPLSR D 10 D12 D14 Y0

SBLOCK Sequence block1

SBLOCKE

DPLSR D 0 D 2 D 4 Y1 M0

M2

DPLSR D 10 D12 D14 Y 0

SBLOCK Sequence block1

SBLOCKE

Page 329: PLC Software MANUAL - Xinje-support-centre-listo. · PDF filePLC Software Manual Page 3 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2 3-14 [NOP], [END] 76 3-15 [GROUP], [GROUPE] 77 3-16 Programming Notes 78

PLC Software Manual Page 329 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2

10-6 BLOCK Related Instructions

NO(×) YES(√)

4: The SKIP condition only can use M, X, can not use other coil or register.

NO(×) YES(√)

5: The output instructions can not be HSC, PLSF, PWM, FRQM.

NO(×) YES(√)

6、LabelKind type can not be used in the block. Sign P, I can not be used in block. (they can be

added to the block but the program does not support this).

DPLSR D 0 D2 D4 Y0

M0 SBLOCK Sequence block1

SBLOCKE

M 1 M 2 DPLSR D 0 D 2 D 4 Y0

M0

SBLOCK Sequence block1

SBLOCKE

M1

DPLSR D 0 D2 D 4 Y0

M0 SBLOCK Sequence block1

SBLOCKE

T 0

M 2 [D10 ]DPLSR D 0 D2 D4 Y1

DPLSR D 0 D 2 D 4 Y0

M0

SBLOCK Sequence block1

SBLOCKE

X0

M2

DPLSR D 0 D 2 D4 Y1

HSCR C 600 D 0

M0

SBLOCK Sequence block1

SBLOCKE

M1

M 2 PLSF D 0 Y 0

PWM K 100 D 0 Y1

M 3

DPLSY K 30 D1 Y0

M0

SBLOCK Sequence block1

SBLOCKE

M1

M2

DPLSR D 0 D2 D4 Y1

Page 330: PLC Software MANUAL - Xinje-support-centre-listo. · PDF filePLC Software Manual Page 3 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2 3-14 [NOP], [END] 76 3-15 [GROUP], [GROUPE] 77 3-16 Programming Notes 78

PLC Software Manual Page 330 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2

10-6-1 Instruction Explanation

Stop Running the BLOCK [BSTOP]

1: Summarization

Stop the instructions running in the block

[BSTOP]

16 bits BSTOP 32 bits -

Condition NO,NC coil and pulse edge Suitable

types XC1、XC2、XC3、XC5、XCM

Hardware V3.1i and above Software V3.1h and above

2: Operand

Operand Function Type

S1 The number of the BLOCK 16 bits, BIN

S2 The mode to stop the BLOCK 16 bits, BIN

3: Suitable component

S2 is the mode to stop BLOCK, operand K1, K2

K0: stop the BLOCK slowly, if the pulse is outputting, the BLOCK will stop after the

pulse outputting is finished.

K1: stop the BLOCK immediately; stop all the instructions running in the BLOCK.

Continue Running the BLOCK [BGOON]

Word

comp

onent

Operand Register Constant Module

D FD ED TD CD DX DY DM DS K /H ID QD

S1 ● ●

S2 K

Function

Page 331: PLC Software MANUAL - Xinje-support-centre-listo. · PDF filePLC Software Manual Page 3 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2 3-14 [NOP], [END] 76 3-15 [GROUP], [GROUPE] 77 3-16 Programming Notes 78

PLC Software Manual Page 331 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2

1: Summarization

This instruction is opposite to BSTOP. To continue running the BLOCK.

[BGOON]

16 bits BGOON 32 bits -

Condition Pulse edge Suitable types XC1、XC2、XC3、XC5、XCM

Hardware V3.1i and above Software V3.1h and above

2: Operand

Operand Function Type

S1 The number of the BLOCK 16 bits, BIN

S2 The mode to continue running the BLOCK 16 bits, BIN

3: Suitable component

S2 is the mode to continue running the BLOCK. Operand: K0, K1.

K0: continue running the instructions in the BLOCK. For example, if pulse

outputting stopped last time, BGOON will continue outputting the rest pulse.

K1: continue running the BLOCK, but abandon the instructions have not finished

last time. Such as the pulse output instruction, if the pulse has not finished last

time, BGOON will not continue outputting this pulse but go to the next instruction

in the BLOCK.

10-6-2 The timing sequence of the instructions

Word

Comp

onent

Operand Register Constant Module

D FD ED TD CD DX DY DM DS K /H ID QD

S1 ● ●

S2 K

Function

Page 332: PLC Software MANUAL - Xinje-support-centre-listo. · PDF filePLC Software Manual Page 3 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2 3-14 [NOP], [END] 76 3-15 [GROUP], [GROUPE] 77 3-16 Programming Notes 78

PLC Software Manual Page 332 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2

1: BSTOP(K1 K0)+BGOON(K1 K0)

When M0 is from OFF→ON, run “DSPLSR D0 D2 D4 Y0” in the BLOCK to output the

pulse; when M1 is from OFF→ON, the BLOCK stops running, pulse outputting stops at once;

when M3 is from OFF→ON, abandon the rest pulse.

Scanning period1 Scanning period 2 Scanning period 3

Condition M0

Scanning period 4 Scanning period 5

Condition M1

Condition M3

PLS Y0

Page 333: PLC Software MANUAL - Xinje-support-centre-listo. · PDF filePLC Software Manual Page 3 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2 3-14 [NOP], [END] 76 3-15 [GROUP], [GROUPE] 77 3-16 Programming Notes 78

PLC Software Manual Page 333 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2

2: BSTOP(K1 K0)+BGOON(K1 K1)

When M0 is from OFF→ON, run “DSPLSR D0 D2 D4 Y0” in the BLOCK to output the

pulse; when M1 is from OFF→ON, the BLOCK stops running, the pulse outputting stops at

once; when M4 is from OFF→ON, output the rest pulses.

3: BSTOP(K1 K1)+BGOON(K1 K0)

Scanning period 1 Scanning period 2 Scanning period 3

Condition M0

Scanning period 4 Scanning period 5

Condition M1

Condition M4

PLS Y0

PLS Y0

Page 334: PLC Software MANUAL - Xinje-support-centre-listo. · PDF filePLC Software Manual Page 3 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2 3-14 [NOP], [END] 76 3-15 [GROUP], [GROUPE] 77 3-16 Programming Notes 78

PLC Software Manual Page 334 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2

When M0 is from OFF→ON, run “DSPLSR D0 D2 D4 Y0” in the BLOCK to output the

pulse; when M2 is from OFF→ON, stop the BLOCK, the pulse will stop slowly with slope, when

M3 is from OFF→ON, discards the rest pulses.

4: BSTOP(K1 K1)+BGOON(K1 K1)

Scanning period 1 Scanning period 2 Scanning period 3

Condition M0

Scanning period 4 Scanning period 5

Condition M2

Condition M3

PLS Y0

Page 335: PLC Software MANUAL - Xinje-support-centre-listo. · PDF filePLC Software Manual Page 3 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2 3-14 [NOP], [END] 76 3-15 [GROUP], [GROUPE] 77 3-16 Programming Notes 78

PLC Software Manual Page 335 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2

10-7 BLOCK Flag Bit and Register

When M0 is from OFF→ON, run “DSPLSR D0 D2 D4 Y0” in the BLOCK to output the

pulse; when M2 is from OFF→ON, stop running the BLOCK, the pulse will stop slowly with

slope; when M4 is from OFF→ON, output the rest pulses.

Please note that though the BSTOP stops the pulse with slope, there maybe still some

pulses; in this case, if run BGOON K1 K1 again, it will output the rest of the pulses.

Scanning period 1 Scanning period 2 Scanning period 3

Condition M0

Scanning period 4 Scanning period 5

Condition M2

Condition M4

PLS Y0

PLS Y0

Page 336: PLC Software MANUAL - Xinje-support-centre-listo. · PDF filePLC Software Manual Page 3 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2 3-14 [NOP], [END] 76 3-15 [GROUP], [GROUPE] 77 3-16 Programming Notes 78

PLC Software Manual Page 336 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2

10-8 Program Example

1:BLOCK flag bit:

2: BLOCK flag register

Address Function Explanation

M8630

1: running

0: not running

M8631 BLOCK1 running flag

M8632 BLOCK2 running flag

……. …….

…….. …….

M8730 BLOCK100 running flag

Address Function Explanation

D8630

BLOCK use this value when

monitoring

D 8631 BLOCK1 current running instruction

D8632 BLOCK2 current running instruction

……. …….

…….. …….

D8730 BLOCK10 current running instruction

Page 337: PLC Software MANUAL - Xinje-support-centre-listo. · PDF filePLC Software Manual Page 3 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2 3-14 [NOP], [END] 76 3-15 [GROUP], [GROUPE] 77 3-16 Programming Notes 78

PLC Software Manual Page 337 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2

Example:

This example is used in the tracking system. The process as follows:

Output some pulses and prohibit exterior interruption.

Continue outputting the pulse but at low speed, and allow exterior interruption. When checked

the exterior cursor signal, stop the pulse outputting and machine running.

Ladder chart:

The instruction list content:

RST M8050

Notes:

M8050: prohibit the exterior interruption

MOV K100 D100

SBLOCKE

MOV K1000 D0

MOV K20000 D2

MOV K0 D4

I 0000

IRET

M 8000 STOP Y0

M8002 ( )S

M8050

X0

↑SBLOCK Sequence block1

DPLSR D 0 D2 D4 Y0

Instruction list

DPLSR D 100 D102 D104 Y0

M8000

MOV K300 D102

MOV K20 D104

( )SM8050

Output the pulses at low speed

PLC power on, prohibit exterior interruption

BLOCK starts

Output the pulses and move some distance

Reset M8050, open exterior interruption

BLOCK ends

The first pulse frequency

The first pulse numbers

Accelerate/decelerate time for the first pulse

The second pulse frequency

The second pulse numbers

Accelerate/decelerate time for the second pulse

Stop outputting the pulse

Close the interruption

The interruption ends

The interruption starts

Page 338: PLC Software MANUAL - Xinje-support-centre-listo. · PDF filePLC Software Manual Page 3 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2 3-14 [NOP], [END] 76 3-15 [GROUP], [GROUPE] 77 3-16 Programming Notes 78

PLC Software Manual Page 338 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2

11 Special Function Instructions

In this chapter, we introduce PWM pulse width modulation, frequency detect, precise time,

interruption etc;

11-1.PWM Pulse Width Modulation

11-2.Frequency Detect

11-3.Precise Time

11-4.Interruption

Page 339: PLC Software MANUAL - Xinje-support-centre-listo. · PDF filePLC Software Manual Page 3 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2 3-14 [NOP], [END] 76 3-15 [GROUP], [GROUPE] 77 3-16 Programming Notes 78

PLC Software Manual Page 339 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2

Instructions List

Mnemonic Function Circuit and soft components Chapter

Pulse Width Modulation, Frequency Detection

PWM

Output pulse with the

specified occupied ratio

and frequency

PWM S1 S2 D

11-1

FRQM Frequency Detection FRQM S1 D S2 S3

11-2

Time

STR Precise Time STR D1 D2

11-3

STRR Read Precise Time

Register

STRR S

11-3

STRS Stop Precise Time STRS S

11-3

Interruption

EI Enable Interruption EI

11-4-1

DI Disable Interruption DI

11-4-1

IRET Interruption Return IRET

11-4-1

Page 340: PLC Software MANUAL - Xinje-support-centre-listo. · PDF filePLC Software Manual Page 3 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2 3-14 [NOP], [END] 76 3-15 [GROUP], [GROUPE] 77 3-16 Programming Notes 78

PLC Software Manual Page 340 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2

11-1 PWM Pulse with Modulation

1: Instruction’s Summary

Instruction to realize PWM pulse width modulation

PWM pulse width modulation [PWM]

16 bits

instruction

PWM 32 bits

instruction

-

execution

condition

normally ON/OFF coil suitable

models XC1、XC2、XC3、XC5、XCM

hardware

requirement

- software

requirement

-

2: Operands

Operands Function Type

S1 specify the occupy ratio value or soft component’s ID number 16 bits, BIN

S2 specify the output frequency or soft component’s ID number 16 bits, BIN

D specify the pulse output port bit

3: Suitable Soft Components

Operands System Constant Module

D FD ED TD CD DX DY DM DS K /H ID QD

S1 ● ● ● ● ●

S2 ● ● ● ● ●

Word

Bit

Operands System

X Y M S T C Dn.m

D ●

Page 341: PLC Software MANUAL - Xinje-support-centre-listo. · PDF filePLC Software Manual Page 3 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2 3-14 [NOP], [END] 76 3-15 [GROUP], [GROUPE] 77 3-16 Programming Notes 78

PLC Software Manual Page 341 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2

PWM K100 D10 Y0X0

S1· S2· D·

T0

t

The occupy ratio n: 1~255

Output pulse f: 0~72KHz

Pulse is output at Y000 or Y001 (Please use transistor output)

The output occupy/empty ratio of PMW =n /256×100%

PWM output use the unit of 0.1Hz, so when set (S2) frequency, the set value is 10 times

of the actual frequency (i.e. 10f). E.g.:to set the frequency as 72KHz, then set value in

(S2) is 720000.

When X000 is ON, output PWM wave;when X000 is OFF, stop output. PMW output

doesn’t have pulse accumulation.

In the left graph: T0=1/f

T/T0=n/256

Function and Action

Page 342: PLC Software MANUAL - Xinje-support-centre-listo. · PDF filePLC Software Manual Page 3 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2 3-14 [NOP], [END] 76 3-15 [GROUP], [GROUPE] 77 3-16 Programming Notes 78

PLC Software Manual Page 342 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2

11-2 Frequency Testing

1: Instruction’s Summary

Instruction to realize frequency testing

frequency testing [FRQM]

16 bits

instruction

FRQM 32 bits

instruction

-

execution

condition

normally ON/OFF coil suitable

models XC1、XC2、XC3、XC5、XCM

hardware

requirement

- software

requirement

-

2: Operands

Operands Function Type

S1 Specify the sampling pulse number or soft component’s ID

number

16 bits, BIN

S2 Specify the frequency division choice’s number 16 bits, BIN

S3 Specify the pulse input port bit

D specify the tested result’s soft component’s number 16 bits, BIN

3: Suitable Soft Components

Operands System Constant Module

D FD ED TD CD DX DY DM DS K /H ID QD

S1 ● ● ● ●

S2 ●

D ● ● ●

Word

Bit Operands System

X Y M S T C Dn.m

S3 ●

Page 343: PLC Software MANUAL - Xinje-support-centre-listo. · PDF filePLC Software Manual Page 3 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2 3-14 [NOP], [END] 76 3-15 [GROUP], [GROUPE] 77 3-16 Programming Notes 78

PLC Software Manual Page 343 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2

FRQM K20 D100 K1 X003X000

D·S1· S2· S3·

S1: sampling pulse number: the number to calculate the pulse frequency

D: tested result, the unit is Hz.

S2: Frequency division choice. It can be K1 or K2;

When the frequency division is K1, the range is: no less than 9Hz, precision

range: 9~18KHz.

When the frequency division is K2, the range: no less than 300Hz, precision

range: 300~400KHz.

In frequency testing, if choose frequency division as K2, the frequency testing

precision is higher than frequency division K1.

When X000 is ON, FRQM will test 20 pulse cycles from X003 every scan cycle.

Calculate the frequency’s value and save into D100. Test repeatedly. If the tested

frequency’s value is smaller than the test bound, then return the test value as 0.

The pulse output to X number:

Model X Number

XC2 series 14/16/24/32/48/60 I/O X1、X6、X7

XC3 series

14 I/O X2、X3

24/32 I/O X1、X11、X12

48/60 I/O、XC3-19AR-E X4、X5

XC5 series

24/32 I/O X3

48/60 I/O X1、X11、X12

XCM series 24/32 I/O X3

Function and Action

Page 344: PLC Software MANUAL - Xinje-support-centre-listo. · PDF filePLC Software Manual Page 3 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2 3-14 [NOP], [END] 76 3-15 [GROUP], [GROUPE] 77 3-16 Programming Notes 78

PLC Software Manual Page 344 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2

11-3 Precise Time

1: Instruction List

Read and stop precise time when execute precise time;

precise time [STR]

16 bits

instruction

- 32 bits

instruction

STR

execution

condition

edge activation suitable

models XC1、XC2、XC3、XC5、XCM

hardware

requirement

- software

requirements

-

read precise time [STRR]

16 bits

instruction

- 32 bits

instruction

STRR

execution

condition

edge activation suitable

models XC1、XC2、XC3、XC5、XCM

hardware

requirement

V3.0e and above software

requirements

-

stop precise time [STRS]

16 bits

instruction

- 32 bits

instruction

STRS

execution

condition

edge activation suitable

models XC1、XC2、XC3、XC5、XCM

hardware

requirement

V3.0e and above software

requirements

-

2: Operands

Operands Function Type

D Timer’s Number bit

D1 Timer’s Number bit

D2 specify timer’s value or soft component’s ID

number

16 bits, BIN

3: Suitable Soft Components

operands system constant module

D FD ED TD CD DX DY DM DS K /H ID QD

D2 ● ● ● ● ●

Word

Bit operands system

X Y M S T C Dn.m

D ●

D1 ●

Function and Actions

Page 345: PLC Software MANUAL - Xinje-support-centre-listo. · PDF filePLC Software Manual Page 3 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2 3-14 [NOP], [END] 76 3-15 [GROUP], [GROUPE] 77 3-16 Programming Notes 78

PLC Software Manual Page 345 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2

《Precise Time》

STR T600 K100X0

D1· D2·

Y0T600

RST T600M0

See time graph below:

X0

T600

100ms 100ms

M0

《read the precise time》、《stop precise time》

D1: Timer’s number. Range: T600~T618 (T600、T602、T604…T618, the number

should be even)

D2: Time Value

The precise timer works in form of 1ms

The precise timer is 32 bits, the count range is 0~+2,147,483,647.

When X000 turns from OFF to ON, timer T600 starts to time, when time

accumulation reaches 100ms, set T600; if X000 again turns from OFF to ON,

timer T600 turns from ON to OFF,restart to time, when time accumulation

reaches 100ms, T600 again reset. See graph below:

When run STR instruction, reset the timer, then start to time;

Page 346: PLC Software MANUAL - Xinje-support-centre-listo. · PDF filePLC Software Manual Page 3 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2 3-14 [NOP], [END] 76 3-15 [GROUP], [GROUPE] 77 3-16 Programming Notes 78

PLC Software Manual Page 346 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2

11-4 Interruption

STRR T600X0

STRS T600M0

STR T600 K100X0

RST T600M0

I3001

IRET

FEND

Interruption Tag correspond with the Timer

Timer’s Nr. Interruption Tag

T600 I3001

T602 I3002

T604 I3003

T606 I3004

T608 I3005

T610 I3006

T612 I3007

T614 I3008

T616 I3009

T618 I3010

When the precise time reaches the count value, generate a corresponding

interruption tag, execute some interruption subroutines.

Start the precise time in precise time interruption;

Every precise timer has its own interruption tag, see table below:

When X000 changes from OFF to be ON, timer

T600 starts to time. When time accumulates to

100ms, set T600; meantime, generate an

interruption, the program jumps to interruption tag

I3001 and execute the subroutine.

When X000 changes from OFF to ON, move the current

precise time value into TD600 immediately, regardless of

the scan cycle;

When M000 changes from OFF to ON, execute STRS

instruction immediately, stop precise time and refresh the

count value in TD600. Regardless of the scan cycle;

Precious Time Interruption

Page 347: PLC Software MANUAL - Xinje-support-centre-listo. · PDF filePLC Software Manual Page 3 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2 3-14 [NOP], [END] 76 3-15 [GROUP], [GROUPE] 77 3-16 Programming Notes 78

PLC Software Manual Page 347 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2

XC Series PLCs are equipped with an interruption function. The interruption function includes

external interruption and time interruption. With the interruption function we can utilize some

special programs. This function is not effected by the scan cycle.

11-4-1 External Interruption

The input terminals X can be used to input external interruption. Each input terminal

corresponds with one external interruption. The input’s rising/falling edge can activate the

interruption. The interruption subroutine is written behind the main program (behind FEND).

After interruption generates, the main program stops running immediately, turn to run the

correspond subroutine. After subroutine running ends, continue to execute the main program.

Main Prog. Main Prog.

Subroutine

Input interrupt

External Interruption’s Port Definition

Page 348: PLC Software MANUAL - Xinje-support-centre-listo. · PDF filePLC Software Manual Page 3 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2 3-14 [NOP], [END] 76 3-15 [GROUP], [GROUPE] 77 3-16 Programming Notes 78

PLC Software Manual Page 348 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2

XC3-14

Input

Terminal

Pointer Nr. Disable the

interruption

instruction

Rising

Interruption

Falling

Interruption

X7 I0000 I0001 M8050

XC2 series、XC3-24/32、XC5-48/60

Input

Terminal

Pointer Nr. Disable the

interruption

instruction

Rising

Interruption

Falling

Interruption

X2 I0000 I0001 M8050

X5 I0100 I0101 M8051

X10 I0200 I0201 M8052

XC3-48/60、XC3-19AR-E

Input

Terminal

Pointer Nr. Disable the

interruption

instruction

Rising

Interruption

Falling

Interruption

X10 I0000 I0001 M8050

X7 I0100 I0101 M8051

X6 I0200 I0201 M8052

XC5-24/32、XCM-24/32-

Input

Terminal

Pointer Nr. Disable the

interruption

instruction

Rising

Interruption

Falling

Interruption

X2 I0000 I0001 M8050

X5 I0100 I0101 M8051

X10 I0200 I0201 M8052

X11 I0300 I0301 M8053

X12 I0400 I0401 M8054

Interruption Instruction

Page 349: PLC Software MANUAL - Xinje-support-centre-listo. · PDF filePLC Software Manual Page 3 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2 3-14 [NOP], [END] 76 3-15 [GROUP], [GROUPE] 77 3-16 Programming Notes 78

PLC Software Manual Page 349 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2

Enable Interruption [EI]、Disable Interruption [DI]、Interruption Return [IRET]

If use EI instruction to allow interruption,

then when scanning the program, if

interruption input changes from OFF to be

ON, then execute subroutine①、②, return to

the original main program;

Interruption pointer (I****) should be behind

FEND instruction;

PLC is default to allow interruption

Interruption’s Range Limitation

Page 350: PLC Software MANUAL - Xinje-support-centre-listo. · PDF filePLC Software Manual Page 3 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2 3-14 [NOP], [END] 76 3-15 [GROUP], [GROUPE] 77 3-16 Programming Notes 78

PLC Software Manual Page 350 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2

11-4-2 Time Interruption

Via program with DI instruction, set

interruption forbidden area;

Allow interruption input between

EI~DI

If interruption forbidden is not

required, please program only with EI,

program with DI is not required.

Every input interruption is equipped with

special relay (M8050~M8052) to disable

interruption;

In the left program, if use M0 to set M8050

“ON”, then disable the interruption input at

channel 0.

Disable the Interruption

Page 351: PLC Software MANUAL - Xinje-support-centre-listo. · PDF filePLC Software Manual Page 3 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2 3-14 [NOP], [END] 76 3-15 [GROUP], [GROUPE] 77 3-16 Programming Notes 78

PLC Software Manual Page 351 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2

Y0

FEND

I4010

INC D0

IRET

X0

M8000

Interruption

Nr.

Interruption

Forbidden

Instruction

Description

I40** M8056

“**” represents time

interruption’s time, range

from 1 to 99, unit is ms.

I41** M8057

I42** M8058

I43** -

I44** -

I45** -

I46** -

I47** -

I48** -

I49** -

Within the main program’s execution cycle, if you need to handle a special program; or

during the sequential scanning, a special program needs to be executed at a certain

time, time interruption function is required. This function is not affected by PLC’s scan

cycle, every Nm, executes a time interruption subroutine.

Time interruption is defaulted in open status, time interruption subroutine is similar with

other interruption subroutine, it should be written behind the main program, starts with

I40xx, ends with IRET.

There are 10CH time interruptions. The represent method is I40**~I49** (“**” means time

interruption’s time, unit is ms. For example, I4010 means run one channel time interruption

every 10ms.

Functions and Actions

Interruption Number

Interruption Range’s Limitation

Page 352: PLC Software MANUAL - Xinje-support-centre-listo. · PDF filePLC Software Manual Page 3 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2 3-14 [NOP], [END] 76 3-15 [GROUP], [GROUPE] 77 3-16 Programming Notes 78

PLC Software Manual Page 352 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2

FEND

I4010

IRET

DI

EI

EI

M8056

FEND

I4020

IRET

END

M0

Normally time interruption is in “allow” status

With EI、DI can set interruption’s allow or forbidden area. As in the above graph, all time

interruptions are forbidden between DI~EI, and allowed beyond DI~EI.

Interruption Allowed

Interruption Allowed

Interruption Forbidden

Interruption Program

The first 3CH interruptions are equipped

with special relays (M8056~M8059) to

forbid interrupt

In the left example program, if use M0 to

enable M8056 “ON”, the forbid 0CH’s

time interruption.

Interruption

Allowed

Interruption

Program

Interruption Forbidden

Page 353: PLC Software MANUAL - Xinje-support-centre-listo. · PDF filePLC Software Manual Page 3 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2 3-14 [NOP], [END] 76 3-15 [GROUP], [GROUPE] 77 3-16 Programming Notes 78

PLC Software Manual Page 353 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2

12 Program Application Samples

In this chapter, we make some samples about pulse output instruction, Modbus

communication instructions and free format communication instructions etc.

12-1.Pulse Output Application

12-2.Modbus Communication Application

12-3.Free Format Communication Application

Page 354: PLC Software MANUAL - Xinje-support-centre-listo. · PDF filePLC Software Manual Page 3 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2 3-14 [NOP], [END] 76 3-15 [GROUP], [GROUPE] 77 3-16 Programming Notes 78

PLC Software Manual Page 354 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2

12-1 Pulse Output Application

Example: below is the example program to send high/low pulse in turn

Each Parameter:

Stepping motor parameters: step angle= 1.8 degrees/step, scale=40, pulse number per rotate

is 8000

High frequency pulse: maximum frequency is 100KHz, total pulse number is 24000 (3 rotates)

Low frequency pulse: maximum frequency is 10KHz, total pulse number is 8000 (1 rotates)

Ladder Program:

M10

DMOV K8000 D210

M1 T0 K20( )

T0

M8002SET M0

M10� DMOV K100000 D200

DMOV K24000 D210

MOV K100 D220

� DMOV K10000 D200

RST M1

SET M0

M8170RST M0�

SET M1

ALT M10

DPLSR D200 D210 D220 Y0M0

Instruction List:

LD M8002 //initial positive pulse coil

SET M0 //set M0 ON

LDF M10 //M10 falling edge activate condition

OR M8002 //Initial data

DMOV K100000 D200 //move decimal data 100000 into DWORD D200

DMOV K24000 D210 // move decimal data 24000 into DWORD D210

MOV K100 D220 // move decimal data 100 into DWORD D220

Page 355: PLC Software MANUAL - Xinje-support-centre-listo. · PDF filePLC Software Manual Page 3 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2 3-14 [NOP], [END] 76 3-15 [GROUP], [GROUPE] 77 3-16 Programming Notes 78

PLC Software Manual Page 355 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2

LDP M10 //M10 rising edge activate condition

DMOV K10000 D200 // move decimal data 10000 into DWORD D200

DMOV K8000 D210 // move decimal data 8000 into DWORD D210

LD M1 //M1 status activate condition

OUT T0 K20 //100ms timer T0, time 2 seconds

LD T0 //T0 status activate condition

RST M1 //reset M1

SET M0 //set M0

LDF M8170 //M8170 falling edge activate condition

RST M0 //reset M0

SET M1 //set M1

ALT M10 //M10 status NOT

LD M0 //M0 status activate condition

DPLSR D200 D210 D220 Y0 //value in D200 is frequency、value in D210 is

pulse number、value is D220 is acceleration/deceleration time, send pulse via Y0;

Explanation:

When PLC changes from STOP to be RUN, M8002 gets a scan cycle;

set the high frequency pulse parameters into D200、D210,

set the acceleration/deceleration speed to D220,

set M0, the motor starts to run 3 rounds with high frequency.

Meantime M8170 sets; the motor runs 3 rounds and decelerate, stop, coil M8170 reset;

then reset M0, set M1, NOT M10;

set the low frequency pulse parameters into D200、D210;

the timer time lags 2sec, when time reaches, reset M1;

set M0, the motors starts to run 1 round with low frequency;

after this starts to run with high frequency.

Repeat this alternation time by time;

Page 356: PLC Software MANUAL - Xinje-support-centre-listo. · PDF filePLC Software Manual Page 3 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2 3-14 [NOP], [END] 76 3-15 [GROUP], [GROUPE] 77 3-16 Programming Notes 78

PLC Software Manual Page 356 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2

12-2 Modbus Communication Application

E.g.1: realize Modbus read/write among one master and three slaves

Operation: (1) write content in D10~D14 to D10~D14 of 2# slave;

(2) read D15~D19 of the slaves to D15~D19 of the mater; anyhow, write the first

five registers’ content to the slaves, the left five registers are used to store

the content from the slaves;

(3)3# 、4# slaves are similar;

Soft component’s comments:

D0: communication station number

D1: offset

M2: 2# communication error

M3: 3# communication error

M4: 4# communication error

M8137: COM2 communication error end signal

M8138: COM2 communication correct end signal

Ladder

S0: write the target station

S1: read the target station

S2: judge the communication status

S3: offset the communication ID

T200: communication interval 1

T201: communication interval 2

T202: self reset 1 of communication error

T203: self reset 2 of communication error

Page 357: PLC Software MANUAL - Xinje-support-centre-listo. · PDF filePLC Software Manual Page 3 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2 3-14 [NOP], [END] 76 3-15 [GROUP], [GROUPE] 77 3-16 Programming Notes 78

PLC Software Manual Page 357 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2

In PLC’s first scan cycle,

evaluate the “communication

station” to be 2;

Evaluate the “offset” to be 0

2# communication error reset

3# communication error reset

4# communication error reset

S0 starts, T202 counts 2S, which is the

communication wait time

When the communication wait time

reaches, no matter the communication

succeeds or not, T200 time 20ms, this

time is used start the next

communicationT200 time reaches, or on the

power up, execute the RUN

operation to the target station

Open the flow S1

Page 358: PLC Software MANUAL - Xinje-support-centre-listo. · PDF filePLC Software Manual Page 3 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2 3-14 [NOP], [END] 76 3-15 [GROUP], [GROUPE] 77 3-16 Programming Notes 78

PLC Software Manual Page 358 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2

S1

OUT T201 K2

M8137

S

M0[D0]

( )

T203

OUT T203 K200

T201

STLE

STL S1

M8138

M8002

REGR D0 K15 K5 D15[D1] K2

( )S

S2

STL S2

S2

M8138

M8137

R

M0[D0]( )

M8138

M8137( )S

S3

STLE

STL S3

S3

≤D0 K4

INC D0

ADD K10 D1 D1

�D0 K4

MOV K2 D0

MOV K0 D1

( )SS0

STLE

END

S0 starts, T203 time 2s, which is the

communication waiting time

When communication waiting time

reaches, no matter the communication

succeeded or not, T201 counts 20ms, this

time is used to start the next

T201 times reach, or on the

power up, execute the read

operation with the target stations

Open flow S2

Flow S2 is used to judge the

communication status. Failure

will set the correspond coil;

success will reset the

correspond coil;

If the station number is not larger than 4,

the station register add 1, the offset add

10

If the station number is larger than 4,

evaluate the station register 1; clear the

offset register

Open flow S0

Page 359: PLC Software MANUAL - Xinje-support-centre-listo. · PDF filePLC Software Manual Page 3 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2 3-14 [NOP], [END] 76 3-15 [GROUP], [GROUPE] 77 3-16 Programming Notes 78

PLC Software Manual Page 359 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2

Program Explanation:

When PLC turns from STOP to RUN, M8002 gets a scan cycle. S0 flow open, write the

master’s D10——D14 to slave 2# D10——D14. no matter the communication is success or

not, turn to S1 flow; check the previous communication written condition. After certain time

delay, continue to read D15~D19 data from 2#. After this reading entr S2 flow, check if the

communication is success. If failed, set M23, enter alarming. After finishing the communication

with 2#, enter S3, then flow S3 will judge with the station number. If the station number is less

than 1, the offset add 10; or else start from 2# again.

e.g. 2: Below is a sample of XC Series PLC with two XINJE inverters, they communicate via

Modbus communication, XC Series PLCs write the frequency to the two inverters;

set the first inverter’s station to be 1; set the second inverter’s station to be 2; store the

frequency’s set value in D1000 and D2000. execute the frequency setting order via COM

ports;

Program Description:

On the rising edge of M8012, write frequency to the first inverter; on the falling edge of M8012,

write frequency to the second inverter;

Page 360: PLC Software MANUAL - Xinje-support-centre-listo. · PDF filePLC Software Manual Page 3 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2 3-14 [NOP], [END] 76 3-15 [GROUP], [GROUPE] 77 3-16 Programming Notes 78

PLC Software Manual Page 360 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2

12-3 Free Format Communication Application

In this example, we use DH107/DH108 series instruments;

1、Interface Specifications

DH107/DH108 series instruments use asynchronous serial communication interface, the

interface level fits RS232C or RS485 standard. The data format is: 1 start bit, 8 data bits, no

parity, one/two stop bit. The baud rate can be 1200~19200bit/s.

2、Communication Instruction Format

DH107/108 instruments use Hex data form to represent each instruction code and data;

Read/write instructions:

Read: address code +52H (82) +the para.(to read) code +0+0+CRC parity code

Write: address code +43H(67)+ the para.(to write) code +low bytes of the wrote data +

high bytes of the wrote data +CRC parity code

The read instruction’s CRC parity code is: the para. (to read) code *256+82+ADDR

ADDR is instrument’s address para., the range is 0~100 (pay attention not to add 80H). CRC is

the remainder from the addition of the above data (binary 16bits integral). The reminder is 2

bytes, the high byte is behind the low byte;

The write instruction’s CRC parity code is: the para. (to write) code *256+67+ the para.

value (to write) +ADDR

The para. to write represents with 16 bits binary integral;

Regardless of whether it is write or read, the instrument should return data as shown below:

The test value PV+ given value SV+ output value MV and alarm status +read/write

parameters value +CRC parity code

Among in, PV、SV and the read parameters are all in integral form, each occupies two bytes,

MV occupies one byte, the value range is 0~220, alarm status occupies one byte, CRC parity

code occupies two bytes, totally 10 byes.

CRC parity code is the reminder from the result of PV+SV+ (alarm status *256+MV)+

para. value +ADDR;

(for details, please refer to AIBUS communication description)

3、Write the program

After power on the PLC, the PLC read the current temperature every 40ms. During this period,

the user can write the set temperature.

Data zone definition: buffer area of sending data D10~D19

buffer area of accepting data D20~D29

Page 361: PLC Software MANUAL - Xinje-support-centre-listo. · PDF filePLC Software Manual Page 3 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2 3-14 [NOP], [END] 76 3-15 [GROUP], [GROUPE] 77 3-16 Programming Notes 78

PLC Software Manual Page 361 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2

instruction’s station number: D30

read command’s value: D31=52 H

write command’s value: D32=43 H

parameter’s code: D33

temperature setting: D34

CRC parity code: D36

Temperature display: D200,D201

The send data form: 81H 81H 43H 00H c8H 00H 0cH 01H (current temperature display)

Communication parameters setting: baud rate: 9600, 8 data bits, 2 stop bits, no parity

Set FD8220=255; FD8221=5

( the hardware and software must be V2.4 or above)

Page 362: PLC Software MANUAL - Xinje-support-centre-listo. · PDF filePLC Software Manual Page 3 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2 3-14 [NOP], [END] 76 3-15 [GROUP], [GROUPE] 77 3-16 Programming Notes 78

PLC Software Manual Page 362 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2

Ladder:

Write instrument’s station Nr. K1 in to D30

Time 40ms

Output M10

Write the read code 52H into D31

Clear registers D40-D56

D30 add H80 to get value 81H

move D40 (81H) to D10

move D40 (81H) to D11

move D31 (read code 52H) to D12

move D33 (para. code) to D13

write zero to D14

write zero to D15

below is to calculate CRC parity;

D33 multiply K256, the result is saved in

D42

D42 add K82, the result is stored in D44

D44 add D30 (instrument’s station), the

result is saved in D52

Move D52 into D54

Logic AND D54 with HFF, save the result

in D16

Move D52 into D56

Right shift 8 bits with D56 (convert the high

8bits to the low 8 bits)

Logic AND D56 with HFF, save the result

in D17

Page 363: PLC Software MANUAL - Xinje-support-centre-listo. · PDF filePLC Software Manual Page 3 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2 3-14 [NOP], [END] 76 3-15 [GROUP], [GROUPE] 77 3-16 Programming Notes 78

PLC Software Manual Page 363 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2

M11↑

M10H43 D32MOV

K0 D40FMOV D56

D30 H80ADD D40

D40 D10MOV

D40 D11MOV

D32 D12MOV

D33 D13MOV

D34 D42MOV

D34 D44MOV

D33 K256MUL D46

D46 K67ADD D48

D48 D34ADD D50

D52 D54MOV

D44 HFFWAND D15

D52 D56MOV

D44 K8ROR

D54 HFFWAND D16

D42 HFFWAND D14

D50 D30ADD D52

D56 K8ROR

D56 HFFWAND D17

M10↑ D10 K8SEND K2

M11↑

M8132D20 K10RCV K2

D101 K8ROL

D101 D100WOR D200

D103 K8ROL

D102 D103WOR D201

M8134D100 K10D20BMOV↓

Write code H43 into D32

Clear registers D40-D56

D30 (station Nr.) add H80, save the result in D40

Move D40 to D10

Move D40 to D11

Move D32 (write code H43) to D12

Move D33 (para .code) to D13

Move D34 (temp. set) to D42

Logic and D42 with HFF, save data in D14

Move D34 (temp. set) to D44

D44 right shift 8 bits

Logic and D44 with HFF, save data in D15

Below is to calculate CRC parity:

D33 (para. code) multiply K256, save result in D46

D46 add K67, save data in D48

D48 add D34, save data in D50

D50 add D30, save data in D52

Move D52 to D54

Logic and D54 with HFF, save result in D16

Move D52 to D56

Right shift 8 bits with D56

Logic and D56 with HFF, save result in D17

Send data D10-D17 out

Read the returned data and save in D20-D29

Move the returned data to D100~109

Left shift 8 bits with D101

Logic OR D101 with D100, save result in D200

Left shift 8 bits with D103

Logic OR D102 with D103, save result in D201

Page 364: PLC Software MANUAL - Xinje-support-centre-listo. · PDF filePLC Software Manual Page 3 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2 3-14 [NOP], [END] 76 3-15 [GROUP], [GROUPE] 77 3-16 Programming Notes 78

PLC Software Manual Page 364 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2

Program Description:

The above program is written according to DH instrument’s communication protocol, the soft

component’s functions are listed below:

Relationship of sent (SEND) data string and registers:

D10 D11 D12 D13 D14 D15 D16 D17

Read Address

code

Address

code

Read

code

52H

Parameters

code

0 0 CRC

low

bytes

CRC

high

bytes

Write Address

code

Address

code

Write

code

42H

Parameters

code

low

bytes of

the

written

data

high

bytes of

the

written

data

CRC

low

bytes

CRC

high

bytes

Relationship of received (RCV) data (data returned by the instrument) and the registers:

D20 D21 D22 D23 D24 D25 D26 D27 D28 D29

PV low

bytes

PV

high

bytes

SV low

bytes

SV

high

bytes

Output

value

Alarm

status

Read/write

low bytes

Read/write

high bytes

CRC

low

bytes

CRC

high

bytes

When writing a data string according to the communication objects’ protocol, use SEND and

RCV commands from free format communication, user will get the communication with the

objects.

Page 365: PLC Software MANUAL - Xinje-support-centre-listo. · PDF filePLC Software Manual Page 3 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2 3-14 [NOP], [END] 76 3-15 [GROUP], [GROUPE] 77 3-16 Programming Notes 78

PLC Software Manual Page 365 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2

For help and support regarding your XINJE products visit the online

Support Centre or contact us on: [email protected].

www.listo-ltd.com

www.xinje-support-centre-listo.com

International partners with:

Documentation Reference

Document Number Revision Date

LMAN 021 R2 V2 18/07/2012

XINJE IS A REGISTERED TRADEMARK OF XINJE ELECTRICAL CO.LTD. REPLICATION

OF THE INFORMATION CONTAINED WITHIN THIS DOCUMENT WITHOUT PRIOR

NOTIFICATION AND AGREEMENT IS PROHIBITED.

Page 366: PLC Software MANUAL - Xinje-support-centre-listo. · PDF filePLC Software Manual Page 3 of 365 LMAN021_R2V2 3-14 [NOP], [END] 76 3-15 [GROUP], [GROUPE] 77 3-16 Programming Notes 78

Contact usListo Ltd.46a Derrymore RoadGawley’s GateCo ArmaghNorthern IrelandBT67 0BW

0843 557 2130

[email protected]

UK & Ireland Distributors for